Home

3172-W2 VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator User Manual

1. PG1 PG2 ARB Keyword Parameter Form Default n 1 n 2 n 3 3172 SOURce lt n gt D v LIST x y VOLTage lt numeric value gt lt numeric value gt No default value x v REPeat lt numeric value gt lt numeric value gt No default value x y COUNt lt numeric value gt 0 x vi GENeration DSEQuence DSEQ D y SRATe lt numeric value gt No default value D y AM v SOURce INTernal EXTernal INT x v STATe OFF ON OFF D v ROSCillator x y SOURce INTernal EXTernal INT x v OUTPut lt n gt x x x v IMPedance 0 50 93 0 D y STATe OFF ON OFF D y TTLTrg lt y gt v SOURce INT lt 1 to 8 gt INT2 D y STATe OFF ON OFF D y FILTer x v LPASs x E FREQuency 2e6 2 2e6 22e6 22e6 D y STATe OFF ON OFF D y EXTernal x x y STATe OFF ON OFF D D v TRIGger D D D y SEQuence D D x y SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt y gt IMMediate IMM D D D y SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS x x x y DELay lt numeric value gt 1e 8 D x x v GATE x D D y SOURce TTLTrg lt y gt TTLT8 x x x v LEVel HIGH LOW HIGH D D D v DELay lt numeric value gt 2 01e153 D x x INITiate lt n gt x x D y IMMediate No default value x x x y CALibration x x D y ALL No default value x x x DATA3 STARt ADDRess H lt numeric hex value gt No default value D MEM3 DATA H lt numeric hex value gt No default value x DIGital3 x y STIMulus x y PATTern VALue lt
2. Item in DMM Low Limit Target High Limit Cal Panel Function Volts Volts Volts Adjust Pot Chan PG1 RV5 27 VDC 0 020 0 0 020 Chan PG2 RV2 28 VDC 0 020 0 0 020 29 VDC 0 020 0 0 020 Set DMM function to Volts AC 30 VAC 0 020 0 0 020 Set DMM function to Volts DC 31 VDC 0 995 1 1 005 32 VDC 2 490 2 5 2 510 33 VDC 3 980 4 4 020 34 VDC 5 475 5 5 5 525 35 VDC 6 965 7 7 035 36 VDC 8 460 8 5 8 540 37 VDC 9 460 9 5 9 540 38 VDC 1 005 1 0 995 39 VDC 2 510 2 5 2 490 40 VDC 4 020 4 3 980 41 VDC 5 525 5 5 5 475 42 VDC 7 035 7 6 965 43 VDC 8 540 8 5 8 460 44 VDC 9 540 9 5 9 460 Set DMM function to Volts AC 45 VAC 2 485 2 5 2 515 46 VAC 0 745 0 75 0 755 47 VAC 0 2485 0 250 0 2515 48 VAC 0 0745 0 075 0 0755 49 VAC 0 0245 0 025 0 0255 50 VAC 0 0070 0 0075 0 0080 END Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Each P2 module has two output channels PG1 and PG2 When calibrating PG1 adjust potentiometer RV5 When calibrating PG2 adjust potentiometer RV2 L o ckin g th e After all items have been calibrated lock the calibration factors as g follows Calibration 1 Click the mouse on the Lock Cal Factors button in the Factors Calibration Panel Figure 7 14 Click Lock Cal Factors button _ Amplitude Figure 7 14 Locking the Calibration Factors 2 A pop up window will appear Figure 7 15 Data Base EZ Serial Humber oom 20
3. Figure 3 11 Linear Transition Ranges There are a number of limitations that must be observed before you program pulse parameters These limitations are grouped into two groups Timing limitations and amplitude limitations The limitations arise from fact that the instrument has a finite frequency range and a finite amplitude span These limitations are summarized in Appendix A of this manual For example the maximum peak to peak amplitude span for a given pulse design is 22 V 20 V in POS and NEG modes and a further limitation is that the positive and negative settings cannot exceed the output amplifier rails of 11 V and 11 V SYMM mode Another example is the leading and trailing edge transition times This is limited by design to 5 ns thus faster transitions cannot be programmed Besides design limitations one may enter into a conflicting situation where one parameter exceeds its limits when programmed in conjunction with another parameter For example programming a period of 10 ms and pulse width of 100 ms is not possible because by definition the pulse width must be smaller than the period The paragraphs below summarize possible settings conflicts and suggests options to resolve the settings conflict If you try to program a parameter that will cause a setting conflict the instrument will automatically detect the problem and issue an error message In this case the output may appear distorted and generate uncontrolled signa
4. 6 28 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual PLL Checks Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary W2 in an adjacent slot Backplane Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Termination 50Q 20 dB feed through attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the model W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode PLL PLL Source As specified in Table 31 Waveform Sine wave Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Configure the auxiliary W2 as follows Frequency 10 kHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Continuous Output On Trigger Output As specified in Table 31 Test Procedure 1 Verify backplane PLL lock using Table 6 31 Table 6 31 PLL Tests Phase Offset Auxiliary W2 W2 PLL Oscilloscope Backplane Trigger Setting Source Setting Reading Pass Fail TTLTO ON TTLTO ECLT1 ON ECLT1 This tests the operation of the PM function After the W2 locks to an PM Operation external trigger source the start phase of the W2 can be modified in reference to the external signal using dc levels The dc levels are applied to the PM input and control phase shifts of 20 V Note that this test is not applicable for the 3172R W2 version Astronics Test Systems 6 29 3172 User Manual PM Checks Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Counter DC supply source fun
5. Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 79 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the synchronization between the two P2 channels The Two Channel synchronization process assures that the two channels transition Synchronization simultaneously and on the same edge with as little skew as possible between the first transitions Perform the two channel synchronization tests if you suspect that the two channels do not synchronize as expected To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Synchronization Equipment Oscilloscope Counter Tests Preparation 1 Connect the P2 channel 1 and channel 2 outputs to two oscilloscope inputs 2 Configure channel 1 as follows Waveform Single Period 15 us Pulse width 1 us Output On 3 Configure channel 2 as follows Waveform Single Period 100 us Pulse width 1 us Output On Clock Source Channel 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify on the oscilloscope that the period of channel 2 is 15 us and is synchronized with the output of channel 1 Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify the clock source as follows Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 2 3 Verify on the oscilloscope that the period of channel 1 is 100 us and is synchronized with the output of channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 80 A
6. 500 Transitions Exceed Width 3 50 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Error 222 Data out of range occurs when attempting to program an amplitude which is smaller or larger than the specified limit This error will occur in all run mode options and under the following conditions HIL LOL lt 2 5 mV HIL LOL 2 22 V 20 V for POS NEG ranges This error will be detected on all pulse modes and options The minimum level is an absolute value that the P2 can accept The same will occur if you reverse the high and low levels because the instrument will sense it as a negative voltage which is less than the minimum 2 5 mV limit The low and high limit errors are detected by a mechanism that is common to all of the operating modes of the instrument and is not just unique to the operation of the pulse generator Corrective Actions 1 Modify the high level value 2 Modify the low level value Error 500 Transitions Larger than Width occurs when attempting to program leading or trailing edge values that are larger than the programmed pulse width This error may occur in all pulse and run modes except in external pulse width pulse mode under the following conditions 0 625 LEE TRE gt WID When such an error occurs the resultant output would have looked as illustrated in Figure 3 12 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective ac
7. Table 6 46 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests P2 Period Setting Counter Period Reading Limits Counter Reading Pass 100 0000000 ms 10ms 300us 10 000000 me 1ms 30us sz 100 000 us 10ys 300 5nsf 10 000ps ts 30 5ns L 1000ps 100ns 3 5ns Linear Transitions Accuracy Astronics Test Systems This tests the accuracy of the transitions when the pulse is set to have linear transitions Linear transitions imply that the slopes of the rise and fall times can be adjusted to have variable angles other than the fastest upslope and down slope transitions The transition times are measured from 10 to 90 of the amplitude setting regardless of the high and low amplitude level settings Linear transition control is independent for each channel however one must keep in mind that the leading and trailing edges must remain within the same slope range boundaries and that the leading edge is the governing parameter which means that the leading edge setting defines the transition range and the trailing edge must follow through To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only 6 57 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Linear Transitions Equipment Counter timer Accuracy Tests Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Rise Time Measurement function Termination 500 2
8. 5 50 650 Append Insert Delete 25 675 5 25 700 Delete All Undo 500 1200 a S 75 1275 Section Properties 30 1305 Design Units V ms 30 1335 Section Start O ms 50 1385 Repeat fs Duration x R 4 55 ms Vertical Scale AN 0 5 V Div Horizontal Scale 4155ms 415 5ms Div fa SDComposer File D View Help Settings ahh Start View o Apply 1000000000101010101011000000000000000000000000011111111 1234567 9 1234567 9 123456749 1234567 9 123456749 1234 o 10 20 30 40 Ready General Description Figure 1 6 ArbConnection Serial Data Composer Example This section describes the 3172 general features and performance as well as its output functions run modes and operating modes W2 Output Waveforms The W2 module is a digital waveform generator that creates virtually any type of waveform Unlike conventional function and pulse generators the W2 creates waveforms digitally and stores them in memory A clock generator then clocks the data from memory to a digital to analog converter DAC to convert the digital data to an output waveform Since the waveform memory is volatile its data is lost when you turn off the instrument However you may create as many waveforms as desired on the host computer and quickly download them to the W2 memory as needed Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The memory size is large eno
9. Output Run Mode Standard Arbitrary Sequence Half Cycle The Output panel is always visible because this is the panel that controls operating functions run modes and sets the outputs on and off You may hide or show other panels by clicking the appropriate item under Operation Figure 4 4 The Operation panels are detailed in the next section ArbConnection displays the Output panel shown in Figure 4 5 automatically The buttons and LEDs are arranged in the following groups General Parameters These controls adjust amplitude and offset Wave Mode This group lets you select the waveform mode Run Mode These controls are for selecting the Continuous mode or one of the interrupted modes Trigger Gated or Burst PLL These controls enable and disable phase locking and select the source signal Sync Output This group enables and disables the sync signals on the VXlbus backplane and front panel selects the sync qualifier and allows you to adjust the sync pulse position and width relative to the waveform Output These controls are for turning the output signal on and off and for selecting the load impedance Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual K Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 5 Output Panel When you click on a button the 3172 responds immediately When you change a numeric parameter on the display the 3172 does not respond until you click on the Modify Exe
10. Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Updating the Firmware D VATNS Only qualified persons may perform firmware updates DO NOT attempt to perform this operation unless you are trained as you may otherwise render the instrument inoperable Always verify with customer service that you have the latest firmware file before starting an update Updatin Before you update the firmware check the revision level of the p g programming file on your computer Each firmware update was done Registered based fora reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with Firmware 31 72R the update to see if an update will solve your problem There are a number of ways to check the revision level of your firmware 1 Using Windows Explorer open the C WINDOWS SYSTEM32 folder in the Windows directory and locate the file RI3172 W2 dll Right click with your mouse on the file name and select properties Click on the Version tab and note the Product Version information as listed in this tab 2 Using a SCPI command from an external utility you can read the firmware version by sending the following query SYST INFO FIRM VERS The response is a string showing the firmware version e g 3 07 3 Using ArbConnection select the General Filters panel from the System tab and click on the Firmware Version button The General Filters panel with the firm
11. Sinewave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DDS Output Preparation 1 Connect W2 output to the spectrum analyzer input Use 50 Q and 20 dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the W2 as follows Function Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude 5V Output On CW Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sinewave spectral purity DDS Waveforms tests using Table 6 17 Table 6 17 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS ssh Tests W2 Freq Reading Spectr Analyzer Settings Limits 1 MHz gt 44 dBc 100 a 5 MHz gt 44 dBc 1 MHz 10 MHz gt 44 dBc 1 MHz Astronics Test Systems 6 11 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 2 Change amplitude to 10V and perform sine wave spectral purity DDS waveforms tests using Table 6 18 Table 6 18 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests Continued W2 Freq Reading Spectrum Analyzer Settings Limits 1 MHz gt 35 dBc 100 a 5 MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 10 MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz Sinewave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Amplitude 5V Output On Frequency Initially 1 kHz then as required by the test Test
12. 5 86 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual PSK PHASe lt start_phase gt Description This programs the start phase of the carrier waveform The start phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to O Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_phase gt 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 3172 returns the present start phase value PSK PHASe SHIFted lt shift_phase gt Description This programs the shifted phase The phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_phase gt 0 to 360 Numeric 180 Programs the shift phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 3172 returns the present shift phase value PSK RATE lt rate gt Description This allows the user to select PSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the PSK data array are clocked causing the output phase to hop from start to shifted phase values and vice versa Note that this command is dedicated for programming the PSK modulation function only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the phase shifts from start to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present baud value The returned valu
13. Description Selects the frequency measurement function Frequency is measured on continuous signal only The result of the frequency measurement has gate dependent resolution The 3172 displays 7 digits of frequency reading in one second of gate time If the gate time is decreased the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the gate time interval Reduce the gate time when you want to accelerate the reading process however always make sure that the period of the signal is smaller than the gate time setting Selects the period measurement function Period can be measured on either continuous or non repetitive signals Since the period of the signal is directly proportional to the gating time the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the period of the signal If you need to have more resolution and you signal is repetitive use the period averaged measurement function The best resolution in period measurements is 100 ns Selects the period averaged measurement function Period 5 101 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H averaged can be measured continuous signals only In fact this is the inverse function of frequency and therefore gate time determines the resolution of the reading Reduce the gate time when you want to accelerate the reading process however always make sure that the period of the signal is smaller than the gate time setting PULSe Discrete Selects the pulse width me
14. Figure 4 59 Parameters Tab The recommended method is to let the 3D composer set up the sample clock and the numbers of points automatically for you however in some cases you may want to fine tune your requirement by pressing the Expand button Figure 4 60 shows the Expanded Parameters options dialog box 4 85 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Expanded Parameters Options x m Wavelength Modulation SCLK 1e6 Force SCLK V Offset Duration Wavelength SCLK Forcing Wavelength modifies SCLK Forcing SCLK modifies Wavelength CH2 fo NEEN Forcing both SCLK amp Wavelength modifies Duration Clear Design Figure 4 60 Expanded Parameters Options Dialog Box The Expanded Parameters options dialog box has three sections Wavelength Modulation SCLK and Offset The wavelength and the modulation SCLK control the duration of the entire wave through the following relationship Duration Modulation SCLK Wavelength Each of the parameters has a finite length and therefore the duration has maximum and minimum intervals The modulation SCLK has a range of 1 Hz to 2 5 MHz and the Wavelength is limited from 2 points to 30 000 points As a result the duration can be programmed from 800 ns to 30 000 s If you do not care to control the wavelength and the SCLK then you can leave the task for the 3D composer In that case you must leave the Force Length and Force SCLK check boxes
15. It has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the frequency of the standard waveform in units of 30e6 Hz The frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits The accuracy of the instrument however can only be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability lt MINimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform to the lowest possible frequency 10e 3 lt MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency 30e6 Response The 3172 returns the present frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FREQuency RASTer lt sclk gt MINimum MAXimum Description This command modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second S s It has no affect on standard waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sclk gt 10e 6 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary and 200e6 sequenced waveform in units of S s The sample clock command can be programmed with resolutions up to 14 digits however the accuracy can be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability lt MINimum gt
16. Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 0 995 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 25 for DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Setup 26 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 2 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 26 for DMM reading of 2 55 V 10 mV Setup 27 4 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 feed through termination Dual Astronics Test Systems 7 31 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 3 995V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 27 for DMM re
17. The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset and exponent settings similar to the following example 100 APPLy USER lt seg_ gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Description This command changes the waveform function to arbitrary and programs the active segment sample clock amplitude and offset simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate standard waveforms the 3172 will stop generating these waveforms will revert to the arbitrary function and will update the arbitrary waveform parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt seg_ gt 1to10k Integer 1 Selects the active segment number of the arbitrary waveform lt sclk gt 10e 6 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary 200e6 waveform in units of S s lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform in 22 units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the arbitrary waveform in units of volts Response The 3172 returns the present segment number sample clock amplitude and offset settings similar to the following example 1 1 6 5 0 5 64 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Seq uenced This group is used to a is ee We ae their respective parameters This will allow you to create multiple sequence Waveform Control table a
18. unmarked If you check the Force SCLK box the wavelength will be modified automatically to match the selected duration If you check the Force Length box the modulation SCLK will be modified automatically to match the selected duration Finally if you check both the Force Length and the Force Modulation SCLK boxes the duration of the 3D profile will be affected To modify wavelength or modulation SCLK check the appropriate box modify the value and click on the Apply button to force the selected value Any successive changes that you make to the edit fields require that you click on the Apply button to accept the new value The Offset group controls DC offsets of the modulated waveform Changing offset does not affect other parameters except the location of the waveform along the vertical axis The Clear Design button resets the 3D composer and the Reduce button closes the dialog box 4 86 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Vertical Controls Astronics Test Systems The Vertical Controls are used for profiling amplitude frequency and phase When you modify the fields in any of the controls the associated graphical screen are automatically updated with the assigned values and display the profile as designed in the vertical control fields The Vertical Controls are shown in Figure 4 61 You can start designing profiles only when one of the control fields is active Control fields become act
19. 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 15 mV Period 1 ms Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 50 for a DMM reading of 7 5 mV 0 5 mV Pulse Response The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times as well as the aberrations are within the specified limits Use this Adjustments procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Note that setup 51 is marked as a factory adjustment and therefore it is not normally required to be performed during normal calibration cycles except if the pulse response of the output stage has been degraded and does not meet the published specification limits or after a repair has been executed on this very circuit Setup 51 5 V Amplitude Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the oscilloscope input 2 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 6V Adjustment 1 Program CAL SETup 51 2 Adjust the trace on the oscilloscope to show 6 vertical divisions 3 Adjust RV4 and RV7 RV1 and RV8 in channel 2 for best Astronics Test Systems 7 63 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H pulse response typically 8 ns transitions and 5 aberrations i Use the following procedures to calibrate
20. 1 ppm 1 year P2 Pulse Generator Specifications Pulse Generator Characteristics Channel Dependency Operating Modes Pulse Width Control Pulse Polarity Pulse transitions Run Modes Description Continuous Triggered Gated Time Accuracy 10 MHz Reference Source Accuracy and Stability Output Characteristics Main Output Channels Connector Impedance Protection A 12 Operation of channels is completely independent of each other but both share the 10 MHz reference source and VXI backplane triggers Single pulse delayed pulse double pulse Programmable width hold duty cycle external width Normal inverted or complemented Fixed or linear and programmable transitions Define how waveforms start and stop Run modes description applies to all waveform types and functions except where noted otherwise Continuously free run output of a waveform Waveform generation can be enabled and disabled from a remote interface only Upon trigger outputs one or more waveform cycles Burst counter controls the number of waveform cycles Last cycle always completed Transition or level enables or disables generator output Last cycle always completed Internal common for both channels or VXI backplane CLK10 gt 0 0001 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance from 19 C to 29 C 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1 ppm year aging rate 2 Front panel Combo D sub 5W5 A1 and A5 Selectable lt 2
21. 10 MHz reference at least 0 1ppm Counter External 10 MHz Preparation Reference 1 Leave counter setting and W2 connections as in last test 2 Connect the 10 MHz reference oscillator to the W2 10 MHz reference input 3 Configure the W2 as follows 10 MHz External Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 3 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 3 Table 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference W2 Setting Counter Reading Pass Fail 10 000000000 MET opsl TI 6 4 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 20 000000000 MIT ont Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the output Amplitude amplifier and attenuators The amplitude accuracy is checked for all Accu racy three amplitude ranges Symmetrical Positive and Negative and for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect W2 Channel to the DMM input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude As specified in the Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests using Tables 6 4 and 6 5 Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC Output DMM Readi
22. 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H FM MARKer lt frequency gt Description This function programs marker frequency position FM marker can be placed inside the following range carrier frequency deviation frequency 2 The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz 30e6 Response The 3172 returns the present marker frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM DATA lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This command downloads FM modulating waveform data to the arbitrary FM memory Arbitrary modulating waveform table data is loaded to the 3172 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message Remember downloading data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory is very different than loading arbitrary waveform data Waveform data programs amplitude domain therefore every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs frequency domain therefore every point sets different sample clock frequency FM DATA 3100 lt binary_block gt This
23. 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the W2 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Output On Test Procedure 1 Toggle W2 trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 2 Verify on the oscilloscope that the W2 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail 6 18 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Trigger Level Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 1V 4 Connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Trigger level OV Ch1 Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify that the W2 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0 1 ms 2 Modify the function generator offset to 2 V and change the W2 trigger level to 4 V Verify that the W2 triggered waveforms are spaced 0 1 ms apart 3 Modify the function generator offset to 2
24. 50 us Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection open and prepare the Hop Table composer and download the following table PON Amplitude 1 2 4 8 10 Test Procedure 1 Verify 5 Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude steps 50 us fixed dwell time Min Amp 1V Max Amp 10 V Period 250 us Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 45 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Sweep Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Sweep Start Frequency 1 MHz Stop Frequency 2 MHz Sweep Time 1ms Sweep Type Linear Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Sweep operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramp up Frequency 1 kHz Max A 2 MHz Min A 1 MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Move W2 sweep marker position to 1 5 MHz and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp Test Results Pass Fail 3 Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify osc
25. Description This command turns the backplane synchronization sequence on and off This command requires that another 3172 is plugged in the same chassis The location of the two instruments is not critical for them to synchronize Using this synchronization method the sample clock is placed on the ECLTrg0 line and the synchronization signal is place on ECLTrgO and therefore if you intend to use this synchronization method make sure that these two backplane lines are not used by other modules Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the backplane synchronization on and off Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the present backplane synchronization setting PHASe1 ADJust lt phase gt Description This command programs the phase offset between the master and the slave units where the master is the reference waveform and the phase of the slave instruments are shifted in reference to the master instrument Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the slave and the master instrument The phase is programmed in units of degrees Note however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the waveform For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 35 5 106 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual but another wavefor
26. No trigger required to step from one segment to the next Sequence is repeated continuously per a pre programmed sequence table Current segment is sampled continuously until a trigger advances the sequence to the next programmed segment and sample clock rate Current segment is sampled the specified number of repetitions and then idles at the end of the segment Next trigger samples the next segment the specified repeat count and so on Each step of a sequence can be programmed to advance either a automatically Automatic Sequence Advance or b with a trigger Stepped Sequence Advance 1 to 4096 1 to 1Meg 500 ns 10 points ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom sequences Sequences are built as tables and downloaded to the instrument Internally Modulated Waveform Generator Characteristics General Description Carrier Waveform CW Modulation Source Run Modes Interrupted Modulation Carrier Idle Mode Run Mode Advance Source Trigger Delay Trigger input to modulation output Resolution A 8 Using this mode of operation one may select from a list of built in modulation schemes Sinewave Internal only Off outputs CW Continuous Triggered Delayed Trigger Re trigger Burst and Gated On or Off programmable Front panel TRIG IN TTLTRG 0 7 Internal trigger Software commands 0 lt 100 ns to 20s 20 ns Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 R
27. Not used SRE8 Not used SRE16 Service request on MAV SRE32 Service request on ESB summary bit SRE128 Not used The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special applications The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEE STD 488 2 as specific conditions which can be monitored and reported back to the user upon request The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the ESR common query The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a CLS common command with a power on and when read by ESR The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE STD 488 2 Description of the various bits is given in the following Bit 0 Operation Complete Generated in response to the OPC command It indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command Bit 1 Request Control This bit operation is disabled on the 3172 Bit 2 Query Error This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present or pending Bit 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs For example the following command will cause a DDE error VOLTage 5 VOLTage OFFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits however the generator is unable to generate su
28. Positive Range DAC output 6 7 Table 6 10 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range DAC oumut 6 8 Table 6 11 Offset Accuracy DDS Optik 6 8 Table 6 12 Square wave Charachertetce kk 6 9 Table 6 13 Square wave Characteristics Continue 6 9 Table 6 14 Sinewave Distortion DAC Output Tests 6 10 Table 6 15 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test 6 11 Table 6 16 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test Continue 6 11 Table 6 17 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests 6 11 Table 6 18 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests Continue 6 12 Table 6 19 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test 6 12 Table 6 20 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test Continue 6 13 Table 6 21 Sinewave Flatness Test DDS Output 6 13 Table 6 22 Sinewave Flatness Test DDS Output Continue 6 14 Table 6 23 Source Impedance Accuracy Test EEN 6 14 Table 6 24 Trigger Gate and Burst Charactertetce 6 15 Table 6 25 Trigger Delay Jeer eeu0seegek kuen gn Zeueg autees Sece chad tetecdinetiabiveess ceusdicsabtewetsceepbivdeteass 6 16 Table 6 26 Re Trigger Delay Tests AAR 6 17 Table 6 27 de Tee Ee 6 20 Table 6 28 External Sample Clock Input Tests 6 21 Astronics Test Systems xix 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 6 29 PLL Tests Frequency ENNEN 6 27 Table 6 30 PLL Tests Phase Offset 6 28 Table 6 31 PLL Tests Phase Offsets c c2 ccccicaesesstecctvdssceetvessgeeuvesaveetsssceavestvec EES
29. Re UE A 6 CUAL Cece aneace EE A 7 Elena kat are tate ames A 7 PRAM PD BEE A 7 Gaussian E A 7 SING E A 7 Exponential GE A 7 DG Output Function EE A 7 xii Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Arbitrary Waveform Generator Characteristics ccccceeeeeeeeee eee eeeenneeeeeee rete eeeeaaeeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeea A 7 Sequenced Waveforms Generator Characteristics cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaaees A 7 Internally Modulated Waveform Generator Characteristics 00seeeeseeeeeeeeeseseesesseneeeees A 8 DEES aie lace al pss Slavica al gsc esa ven el vga a dee ete hee cnn edd AE Ed A 8 Marker OUlpuies 2 23 6 et ae Gn ee ee A 9 SWE I ee ege EE A 9 Eege eege ee ee ee Aer A 9 ARBITRAR RE A 9 PICMG E A 9 FREQUENCY HOPS fo ceca cet seats a nats a a leak cat tebe Go ca eta A 10 AMPLITUDE HOPS EE A 10 Ebene genee A 10 E ee e e aston e he A 10 hc e ANRETT AREE TASE Ee ebe A 10 Counter Mumenr ENEE A 11 Frequency Period Averaged eut x egeieu eeh ZeeChe e ENEE ee A 11 Period Pulse With A 11 THORN Z EE seca EE E ET SE EE E E Unten dimen E A actual A 11 ET A 11 P2 Pulse Generator Specifications ANNER ENNEN A 12 Pulse Generator Characteristics un A 12 R n de EE A 12 Time ACCULACY eege ee ege ads asec do ce cade Lead Dante eege Ee A 12 NAA re A 12 Trigger Input Te E A 13 re EE EE A 13 EC EE A 14 Controlled Pulse Parameters sic eu cccccececedcsaace se ccicch s
30. SYNC Output group has buttons that control the state of the SYNC output and the position and width of the sync pulse relative to the waveform It also has buttons to control the VXlbus backplane TTLTrg0 7 and ECLTrg1 outputs and the sync validation source Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off The operation of the SYNC output is explained in Chapter 3 Note that the position parameter affects the output only when placed in BIT LCOM or Pulse mode and the width affects the output only when Pulse mode is selected Output The Output Control group controls the state of the main output only Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off The load impedance button allows you to calibrate the output amplitude to compensate for the actual load impedance value The default impedance is 50 Q and the output level is adjusted in reference to this value For lower or higher load impedance setting you may use the lt 2 Q or 93 Q setting If the correct load impedance is not matched expect that your amplitude reading might be lower or higher than programmed The range button is used for selecting the amplitude range Symmetrical is the default setting Using this mode programmed values will divide the level into two and will generate half of the amplitude setting positive and half of the amplitude setting negative For example 5 V amplitude will generate an amplitude span of 2 5 V to 2 5 V The positive range gen
31. SYNG OULPUT Operation EE 6 24 SYNG EE ENEE SN 6 24 viii Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual SYNC Output DOOM x Aorta ae See ee Ne ta ae ne Weg eden Wags Anais 6 25 Ad eu TE EE 6 26 SYNG Outp t ZEO EE 6 26 PLL Operation a eege EE EEN dee deet Ed ee ace ee 6 27 PLL Checks Frequency Lock 72 2 26 22 n i Gah eG nian iaen een eae 6 27 PLL Checks Phase EE 6 28 Pil CnieckS Backplane cein iine d a E da aa i Gece 6 29 PM Opeft ti n eege See E Se ENEE Ee 6 29 Se eet se Ne eget Pi ng PTS ee PE a a PoP a EE Ones ee PER Prey Data PEPE rant See Pe ee ee 6 30 Arbitrary Waveform Memory Operation ENEE 6 30 Waveform ere EE 6 31 Modulated Waveforms Cpoeraton EEN 6 32 FM Standard Wavelorns EE 6 32 Triggered FM Standard Waveforms AANER ENNEN 6 33 FM Burst Standard Waveforms EE 6 34 Gated FM Standard Wavelorms Ce nce eked ed a ee ade 6 35 Re triggered FM Bursts Standard WaveformS sesessseseserrnrrrssersserrrrrrnnnrssrrrnnrrnnresent 6 36 EM Arbitrary WavetormS eege e EE EE 6 37 eet ee Dee Depend ee epee bens Soe Ne een dea ate 6 38 External AM noresi dee de setyet aden ties ea tetyasadautiins vettetyasads cee EGE EE a EE aE 6 39 Pe ar cect ion ee ee ee ee 6 40 Eet 6 41 ER 6 42 Variable Dwell Time Frequency Hope 6 43 Fix Dwell Time Frequency HOPS siistceicocce cas eoeeedeldeck elise icine evades dekdand avgna eeeekter 6 44 Amplitude ODS EE 6 45 SWECD E 6 46 Auxiliary Cou
32. Trigger delay can be turned off and on using the trig del lt 0 1 gt command The trigger delay time command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in an interrupted run mode Set the 3172 to be in an interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 9 to 20 Numeric 100e 9 Programs the trigger delay time Programming resolution is 20 ns across the range Note that lt time gt for P2 is limited to 1 second Response The 3172 returns the present trigger delay time value TRIGger GATE MODE LEVel TRANsition Description This command selects if the 3172 will gate between transitions or on level changes The trig slop command defines the polarity of both the transitions and the level Select the source for the gating signal from the front panel TRIG IN connector or from one of the backplane trigger lines However note that if you want to control the trigger level threshold you can only do it if you will be using the front panel input This command will affect the 3172 only after it will be set to INIT CONT OFF Astronics Test Systems 5 39 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Parameters Name Type Default Description LEVel Discrete LEV Selects the mode where level change at the trigger input causes the output to turn the gate on and off TRANsition Discrete Selects transitions as the gating signals First transition
33. e Fixed duty cycle pulse e Pulse with linear transition The A3 module is a single channel high voltage amplifier To use it with the W2 waveform generator module use a coaxial cable to connect the W2 output to the A3 input You can then command the A3 module to either amplify the W2 signal or simply pass it through to its output connector bypassing the amplifier When the A3 module is set to bypass the W2 output signal the signal still retains its full bandwidth However when the output amplifier is engaged the amplifier limits the bandwidth to 100 kHz The 3172 has two run modes that determine when it will output a waveform Continuous Run is the basic mode for generating a waveform that does not stop This mode is appropriate except when the application requires synchronization to external events In Interrupted Run mode the output is either triggered or gated by external signals The 3172 accepts a trigger event from the front panel connector a backplane trigger line or a software command from your computer The Run Modes and triggering features are discussed later in this chapter The run mode options apply to all combinations of W2 and P2 modules An internal reference determines the frequency accuracy of the output waveform The internal reference provides 1 PPM accuracy and stability over time and temperature For applications that require better accuracy and stability or just clock synchronization to external devices
34. expressed as a percentage of the waveform period puls tran tra 5 Sets the fall time trailing edge to 5 expressed as a percentage of the waveform period freq 5e3 Sets the frequency of the pulse waveform to 5 kHz 5e3 Hz outp 1 Turns the output on You may use similar command sequences to program other waveforms and their parameters Table 5 1 lists the complete set of commands for setting waveform parameters The Apply command is a shortcut for setting up standard waveforms and their parameters without having to program each parameter individually This also selects the waveform as the active signal at the output connector It does not however eliminate the need for turning on the output You may use the Apply command on a waveform from the built in library or on waveform segments that are pre loaded with arbitrary waveforms Sequenced and modulated waveforms are not supported by the Apply command The following example uses the Apply command to specify a Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Astronics Test Systems square wave at the end of the programming sequence rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 10 7e6 2 1 30 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously sets the frequency to 10 7 MHz 10 7e6 amplitude to 2 V offset to 1 V and duty cycle to 30 outp 1 Turns on the output The above is an example
35. gate time and trigger level and then hold the measurement until you require a reading The reading is then taken and passed to the host computer for processing The 3172 W2 cannot perform as a counter timer and generate waveforms at the same time When placed in counter timer mode all waveform patterns are purged from the waveform memory and the 3172 W2 can be used only for measurements The counter timer function provides a means of measuring frequency and timing characteristics of external signals Use the commands given below to select the counter timer mode and set up a measurement function func mod coun Selects the Counter Timer allowing frequency Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual and time measurements on external signals Once you have selected the Counter Timer mode you may select the specific measurement function Available functions include e Frequency e Period e Period averaged e Pulse Width e Totalize counts the number of trigger events Use one of the following commands to select the measurement function coun func freq Selects the frequency measurement function The 3172 W2 takes readings continuously and places them in the output queue waiting for a read operation to clear the queue for the next reading coun func per Selects the period measurement function coun func aper Selects the averaged period measurement function coun func puls Selects the puls
36. level keyword as shown below SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string TRIG SLOP NEG COUN 10 TIM 5e 3 is the same as sending the following three commands 7 TRIG SLOP NEG gt TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 5e 3 Use the colon and semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if both the colon and the semicolon are not used OUTP STATE ON TRIG BURS ON Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some commands For example consider the following command FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Instead of selecting a specific frequency substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value Quervin Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question uerying mark to the command For example the following command sets Parameter Setting the output function to square SOUR FUNC SHAP SQR Query the output function by executing SOUR FUNC SHAP The response to a query depends on the format of the command In Query Response general a response to a query contains current values or settings of Format the generato
37. lt n gt Publication Number 980949 Rev H This deletes a link from a sequence table where lt n gt is the step number to be removed To delete the entire sequence table use the following command seq del all This deletes the entire sequence table A CAUTION The seq del all command erases the entire sequence table There is no undo operation available for this command Use the following commands to control how the sequence advances through the sequence links seq adv auto seq adv trig seq adv step This specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and then repeats the sequence from the beginning For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 and AUTO mode is used the sequence will proceed 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 with the duration of the loop depending upon the loop counter specified in the sequence table This specifies that the 3172 W2 idles between links until it senses a valid trigger event This mode is available only when the 3172 W2 is in Triggered Run mode An attempt to select this mode when the 3172 W2 is in Continuous Run mode will generate a settings conflict error After a trigger the generator output resumes until it is once again between links Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the segment is repeated n times a
38. lt offs gt lt del gt lt wid gt lt lee gt lt tre gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard pulse and programs the frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate arbitrary waveforms the 3172 will stop generating arbitrary waveforms will revert to the standard pulse waveform and will update the pulse parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard pulse 30e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard pulse waveform 22 in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard pulse waveform in units of volts lt del gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the delay time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent lt wid gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent lt lee gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the leading edge transition time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent lt tre gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the trailing edge transition time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset delay time p
39. lt voltage gt Description This command programs the voltage level for the dc function The peak to peak amplitude value is programmed using the volt lt float gt and this parameter programs the output level in units of percent relative to the programmed peak to peak amplitude level Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt voltage gt 100 to 100 Numeric 100 Programs level of the DC function in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present DC voltage value 5 50 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands W2 Module Only Astronics Test Systems This group is used to control the arbitrary waveforms and their respective parameters This will allow you to create segments and download waveforms Using these commands you can also define segment size and delete some or all unwanted waveforms from your memory Use the commands in this group to turn the digital output on and off and to download data to the digital pattern buffer Table 5 6 summarizes the arbitrary waveform control commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in a dedicated waveform memory Each data point has a vertical resolution of 16 bits 65536 points i e each samp
40. maintained only when a matching impedance is used In addition having a matched impedance load assures that the output does not ring out of control The 3172 has three output impedance options to match industry standard load impedances lt 2 Q 50 Q and 93 Q The output is calibrated to matching load impedances and there fore the selection of the appropriate output impedance is required for precise amplitude level control at the actual load The con sequences of unmatched load impedances is given in Chapter 3 As with any other VXlbus instrument the 3172 W2 must be used with a host computer All of its functions modes and parameters are fully programmable using one of the following three ways e Low level programming Use SCPI commands to program each individual parameter e ArbConnection Use the ArobConnection virtual front panel on the computer screen which simulates a mechanical front panel It has push buttons displays and dials to simulate the look and feel of a bench top instrument e Instrument drivers Use a high level driver such as VXlIplug amp play IVI or LabVIEW with your own program to control the 3172 The 3172 has been manufactured according to international CE safety standards EN 61010 Adjustments maintenance or repair of the unit while the covers are removed and power is applied must be carried out only by skilled authorized personnel Removal of the covers without authorization shall immediately void
41. p is the equation variable remember If you want to create 10 sine waveforms you should multiply p by 10 Try this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p 10 4 55 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equation Examples So far you have learned how to create two simple waveforms straight lines and trigonometric functions Let s see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p l0 8 p 4000 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 36 Now let s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and different start phase Type this Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 37 2 x Anchor Waveform Amplitude r Level Adjuster E Start pts 19 Max 32767 Cycles Auto Scaling End pts 1023 Min 32768 ft Orignal Seale Equation History Cancel Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save Cancel OK Preview Ei GC d V w JE Iess GG HR Iw vw Default L Anchor 0 EN h 2000 sinfomg p 1 0 8 p 4000 Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 36 Equation Editor Example 4 56 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Edi Wave Download About Anchor r Waveform
42. sets up another 3152B module as the slave and monitors the outputs of both modules to observe that they are phase locked 1 Install Local Bus jumpers on both 3152B modules refer to Chapter 2 in the Local Bus Configuration section 2 Install the two modules into adjacent slots in a VXI chassis The 3152B on the left will be the master and the 3152B on the right will be the slave 3 Turn on power to the VXI chassis Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems 4 Connect the output connector of the left module master to channel 1 of the oscilloscope 5 Connect the output connector of the right module slave to channel 2 of the oscilloscope 6 Send the following commands to the left module the master inst coup mode mast inst coup path Ibus inst coup stat on outp on This configures the module as a master selects the Local Bus LBUS as the coupling path turns coupling on and then turns on the output At this point the oscilloscope channel 1 will show that the master module is generating a waveform Since the frequency and amplitude were not commanded the waveform will have the default amplitude 5VP P and the default frequency 1MHz The master module is also sending the synchronization signals onto the LBUS 7 Send the following command sequence to the right module slave inst coup path lbus inst coup mode slav inst coup stat on outp on Thi
43. you must install Local Bus jumpers supplied with 3172 into each module Figure 2 2 shows the installation locations for the jumpers which you will install onto the internal printed circuit board through the openings in the side panel Each jumper slides onto two header pins connecting them together It may be helpful to use needle nose pliers to install the jumpers The specific jumpers required for each 3172 depend on its position within the synchronized group 1 The first module on the left master requires jumpers LK15 and LK16 Do not install LK13 or LK14 on this module 2 The last module on the right requires jumpers LK13 and LK14 Do not install LK15 or LK16 3 If there are modules between the first and last modules they each require jumpers LK13 LK14 LK15 and LK16 As mentioned above the 3172 must be in Modern Mode not Legacy Mode to use the Local Bus for synchronizing modules To place the 3172 in Modern Mode send the following SCPI command FORMat INSTrument MODern You may abbreviate the command by omitting all lower case characters When power is cycled the 3172 defaults to Legacy Mode even if it was in Modern Mode while power was being turned off Commands used for controlling local bus synchronization are detailed Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual in Chapter 5 in the Instrument amp Output Control Commands section see INSTrument COUPle commands Jumper Jum
44. 0 only the first two numbers in the IP addresses on the network must match For either subnet mask numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address but this number must be the same as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Table 2 1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255 255 255 0 All valid IP addresses contain the same first three numbers The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only If you are setting up your own network you probably do not have a Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual gateway so you should set these values to 0 0 0 0 Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Comment 123 234 45 213 Valid The first three numbers match the previous IP address The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254 123 202 45 214 Invalid Second number does not match the previous IP addresses The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 123 234 45 0 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0 123 234 45 255 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255 W TIP To find out the network settings for your computer p
45. 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 We FlXed DATA lt data_array gt We VARiable DATA lt data_array gt We MARKer 1 to 5000 1 W2 AHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX W2 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 We FlXed DATA lt data_array gt We VARiable DATA lt data_array gt We MARKer 1 to 5000 1 W2 5 74 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual j Use the following commands for programming the internal AM AM Programming parameters AM control is internal for this function the external AM function is described in a different section The commands for programming the internal amplitude modulation function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes AM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP Description This command selects one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform Response The 3172 returns SIN TRI SQU or RAMP depending on the selected function shape setting AM INTernal FREQuency lt am_freq gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard
46. 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Oscilloscope Load Resistance x100 high voltage probe Bandwidth Test Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Time Base 200 us div Amplitude 50 V div Connect the A3 output to the load resistance Connect the x100 high voltage probe across the load resistance Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Function Standard Waveform Sine Frequency As required for the tests Amplitude 10 Vpp x12 Gain Output On 5 Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 Input Pon Test Procedure 1 Using the variable vertical adjustment on the oscilloscope adjust the vertical trace to show exactly 6 vertical divisions 2 Perform bandwidth large signals tests using Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Output Bandwidth Large Signals Tests FREQUENCY ERROR LIMIT OSCILLOSCOPE FAIL SETTING READING Equipment Oscilloscope Load Resistance x100 high voltage probe Rise Fall time Preparation Tests 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Time Base 200 us div Amplitude 50 V div 2 Connect the A3 output to the load resistance 3 Connect the x100 high voltage probe across the load resistance 4 Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Function Standard Waveform Square Frequency 10kHz Amplitude 8Vpp Output On 5 Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 Input Test Procedure 6 82 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 1 Using the variabl
47. 3172 family that ArbConnection detected in the chassis Leave the group field blank if you do not wish to synchronize a particular module Address shows the logical address associated with the listed module The address is set using a DIP switch which can be accessed when the module is removed from the chassis Chan Channel this field is relevant for the 3172 W2W2 model which has two arb units installed in a single VXI slot In this case each instrument operates as a stand alone generator but also can be configured as a dual channel instrument The example in Figure 4 22 shows this instrument with address 13 installed in slot 3 Channel 1 is always the top instrument and channel 2 is installed below and if selected as a group by default channel 1 becomes the master module There is no way to exchange channel designation but if you move channel 2 up its state is re configured to master and channel 1 to servant Slot shows the slot number where ArbConnection found a specific module The location of the module is extremely important because it defines how it may be synchronized as explained in the Path description below Path defines the connection between synchronized modules This field has three options ADJ LBUS and ECLT ADJ defines a connection between two adjacent W2 modules in a single 3172 carrier Notice Figure 4 22 it shows the model 3172 W2W2 in slot 3 After grouping in group 1 the two instruments are
48. 5 000 V 45 mV 9 000 V 9 000 V 60 mV 3 Modify the amplitude range to Negative and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 56 6 68 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 6 56 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range P2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 200v 2 000V 425mV II 5 000V 5 000V 45my II 9000v 9 000V 60mV P II This tests the accuracy of the source impedance The P2 has three Source Impedance source impedances that can be used lt 2 Q 50 Q and 93 Q The Characteristics usage of the source impedance depends on the characteristics of the load impedance Test the accuracy of the source impedance if you suspect that this is a problem with the output levels at different source impedance settings Source Impedance Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV Range 20V 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Period 1ms Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform source impedance checks using Table 57 Table 6 57 Source Impedance Accuracy Test 2 500 30 mV 2 500 100 mV 1 748 100 mV Astronics Test Systems 6 69 3172 User Manual Pulse Width Accuracy Pulse Width Accuracy Tests Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the accuracy of the pulse width To eliminate
49. 5 5 V to 5 5 V Level Zout lt 2 Q SYMM mode 5 mV to 22 Vp p Level Zout 50 Q SYMM mode 2 5 mV to 11 Vp p Resolution 12 bits Accuracy measured at 1 kHz into 50 Q 1 Vp p to 11 Vp p 1 of setting 50 mV 100 mVp p to 1 Vp p 1 of setting 20 mV 10 mVp p to 100 mVp p 1 of setting 5 mV Accuracy measured at 1 kHz into 93 Q 1 Vp p to 11 Vp p 2 of setting 50 mV 100 mVp p to 1 Vp p 2 of setting 20 mV 10 mVp p to 100 mVp p 2 of setting 5 mV Accuracy measured at 1 kHz into gt 1M Q 1 Vp p to 11 Vp p 2 5 of setting 100 mV 100 mVp p to 1 Vp p 2 5 of setting 40 mV 10 mVp p to 100 mVp p 2 5 of setting 10 mV DC Offset Range NEG mode 0 to 20 V POS mode 0 to 20 V SYMM mode 0 V to 11 V Resolution 1 mV Accuracy into 500 1 1 from Amplitude 15 mV Accuracy into 930 2 1 from Amplitude 15 mV Astronics Test Systems A 3 3172 User Manual Accuracy into gt 1MQ Rise Fall Time 10 90 Aberration Zout 50 Q Sync Output Connector Level Sync Type Width Position Filters Description Type Trigger Input Characteristics Sources Internal Timer Range External Input Impedance Range Resolution Sensitivity Damage Level Frequency Range Slope Minimum Pulse Width BUS VXI Backplane System Delay Trigger input to A 4 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 2 5 2 from Amplitude 30 mV 11 ns lt 6 5 Front panel Combo D sub 24W
50. 50 Q 20 dB attenuator feed through at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude 6V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Squarewave Characteristics tests using Table 6 12 Table 6 12 Square wave Characteristics 2 Modify the amplitude setting to 10 V and continue with the square wave checks using Table 6 13 Table 6 13 Square wave Characteristics Continued Oscilloscope Reading Parameter Tested Error Limits Sym Pos Rise Fall Time lt 6 5 10 mV Over undershoot lt 6 5 10 mV Astronics Test Systems 6 9 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the characteristics of the sine waveform It includes Sinewave Teer distortion spectral purity and flatness Tests are done for both the Characteristics DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Sinewave Distortion Equipment Distortion Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer and DAC Output ArbConnection Preparation 1 Connect W2 output to the distortion analyzer input Configure the W2 as follows SCLK As required by the test Function Arbitrary Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Waveform Sinewave Wavel
51. 7 11 Selecting the Calibration Funchon 7 14 Figure 7 1 2 Calibration LEE 7 14 Figure 7 13 Making TEST Soe ges ee Eege deed eege s e 7 15 Figure 7 14 Locking the Calibration Fachors kk KENNEN 7 17 Figure 7 15 Confirmation for Locking Calibration Factors ccc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 7 17 Figure 7 16 CaliDranionPanel EE 7 19 Figure 7 17 P2 Pulse Generator Channel 1 Calibration Panel 7 42 Figure 7 18 Firmware Revision Screen iss cccsereceszes svceticosdenty bean stesiceteseevesteecs iabunertenneeenrseumeen tee 7 66 Figure 7 19 Updater WINDOW tege Eege de edd Ee Ae 7 68 Figure 7 20 Updater Window with Update Button 7 68 Figure 7 21 Successful Firmware Update nk 7 69 Astronics Test Systems xvii 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank xviii Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual List of Tables Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 28b 288 280 2 7 Table 5 1 3172 SCPI Command Summary for 3171 Emulatton 5 7 Table 5 2 3172 SCPI Command List Summary 5 10 Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Command Summary eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeettaneeeeeeees 5 18 Table 5 4 Run Mode Commande snsssennsenrneserrnererrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrrernrrtrrrrrtrerrrrterrrreeanrnanrnreenrnrennn 5 37 Table 5 5 Standard Waveform Control Command Gummam cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeetaeeeeeeees 5 44
52. 9 5 9 540 25 VDC 1 005 1 0 995 26 VDC 2 510 2 5 2 490 27 VDC 4 020 4 3 980 28 VDC 5 525 5 5 5 475 29 VDC 7 035 7 6 965 30 VDC 8 540 8 5 8 460 31 VDC 9 540 9 5 9 460 Set DMM function to Volts AC 32 VAC 1 7528 1 7678 1 7828 33 VAC 0 52533 0 53033 0 53533 34 VAC 0 17528 0 17678 0 17828 35 VAC 0 052533 0 053033 0 053533 36 VAC 0 017178 0 017678 0 018178 37 VAC 0 0048033 0 0053033 0 0058033 38 VAC 1 7528 1 7678 1 7828 39 VAC 0 52533 0 53033 0 53533 40 VAC 0 17528 0 17678 0 17828 41 VAC 0 052533 0 053033 0 053533 42 VAC 0 017178 0 017678 0 018178 43 VAC 0 0048033 0 0053033 0 0058033 44 VAC 1 7528 1 7678 1 7828 45 VAC 0 52533 0 53033 0 53533 46 VAC 0 17528 0 17678 0 17828 47 VAC 0 052533 0 053033 0 053533 48 VAC 0 017178 0 017678 0 018178 49 VAC 0 0048033 0 0053033 0 0058033 END Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 7 3 Calibration for W6 Module 3172 User Manual Item in DMM Low Limit Target High Limit Cal Panel Function Volts Volts Volts Adjust Pot 12 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 RV10 13 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 14 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 15 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 16 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 17 VDC 0 050 0 00000 0 050 RV2 18 VDC 0 995 1 1 005 19 VDC 2 490 2 5 2 510 20 VDC 3 980 4 4 020 21 VDC 5 475 5 5 5 525 22 VDC 6 965 7 7 035 23 VDC 8 460 8 5 8 540 24 VDC 9 4
53. 980949 Rev H segment list If you click a segment it will highlight and the Append button becomes an Insert button Use the Insert button to insert a segment before the highlighted segment Use Delete button to delete the highlighted segment The Clear All button removes all segments from the table and lets you start a new segment table Click on the Close button discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen The Save button saves the current session so that you may continue to configure the Memory Partition table from the same point later on The Download button updates the 3172 with the present segment table settings Y TIP The Memory Partition table does not download waveforms Use the memory partition table only if you have merged multiple waveforms into one The purpose of the partition table is to divides the memory contents into separate segments each containing a waveform If you download waveforms using Waveform Studio then the memory is already segmented for the waveforms and there is no need to use the memory partition table Waveform Studio Figure 4 10 provides access to waveforms that are already stored as files in the host computer You may download waveforms from such files to various segments in the 3172 waveform memory and later use them as individual waveforms or combine them into complex sequences Waveform Studio has a Segmen
54. ANNE 3 5 Programming the Output Impedance EE 3 6 Selecting an Qutput e EE 3 7 Selecting a RUN MOQ E r araire e a aE e e E AA RE AEE E AE EEA E REER 3 7 Continuous Run Mode oe a ak ak ae he Da ads A a las A AA eA eek GA dean 3 8 Triggered RUN Modes ie cal draco ce aad He ecauutecuanl Gea sutton ese des Seer E eel ereac anne 3 8 Re Iriggered R n RE 3 9 Gated RUM ee i naa aa EAEE date rena sa SEEE Eaa EARE TEA ENRERE DEE EREE REESE EEEE 3 9 Burst ie WEE 3 10 Selecting the Trigger SOULCS EE 3 11 Selecting the Trigger Level csvicc c scciedecdeiecctecnieed ile tvas sa canvedsebeayckeehsivluacthenigebeedecvctieancqedvedetvcas 3 12 selecting the Trigger Te 3 12 Using Trigger Delay sie ei Olen sac aces oe Sale ace Al as EN aie ed ee ear eae OR 3 12 Activating the Backplane TTLTrg Lines EEN 3 13 Controlling W2 Function and Param Sterns EE 3 13 Selecting an Output Function 27 oedetetesevesstshtiedscbensalensl ied sad eameds GREEN ccccitenceesretelonse 3 14 Astronics Test Systems iii 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Example Generating Standard Waveforms c ccceeeeeeeeeeeecnneeeeeeeeeeeecenaaaeeeseeeeeeeeeteneeaaees 3 14 Generating Standard WaveformS EE 3 16 Standard Waveform Parameters EE 3 18 Using the Apply Command sde cee cies ca seis ateetena va dee REENEN VEER EE ented tae 3 18 Generating Arbitrary WaveformS EE 3 19 What are Arbitrary Waveforms 2 cscccccccccvrser toes vennunenysacnontteentncnyeed ds suaettsotte
55. Amplitude profiles can be designed separately for channels 1 and 2 but frequency and phase profiles are shared by both channels The following paragraphs will describe the various sections of the 3D composer and will guide you through some 3D programming examples The opening screen of the 3D composer is shown in Figure 4 58 As you can see it does not at all look like any of the other composers that were described previously discussed however generating waveforms and programming profiles is very similar to other composer so you will be up and running in no time 4 83 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H inl x File Options Download Design About jo cua Shared Horizontal Controls Parameters jp obio X 1ms 0 1ms Div Y 5Y 0 625V Div View Iw Amplitude F Line Sine M Frequency M Phase Vertical Controls De X 1ms 0 1ms Div X ms 0 1ms Div Y 360Deg 45Deq Div Append Ise Tene Clear All Dog Figure 4 58 3D Composer Screen The 3D composer has three main sections Shared horizontal Controls Vertical Controls and Graphical Screens The panels on the left are used for designing the waveform parameters and the screens on the right side depict the shape of the profile Below find a detailed description of all of these sections Refer to Figure 4 58 throughout the description 4 84 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Re
56. Astronics Test Systems Max Peak Deviation This parameter defines the forward peak deviation Note that the forward peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the forward peak deviation range Min Peak Deviation This parameter defines the backwards peak deviation Note that the backwards peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the backwards peak deviation range Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points The example below shows three sine cycles Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle at which the sine will start The example shows 0 start phase Power Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 Y Tip The functionality of the FM composer is similar to the Wave composer If you need more information on the FM Composer functions and Equation Editor refer to the Wave Composer section in this manual The 3D Composer was specifically designed for simultaneous profiling of amplitude frequency and phase
57. BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 Q DC Function TIA gt B Slope B Negative 2 Connect the 3172 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect an external function generator to the front panel TRG PLL connector 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 01 Rise Fall Time 0 High Time 99 99 5 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Retrigger Mode On Retrigger Delay 20 us Output On 6 Using an external function generator manually trigger the 3172 Adjustment 1 Set CAL SET 0 2 Adjust C10 for a period of 20 us 5 Astronics Test Systems 7 25 3172 User Manual Setup TCXO Base Line Offset Adjustments Setup 12 Setup 13 7 26 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 10 MHz TCXO Frequency Equipment Counter BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the 3172 output to the counter input 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 10 MHz Ref Source Internal Output On Amplitude 2V Waveform Square Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup1 for counter reading of 10 MHz 2 Hz The base line offset adjustments assure that the AC signal is symmetrical around the OV line Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue Null Offset Symmetrical v
58. Backplane Trigger SO TGE geeiert ee geng 6 63 Backplane Trigger Output Source AANEREN 6 64 Test Procedures P2 Module EH 6 65 P2 Channel 2 Ee 6 65 ew Me la EE 6 65 Period EE 6 65 Period Accuracy Continuous RUN Mode Tests 6 66 Period Accuracy Gated RUN Mode Tests 6 66 Amplitude AGCUra Cy ici siete censiedv sicvet da deeg ee ee Ee Ee eege dee Reed 6 67 SEENEN cK ek cae nes Sonera Gal chee ee 6 67 Offset ACC ULACY veces ee dee Eeer 6 68 ONS CL ACC HEEN eet eege eebe 6 68 Source Impedance Characteristics AAA 6 69 Source Impedance EE 6 69 Pulse Width ACGUraGy EEN 6 70 Pulse WidthtiwAccuracy t eessen a eebe E TE TE i i Deeg 6 70 Pulse Delay Double Pulse Delay ACcuracy ENNEN 6 70 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests ENEE 6 71 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode ACCUraCy ENNEN 6 71 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests ENEE 6 72 Linear Transitions ACCUIACY o ccccitieies id eege et eee 6 72 Linear Transitions Accuracy Tests ENNEN 6 73 External Pulse Width Mode Operationtis edu coe ceedtitsicsrceds EES nadie danas oleate 6 74 External Pulse Width Operation LEE zegesin deeg Sede een 6 74 Pulse Run Modes Operation x ccisccce succes cadetvactiancizessbeteea ss sieel seetaee Mads detuelieaeeedeaegoaitdaceeer 6 75 Pulse Run Modes Operation Tests 6 75 Delayed Trigger heterogen 6 77 Thgger RE EE 6 77 Backplane Trigger Source visio EEN a de ee ee 6 78 Backplane Trigger Output Source ENEE 6 79 xX Astronics Test Systems Publicati
59. Co General Pararneters Modulation A hen D I Y Auxiliary a 46 Xp Ofset Di l Modify Execute _ gon a ee GeneraliFilters E Wave Mode Run Mode Sync Output calibration Backplane Qualifier alibrati v i aama Then select Calibration Select Select OniOf wY Composers a a i 2 Arbitrary Ff vont Coup 2 Sequenced Perna ZS 2 Modulated Dy Gated 2 TTLTo Front Panel O Pos Impedance 2 Hat Cycle 2 Burst AECL O ofset Ou Owah J O Ohm Figure 7 6 Selecting the Calibration Function 3172 2 Calibration Panel Lock Cal Factors gI Clear Al Factors I Amplitude DEA Mo Ext A M 0404 O48 04 O47 O49 Each item to be calibrated has a numbered selection button FF oe Arpltude O32 034 O36 O3 03 OF ltem 12 O9 O 10 O 13 Ou O14 O 50 Om Amplitude Modula f Pulse Response OTe O33 Oy Ox O 60 O33 O4 O8 ltem 17 Figure 7 7 Calibration Panel 4 In the Calibration Panel note that each calibration item has a numbered selection button For Periodic Calibration only items 12 through 49 should be adjusted for W2 modules and items 12 through 59 for W6 modules For each row in the appropriate calibration table below Table 7 2 for W2 modules or Table 7 3 for W6 modules do the following 5 Verify that the DMM is set to the function VDC or VAC indicated in the calibration table 6 In the Calibration Pane
60. Connect P2 channels 1 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Hold Duty Cycle Duty Cycle 50 Transitions Symmetrical Period As required by the test High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Output On Leading Edge As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform the leading edge linear transitions accuracy tests using Table 6 47 Table 6 47 Leading Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests Edge Setting Period Limits Counter Reading 1 000ms 10ms ims 100usf OE 100 0us ims 100us 10us i y O 10 00ps 100us 10us 1ys S O 1000ps 10us 1ps102ns i O 100ns Ins 100ns 12ns S L 10ns 100ns 10ns 3ns id 2 For the following tests modify the leading and trailing edge settings to be the identical Modify the leading edge first 3 Perform the trailing edge linear transitions accuracy tests using Table 6 48 Table 6 48 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests Edge Setting Period Reading Limits Counter Reading 1 000ms 10ms _ 1ms 100us 100 0us ims 100us 10yus e O 1000ps pue tps 102ns 100s tps 100ns t2ns L Ons 100ns _ 10nst3ns 6 58 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual External Pulse Width Mode Operation External Pulse Width Operation Tests This tests the operation of the external pulse width mode This mode is particularly useful for reconstructing pulses from a week signal Period
61. D ADVANCE MODE x sd r TRUNCATE Figure 5 5 64 bit Sequence Table Download Format Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the sequence table SEQuence ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed Description This command selects the sequence advance mode The way the instrument advances through the sequence links can be specified by the user Parameters Name Type Default Description AUTOmatic Discrete AUTO Specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Of course each link segment can be programmed with its associated loop Astronics Test Systems 5 67 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H repeat number TRIGgered Discrete In triggered advance mode the generator idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed This mode operates with trigger mode only An attempt to select the TRIG advance mode when the 3172 is in continuous operating mode will generate an error After trigger the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the output will repeat this seg
62. Description 0 1 Discrete 0 1 enables the counted burst run mode 0 turns the burst run mode off Burst count is programmable using the TRIG BURS COUN command Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRIGger BURSt COUNt lt burst gt Description This function sets the number of cycles when the Burst Mode is on Use the init cont off trig burs on commands to select the Burst Mode 5 38 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt burst gt 1to1M Numeric 1 Programs the burst count Note that lt burst gt for P2 is integer only limited to 65 536 counts Response The 3172 returns the present burst count value TRIGger DELay OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to turn on and off the delayed trigger function The trigger delay time command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 3172 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command The model 0 command duplicates this action Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the delayed trigger mode on and off Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRIGger DELay Time lt time gt Description The trigger delay time parameter defines the time that will elapse from a valid trigger signal to the initiation of the first output waveform
63. Design Format DC Intervals BS Time Level Points ae Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units VM ms Section Start 23 ms Repeat 5 Apply i Duration x A 15 ms Figure 4 52 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example Astronics Test Systems 4 75 3172 User Manual Pulse Example Section 4 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The third pulse section is now complete We are ready now to start building the forth section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 53 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values into this section note that there is only one linear transition required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in the figure 15 x 4 76 Vertical Scale 10 V 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 42 8ms 4 28msi r Mew Ful train z Se A om op Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals ry Time Level Points nx Cumulative Time 0 Append Insert Delete Delete A
64. Discrete Sets the sample clock frequency to the lowest possible frequency 10e 6 lt MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency 200e6 Response The 3172 returns the present sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 MHz would be returned as 100e6 positive numbers are unsigned FREQuency RASTer SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrg0 LBUS lt n gt Description 5 32 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This command selects the source of the sample clock generator This command affects both the standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The ECLTrgO and the LBUS lt n gt sources are useful for applications requiring synchronization between adjacent modules where one is sourcing the clock through this line and one is using the clock on this line as the sample clock source Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects an internal source EXTernal Discrete Activates the external sample clock input An external reference must be connected to the 3172 in the range of the internal source for it to continue normal operation Observe the input level limitations provided in Appendix A before connecting an external signal ECLTrgO Discrete Activates the backplane ECLTrg0 as the source for the sample clock input Signal must be generated from another module
65. FM Composer format files wvf Save Waveform The Save Waveform menu item stores your active waveform as a binary file with a wf extension If this is the first time that you save this FM waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name path and format for the waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As menu item the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current FM Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved make sure to Save your work before you use this command 4 81 3172 User Manual Wave Commands 4 82 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Wave menu lets you create waveforms on the waveform graph The Wave menu has a library of 6 waveforms Sine Triangle Square Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using an Equation editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave menu is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave menu Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog
66. LOLevel 20 to 19 995 2 5 P2 RANGe SYMMetrical POSitive NEGative SYMM W2 P2 FUNCtion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence MODulation HALFcycle FIX W2 COUNter INSTrument 1 2 3 4 7 Description This command sets the active instrument for future programming sequences Subsequent commands affect the selected instrument only The 3172 carrier can hold a combination of W2 and P2 cards This command selects the active channel regardless of whether it is an arb or pulse channel Refer to Figure 5 1 and then compare to what you have printed on your serial number label to determine the association between the selected channel number and what it will actually control on your instrument Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H CH2 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH4 CH3 CH3 CH2 3172 W2 3172 W2W2 3172 P2 3172 P2P2 3172 W2P2 Figure 5 1 3172 Instrument Channels Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 4 Discrete 1 Sets the active instrument for programming from remote Response The 3172 returns 1 2 3 or 4 depending on the present active channel setting 5 20 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual INSTrument COUPle MODE MASTer SLAVe Description This command assigns master or slave properties to the instrument If the assignment is slave most of the instrument operational functions will be controlled from the master instrument Waveforms am
67. Level Points Lo f Append Insert Delete Delete All Unda Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 16 ms Repeat 3 Duration x A Oms Ko sie L Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 43 Pulse Editor Single Section The view Single Section menu item shows on the pulse graph one section at a time Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Options The view options menu item opens the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 44 Use this dialog box to fine tune the Pulse Composer to the way it should deal with operational modes and the waveform memory Information on options is given later in this chapter 4 65 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Editor Options Mode of Operation i Memo Management _ Freely Select Mode of Operation C Do not Override Loaded Segments ve Allow Pulse Design with no Limitation Force Pulse Train to Single Segment Arbitrary Way de Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments Sequenced Waveform Model r Pulse Transition Management d amp Allow System Control Design Units Time units ms sl Level Units M D Lint Increments f200 Cancel Figure 4 44 Pulse Editor Options Tools Me
68. Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 9 to 20 Numeric 100e 9 Programs the re trigger period Programming resolution is 20 ns across the range Note that this parameter is not available for the P2 module Response 5 42 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The 3172 returns the present re trigger period value TRiGger TIMer lt timer gt Description This parameter specifies the period of the internal trigger generator This value is associated with the internal trigger run mode only and has no effect on other trigger modes The internal trigger generator is a free running oscillator asynchronous with the frequency of the output waveform The timer intervals are measured from waveform start to waveform start Note the difference from the re trigger mode where there the intervals are measured from waveform end to waveform start Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 1e 6 to 20 Numeric 15e 6 Programs the internal trigger generator period Note that this parameter is not available for the P2 module Response The 3172 returns the present internal trigger period value Astronics Test Systems 5 43 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Standard This group is used to control the standard waveforms and their Waveforms respective parameters The
69. Name Type Description lt header gt Discrete Contains information on the size of the binary block that contains waveform coordinates lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains waveform data points vertical coordinates as explained above TRACe DEFine lt segment_ gt lt length gt Description Use this command to attach size to a specific memory segment The final size of the arbitrary memory is 1M points The memory can be partitioned to smaller segments up to 10k segments This function allows definition of segment size Total length of memory segments cannot exceed the size of the waveform memory B NOTE The 3172 operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data Therefore segment size can be programmed in numbers evenly divisible by four only For example 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block 2002 is not a multiple of 4 therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ gt 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the segment number of which will be integer only programmed using this command lt length gt 16 to n Numeric Programs the size of the selected segment Minimum integer only segment length is 16 points the maximum is limited by the total amount of installed memory 5 54 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual TRACe DEL
70. Parameters group the other panels update automatically To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The indicator next to the required parameter highlights The digital display then shows the value associated with the highlighted indicator Use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the reading to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new reading Waveforms Figure 4 7 Standard Waveforms Panel Waveforms The Waveforms group provides access to a library of built in standard waveforms The library includes Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Gaussian and DC waveforms Each waveform has one or more parameters to adjust the required characteristics of the output For example phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and duty cycle can be adjusted for the square waveform For the pulse waveform you may adjust the rise and fall time as well as the width and delay Parameters associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when you select the waveform Note that by clicking a button in this group you immediately update 4 11 3172 User Manual Arbitrary Sequence 4 12 Publication Number 980949 Rev H the 3172 output with this waveform shape Parameters The parameters group contains buttons that control the output frequency and the 10 MHz reference source The Frequen
71. Procedure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 19 Table 6 19 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test W2 Sine PN Frequency Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading Oooo S S 3 Change amplitude to 10V and adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display Perform sine wave flatness DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 20 6 12 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 6 20 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test Continued W2 Sine Frequency Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading 6 0 6 Divisions 40 6 Divisions S 1OMHz 6 40 6 Divisions CT T 20MHz 6 1 8Divisions CT ST 30MHz 6 41 8 Divisions dC Sinewave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Function Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitude 5V Output On CW Frequency Initially 1 kHz then as required by the test Test Procedure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DDS waveforms tests using Table 6 21 Table 6 21 Sinewave Flatness Test DDS Output W2 Sine s Frequency
72. Publication Number 980949 Rev H ESE Description Use this command to query the programmed bits in the Standard Event enable register Response The generator returns a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255 which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESR Description Use this command to query the response of the Standard Event enable register Information on the standard event register is given in the following Response The generator returns a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255 which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register IDN Description Use this command to query the identity of the 3172 Response The generator returns data organized into four fields separated by commas The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four If the latter information is not available the device must return an ASCII 0 for each For example 3172 response to IDN is Racal Instruments 3172 0 1 0 OPC Description Use this command to set the operation complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed OPC Description Use this command to synchronize between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue The OPC query does not affect the OPC Even
73. Publication Number 980949 Rev H shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 4 000 frequency shift steps The following parameters control FSK modulation shifted frequency baud shift data array and marker placement This selects amplitude shift keying ASK modulation The shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 1 000 amplitude shift steps The following parameters control ASK modulation shifted amplitude baud shift data array and marker placement This selects the phase shift keying PSK The shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 4 000 shift steps The following parameters control PSK modulation shifted phase baud shift data array and marker placement This selects the frequency hop modulation The frequency hop sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 5 000 frequency hops The following parameters control frequency hop modulation dwell mode dwell time frequency data list and marker placement This selects the amplitude hop modulation The amplitude hop sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 5 000 amplitude hops The following parameters control amplitude hop modulation dwell mode dwell time amplitude data list and marker placement This selects 3D modulation This is a special mode that modulates frequency amplitude and phase simultaneously You may set the modulation profile externally through applications su
74. Rev H Period Period Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Averaged Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the W2 TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the W2 as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Period Trigger Level OV Test Procedure 1 Perform Period Accuracy tests using Table 6 35 Table 6 35 Period Measurement Accuracy Function 3172 W2 Generator Setting Error Limits Counter Reading 10 kHz 100 0us 100ns 100 kHz 10 00 us 100ns 2 Change the counter timer function to Period Averaged 3 With the last function generator setting in Table 6 35 verify that the period reading is 10 00000 us 50 ps Test Results Pass Fail 6 48 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Width Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Duty Cycle As required by the test Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the W2 TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the W2 as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Pulse Width Trigger Level 0 V Test Procedure 1 Perform Pulse Width Accuracy tests using Table 6 36 Table 6 36 Pulse Width M
75. Rev H 3172 User Manual Waveform Memory Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnection Preparation 1 Connect W2 output to the distortion analyzer input Configure the W2 as follows SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 1M points Waveform Sine wave SCLK 100 MS s Test Procedure 1 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 31 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the operation of the modulation circuits It includes tests Modulated for the various modulation functions FM AM FSK PSK Waveforms Frequency hops and Sweep Since the run modes are common to Operation all modulation functions they are being tested on the FM function only FM Standard Equipment Oscilloscope Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 50 us Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz om Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Te
76. SYNC Position and Width W2 Modules Only Example Generating a Simple Waveform 3 4 Publication Number 980949 Rev H V and shifts to high when the output signal becomes greater than 0 V The SYNC signal must be wide enough for other devices to detect but not so wide that it adversely affects timing in faster applications To accommodate a wide variety of situations the SYNC pulse width is programmable The programmed start point for the SYNC signal is in effect for all of the SYNC types except ZERO The SYNC width parameter is in effect only when the pulse type is selected Use the following procedure to program SYNC position and width outp sync sour puls Selects pulse as the sync source In this mode you may also program the position of the sync pulse outp sync pos lt value gt Sets the position of the sync pulse relative to the active segment The position is programmed in units of waveform points outp sync wid lt value gt Sets the width of the sync pulse The width is in units of waveform points Note that the position in points plus the width in points shall not exceed the number of points in the segment This example assumes that you have set up the chassis and run the Resource Manager Connect two cables one from the OUTPUT connector and the other from the SYNC connector to an oscilloscope Set up the oscilloscope to trigger from the SYNC signal Use the following sequence of commands to
77. Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc pulse Gaussian pulse Exponential decay rise pulse DC Frequency Range Sine Square 100 uHz to 30 MHz All other waveforms 100 pHz to 10 MHz Frequency Resolution 11 digits Accuracy amp Stability Same as frequency reference Sine Start Phase Range 0 359 95 Start Phase Resolution 0 05 Power Range Sine Raised to a power 1 9 Sine Wave Performance standard and arbitrary waveforms THD 0 2 to 100 kHz STD and CW Harmonics and Spurious at less than 5 Vp p 29 dBc lt 30 MHz 44 dBc lt 10 MHz Harmonics amp Spurious at less than 10 Vp p 25 dBc lt 30 MHz 35 dBc lt 10 MHz Flatness at less than 5 Vp p 10 to 10 MHz 30 to 30 MHz Triangle Start Phase Range 0 359 9 A 6 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Start Phase Resolution Power Range Triangle Raised to a power Square Duty Cycle Range Pulse Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Ramp Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Gaussian Pulse Time Constant Range Sinc Pulse Zero Crossings Range Exponential Pulse Time Constant Range DC Output Function Range 3172 User Manual 0 05 1 10 0 to 99 9 0 99 99 of period each independently 0 99 9 of period each independently 1 200 4 100 200 to 200 100 of amplitude setting Arbitrary Waveform Generator Characteristics Description Sample Clock Range Resolution Accuracy and Stability Native Vertical Resoluti
78. Systems XV 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Figure 4 20 Counter Timer e EE 4 33 Figure 4 21 X Instrument Synchronization Pool List seesssssesssssesserrserrrrrserirrrsriirrrerrnnrsererrrnnne 4 35 Figure 4 22 Adjacent Synchronization between Two Instruments sssssseeeseeesserrrrrrnrneserrrnne 4 37 Figure 4 23 LBUS Synchronization between Adjacent Glots 4 38 Figure 4 24 ECLT Synchronization Example AAA EEN 4 38 Pigure 4 25 System Panels eege ebe caylee das diel geen 4 39 Figure 4 26 General Filters Panel EE 4 40 Figure 4 2 7 Calibration Panel egkeessge geg eeeg deed Seefe Edge 4 41 Figure 4 25 COMPOSERS EE 4 42 Figure 4 29 Wave Composer Opening Gcreen ENEE 4 43 Figure 4 30 Open Waveform Dialog Box ENNEN 4 45 Figure 4 31 Zooming In on Waveform Geoments 4 47 Figure 4 32 Generating Distorted Sine Waves from the Built in Library ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 49 Figure Tee Tee 4 49 Figure 4 34 Waveform Screen EE 4 50 Figure 4 35 Equation Editor Dialog BOX EE 4 51 Figure 4 36 Equation Editor Example scsic ciiscondesiciacacaarinte Maney ecnarieeh ag hintaan helene 4 56 Figure 4 37 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 4 57 Figure 4 38 Using Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion sssssssseeeeeesserrrrnreene 4 58 Figure 4 39 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave 4 59 Fig
79. TTLT5 ON TTLT5 1 us trig intervals TTLT5 OFF TTLT6 ON TTLT6 1 us trig intervals TTLT6 OFF TTLT7 ON TTLT7 1 us trig intervals 6 20 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual External SCLK Characteristics External SCLK IN This tests the operation of the arbitrary waveform function using an external sample clock source Perform this test if you suspect that the accuracy of the output is degraded when using an external source compared to when is used with an internal source Equipment Counter Function Generator Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Duty Cycle 50 Amplitude 2V 2 Connect the function generator to the W2 SCLK IN connector 3 Configure the W2 as follows Mode Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Sample Clock External Output On 4 Using ArbConnection create and download to the W2 a 100 points square waveform single cycle Test Procedure 1 Change the function generator frequency and verify the output frequency as specified in Table 6 28 Table 6 28 External Sample Clock Input Tests Function Generator Frequency Setting W2 Frequency Pass Fail 5 MHz 50 kHz 1 Hz 50 MHz 500 kHz 10 Hz Astronics Test Systems 6 21 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the operation of the sequence generators This also Sequence checks the various sequenc
80. Table 5 6 Arbitrary Waveform Command Summary cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaeeeeeeees 5 52 Table 5 7 Apply Control Commands EE 5 58 Table 5 8 Sequence Control Commande 5 66 Table 5 9 Modulated Waveforms Global Commande 5 71 Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commande 5 73 Table 5 11 Pulse Waveform Command Summary e eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeees 5 94 Table 5 12 Half Cycle Command Summary ccccccecceeeesesseeeceeeeeeeeeeenenaeaaeeeeeeeeeenesseeeaeeeeees 5 99 Table 5 13 Counter Command SUMMANy EE 5 101 Table 5 15 Power Amplifier Command Gummam 5 104 Table 5 14 Synchronization Command Summary ssssssessseeesessenerrnnresserrnnrrnntrsserrrnnrnnnnrnnneennt 5 106 Table 5 15 LAN Command Serres ees gd Acetate dan Ge Ai eee ce 5 110 Table 5 16 System Command RE EE 5 114 Table 5 17 Common Command SUMMAary ENEE 5 117 Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment Specifications cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 6 2 Table 6 2 Frequency Accuracy E 6 4 Table 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Heierence 6 4 Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC Output 6 5 Table 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy External AM DAC Output 6 5 Table 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DDS Output EEN 6 6 Table 6 7 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range DAC Output 6 7 Table 6 8 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range DAC Output Continue 6 7 Table 6 9 Amplitude Accuracy
81. Table 6 51 Period Accuracy Continuous Run Mode Tests Pass 100 0000000 ms _ t00ns 10 000000 ms t0Ons LOD me tns 100 000s o00eel _ 10 000 us 1 000 us Period Accuracy Equipment Counter timer Pulse Generator Gated Run Mode Preparation Tests 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Period Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 Channel 2 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse Run Mode Gated Output On Period As required by the tests Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Test Procedure 1 Perform period accuracy gated run mode tests using Table 6 52 Note that the reading will be stable during 2 seconds when the external pulse generator opens the gate Discard other readings as irrelevant 6 66 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 6 52 Period Accuracy Gated Run Mode Tests Amplitude Accuracy Amplitude Accuracy 100 000 us us 10 000 us 1 000 us Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the output amplifier and attenuators The amplitude accuracy is checked for all three amplitude ranges Symmetrical Positive and Negative Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect P2 Channel 2 to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output O
82. Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Gated FM Standard Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 2V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the W2 TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Mod Run Mode Gated Trigger Level OV Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Gated FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Gated sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Gated Period 1ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Astronics Test Systems 6 35 3172 User Manual Re triggered FM Bursts Standard Waveforms Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitu
83. Train Interpreting the Download Summary 4 78 Publication Number 980949 Rev H If you followed the above description to build this pulse example the screen should look as shown in Figure 4 55 The next step is to download what you see on the Pulse Composer graph into the 3172 waveform generator One last step before you download the waveform to the instrument is to check the Pulse Train Download Summary which appears after you click on the Download icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar Refer to Figure 4 55 for the next section on how to interpret the download summary Download Summary Mode of Operation Waveforms mode Arbitrary gt Memory Menagement Populated segment s 1 Memory usage pts 1600 r Instrument Settings Amplitude MI 8 000 Offset MI 1 000 Sample clock S s 20e3 Select from the menu View gt gt Options r Check this box if you do not wish to show it again Reject Figure 4 55 Pulse Editor Download Summary It is important to understand that when you download a pulse waveform from the Pulse Composer the parameters and mode of operation of the 3172 might be altered The download summary shows what the new mode of operation will be so that you can reject the new settings if you do not agree to the changes Once you press the Accept button the waveform will be downloaded to the generator and the modes and parameters will be updated as shown in th
84. a baseline accuracy issue Null Offset Symmetrical Voltage Range Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 10 mV Adjustment 1 Program CAL SETup 27 2 Adjust RV5 RV2 in channel 2 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Amplifier Offset Positive Voltage Range Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 28 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setup 29 Amplifier Offset Negative Voltage Range Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range negative Amplitude 10 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 29 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 30 5 V Amplitude 0 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output t
85. aam 5 3mV The offset accuracy is checked for all three amplitude ranges Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Positive and Negative and for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms 6 6 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect W2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 20 mV Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Offset As specified in the test Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range DAC Output W2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 4 000 V 4 000 V 55 mV 1 500 V 1 500 V 30 mV 1 500 V 1 500 V 30 mV 4 000 V 4 000 V 55 mV E Ooo S ee 2 Me See 0000V ov s15my S d E gt o O S E 2 Modify W2 amplitude range to symmetrical amplitude setting to 6 V and offset setting to 0 V 3 Continue the Offset tests using Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range DAC Output Continued W2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 0 000V gen dC 4 Modify the amplitude range to Positive and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Amplitude Accuracy Positive Range DAC
86. all Sections menu command lets you remove the entire pulse design from the pulse screen and start with a fresh page Undo The Undo command reverses the last editing operation This command is extremely useful in cases where you unintentionally delete a section from the pulse train and want to restore it to the pulse graph Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H View Menu E Pulse Editor Section 2 m Section Structure hea Time Cumulative evel interval Time 0 0 0 3172 User Manual The View menu lets you view various sections of the pulse graph The View menu include Pulse Editor Full Train Single Sections and Options Descriptions of the view menu items are given below Pulse Editor The view Pulse Editor menu item invokes a dialog box as shown in Figure 4 43 In general the Pulse Editor is used for placing straight line segments on the screen in intervals that define pulse width rise fall time and amplitude Information how to use the Pulse Editor to create pulse trains is given later in this chapter Full Train The view Full Train menu item shows on the pulse graph all sections of the pulse train Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform a lt Points gt es Pulse Train Design Format e DC Intervals Time
87. and the Standard Event The SCPI Status register group to record various instrument conditions Figure 5 6 Registers shows the SCPI status system An Event Register is a read only register that reports defined conditions within the generator Bits in an event register are latched When an event bit is set subsequent state changes are ignored Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the CLS command The RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register Querying an event register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit The user can read from and write to an Enable Register Querying an Enable Register will not clear it The CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear bits in the event registers To enable bits in an enable register write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits required to enable in the register 5 120 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Th The Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other e Status Byte Register STB Reading the Status Byte Register Astronics Test Systems registers Query data waiting in the generator s output buffer is immedia
88. applications or for synchronization purposes The sample clock input is active only after selecting the External Sample Clock Source option When enabled by the Digital Stimulus Pattern Command the below listed pins output TTL levels at the programmed sample rate Up to 16 000 different digital patterns can be stored in the waveform memory The maximum depth of the patterns is the same as for individual arbitrary waveform segments When the Digital Pattern output pins are enabled the main output is disabled The list below describes the function of each of the J1 pins J1 1 J1 6 and J1 17 Ground connections J1 3 Not used J1 4 SYNC Output TTL level signal used during digital pattern generation SYNC out is controlled by bit 12 of the 16 bit digital word J1 5 Cursor Output TTL level signal used during digital pattern generation Cursor out is controlled by bit 13 of the 16 bit digital word J1 7 Bit 0 of the 16 bit digital word J1 8 Bit 1 of the 16 bit digital word J1 9 Bit 2 of the 16 bit digital word J1 10 Bit 3 of the 16 bit digital word 3172 User Manual P2 Front Panel Connectors PG1 OUT J2 A1 GATE IN J2 A2 Publication Number 980949 Rev H J1 11 Bit 4 of the 16 bit digital word J1 12 Bit 5 of the 16 bit digital word J1 13 Bit 6 of the 16 bit digital word J1 14 Bit 7 of the 16 bit digital word J1 15 Bit 8 of the 16 bit digital word J1 16 Bit 9 o
89. automatically assigned the ADJ path This can not be changed because of the nature of synchronization of two instruments in a single slot Also note that Channel 1 is now master and channel 2 is the servant LBUS defines a connection between adjacent slots using the VXI backplane local bus lines In this case the master is always on the left and the servant units are adjacent to the master on the right side It is not allowed to break the chain of instruments because local bus lines connect instruments in a daisy chained link Note in Figure 4 23 that slots 7 8 and 9 are daisy chained through the local bus The instrument in slot 7 is the master unit and the others are servants Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ECLT defines a connection between any slot using the VXI backplane ECLTrg lines In this case the master can be assigned to any instrument in the chassis regardless if it is on the left right or mixed with other instruments in the chassis The example in Figure 4 24 shows how to form two groups in a single chassis where group one synchronizes two channels and group 2 synchronizes three different instruments in a specific master servant configuration Note that slot 9 was moved up and assigned master while slots 7 and 8 became servants Ph Offs Phase Offset defines an offset between the master module and its servants Note that the master instrument can also be set with an of
90. be changed however the position of the bit pulse in reference to the waveform cycle can be changed using the outp sync pos command In case the bit is too narrow for the application you may use the outp sync sour puls option where you can modify both the position and the width of the sync signal LCOMplete Discrete Programs the loop complete validation This type is the normal sync output for the sequenced and counted burst waveforms The output will revert automatically to LCOM when the instrument is programmed to generate one of the above waveforms The LCOM pulse starts at the beginning of the sequence and ends at the end of the sequence You may change the start position using the outp sync pos command In this case the LCOM pulse will start at the new position but will always end at the end of the sequence SSYNc Discrete Programs the synchronized validation This type is similar to the bit option except it is useful in triggered or Astronics Test Systems 5 27 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H gated modes where the 1 clock jitter between the trigger and the output signal is eliminated through a special circuit that synchronizes the sync output to the triggered signal PULSe Discrete Programs the pulse validation This type is similar to the bit option except that when this option is selected the width of the sync pulse can be programmed in increments of 4 points from a minimum of 4 point to a maximum of segment le
91. be used as an active source at the same time trig sour bus This selects the software trigger as the active source for trigger events The Trigger Level command sets the threshold level for the trigger input connector only The trigger level is adjustable from 10 V to 10 V using the following command Trig lev lt value gt This programs the trigger level threshold for signals that are applied to the front panel TRIG IN connector The default value is 1 6 V which is appropriate for TTL signals The Trigger Slope command selects between positive and negative edge triggering The inputs that will be affected by this command are Front panel TRIG IN connector TTLTrg lines 0 through 7 and ECLTrg line 0 Use the following command to select slope sensitivity for trigger events trig slop pos This sets the 3172 to respond to positive going transitions only Positive transitions must cross the trigger level threshold to trigger a response trig slop neg This sets the 3172 to respond to negative going transitions only Negative transitions must cross the trigger level threshold to trigger a response The trigger delay value designates the time that will elapse from a trigger event to the start of the waveform at the output connector The trigger delay adds to the system delay time see the definition Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Activating the Backplane TTLTrg Lines Controlling W
92. below Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application e IP address The unique computer readable address of a device on your network An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods for example 192 160 0 233 Refer to the next section Choosing a Static IP Address e Subnet mask A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network e Gateway IP The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway which is a connection between two networks If your network does not have a gateway set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator If you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network you must choose IP addresses carefully Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device Also have the network administrator assign the proper subnet mask and gateway IP For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network you can choose your own IP addresses The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device If your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same If your subnet mask is 255 255 0
93. binary Figure 5 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF 0aH characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data lt binary_block gt Represents waveform data The waveform data is made of 16 bit words However programmers may choose to prepare the data in two bytes and arrange to download these two bytes in a sequence Figure 5 3 shows a waveform word that is acceptable for the 3172 There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data Waveform data points have 16 bit values 0x0000 to OxFFFF 2 Data point range is 0 to 65 535 decimal for the 3172 and 0 to 4095 decimal for the 3152A 0x0000 correspond to 8 V and OxFFFF corresponds to 8V OxFFF corresponds to 8 V for the 3152A 3 3172 data point data point 65 535 corresponds to full scale amplitude setting Point 32768 corresponds to 0 V amplitude setting Figure 5 3 shows how to initially prepare the 16 bit word for a waveform data point Astronics Test Systems 5 53 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H MSB high byte lt gt low byte LSB D15 p14 ons onz o1 foro o9 os o7 oe os os os o2 o1 oo Figure 5 3 3172 W2 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation Parameters
94. can be placed in Triggered Gated or Burst mode Trigger source is selectable from an external backplane trigger lines an internal trigger generator that has asynchronous free running programmable intervals and software commands It also has a built in internal re trigger generator that provides accurate and self repeating control from waveform end to waveform start Optional nodes were omitted from these commands The Run Mode settings affect all waveform shapes equally except when using the modulated waveforms In the case of modulated waveform the output idles on either the carrier waveform or on a DC level until stimulated to output a modulation cycle or burst of cycles Additional information on the run mode options and how the generator behaves in the various run mode options is given in Chapter 3 Table 5 4 summarizes the run mode commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in the default column Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Table 5 4 Run Mode Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Association INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 1 W2 P2 TRIGger IMMediate BURSt STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 COUNt 1 to 1000000 W2 1 to 65 536 P2 1 W2 P2 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 Me 100e 9 to 20 W2 100e 9 to 7 P2 100e 9 W2 P2 GATE MODe LEVel TRANsition LEV w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 LEVel 10 to 10 1 6 w2 SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt
95. change the displayed number the 3172 will be updated with the new parameter only after you click on the Modify Execute knob Digital Display The digital display is a tool for displaying various 3172 parameters just as on a physical control panel ei Note The normal color of a displayed number is dark blue If you modify the number its color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 3172 has not been updated yet with the new value Clicking on the Modify Execute knob will update the instrument and restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the actual 3172 setting now matches the displayed number Also note that the digital readout has an auto detect mechanism for high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits when using the dial but you may if you use the keypad If you enter a number that exceeds the limits ArbConnection will not let you update the instrument with the setting until you correct it Run Mode Standard Arbitran Sequence Half Cycle gt Modulation Figure 4 4 Operation Panel Selection Astronics Test Systems 4 5 3172 User Manual The Operation Panels Output 4 6 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Operation panels provide control over the basic operation of the 3172 From these panels you may select the output function and run mode turn the output on and off and adjust parameters for various functions There are five panels in this group
96. command causes the transfer of 10 bytes of data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 3 designates the number of digits that follow e 100 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 4 The generator accepts binary data as 32 bit integers which are sent in five byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always three times the number of arbitrary FM waveform points For example 100 bytes are required to download 20 arbitrary FM waveform points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 2 refer to the TRACe subsystem The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data Downloading data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory is very different than loading arbitrary waveform data Waveform data programs in the amplitude domain such that every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs in the frequency domain such that every point sets a different frequency The FM modulating waveform data is made of 32 bit words The data has to be prepared as 32 bit words and rearranged as five 8 bit words befo
97. command removes all stop bits and clears the segment table You can recover memory segments by using the TRAC DEF command You can also use this technique to resize or combine waveform segments TRACe SELect lt segment_number gt Description This command selects the active waveform segment for the output By selecting the active segment you are performing two function 1 Successive TRAC commands will affect the selected segment 2 The SYNC output will be assigned to the selected segment This behavior is especially important for sequence operation where multiple segments form a large sequence In this case you can Astronics Test Systems 5 55 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H synchronize external devices exactly to the segment of interest Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the active segment number TE integer only Response The 3172 returns the active segment number SEGment lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This command will partition the waveform memory to smaller segments and will soeed up memory segmentation The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then just use this command to split the waveform to the appropriate memory segments In this way there is no need to define and download waveforms to individual segments Using this command segment table data is loaded to the 3172 using high speed binary
98. commands into a string that Commands W2 Module Only Using the Apply Commands Astronics Test Systems contains all controls for a specific function For example to program a sine waveform that has certain frequency amplitude and offset you have to use five different commands func mode fix func shap sin freq lt freq gt ampl lt ampl gt offs lt offs gt Alternately you can select the sine function and immediately assign all of the required parameters when using the apply command The five lines above are replaced by a simple line as follows Appl sin lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt There are certain rules you must follow when using the apply commands These are summarized below The apply commands provide a high level method of programming pre defined standard and arbitrary waveforms Selection can be made for function frequency amplitude offset and other parameters which are associated with the selected function For example the following 5 57 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H statement outputs a 2 Vp p square wave at 1 MHz with a 0 V offset and 10 duty cycle appl squ 1e6 2 0 10 It is not necessary to enter every parameter with the APPLy command If only the frequency and offset need to be changed omit the other parameters while keeping the commas The other parameters are set to the power up default values appl squ 10e6 1 Alternatively if just the first paramete
99. harker 0 3D Memo Map 5e3 points free NEEN Vertical Controls X 100ms 10ms Div Y SeBHz 1 1425e6Hz Div 1 0 2 25 10e6 3 50 166 5 100 400ms 1Oms Div Y 3600eg 450eq Div tine Figure 4 63 3D Chirp Design Example Astronics Test Systems 4 89 3172 User Manual The Command Editor Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Command Editor is a tool for doing low level programming of the 3172 Invoke the Command Editor from the System menu at the top of the screen The Command Editor dialog box as shown in Figure 4 64 will pop up If you press the Download button the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument Command Editor xj Command Response r Command Editor Add Errorfs quey M voti 5zhteg 10 7e6 Y Download Remove Line p ooo History Butter Clear Import Export Download Logging SCPI Commands 4 90 Figure 4 64 Command Editor Low level SCPI commands and queries can be sent directly to the 3172 from the Command field Instrument responses to queries automatically appear in the Response field The command editor is a useful troubleshooting tool This way you can be sure of command syntax and functionality before you use it in your application The complete list of 3172 SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5 The Log File is very useful for programmers that do not wish to spend a lot of time
100. ims 50us TI pt Lsz tmel ll REENEN 6 16 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Re trigger Equipment Counter AroConnection Characteristics Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Pulse Width Measurement ChA Slope Negative 2 Connect the counter channel A to the W2 output 3 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 9 4 Configure the W2 as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level oV Re trigger On Re trigger Delay As required by the test Trigger Source Bus Output On Test Procedure 1 Manually trigger the instrument 2 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 26 Table 6 26 Re Trigger Delay Tests Error Limits Counter Reading SSES 1 us 85 ns 1 ms 50 us 1s 50 ms 5 s 500 ms W2 Re trigger Setting Astronics Test Systems 6 17 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Trigger Slope Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External 2 Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continue Waveform 2 V Square
101. in the chassis on this line otherwise the 3172 will not operate correctly Observe the input level and limitations before connecting an external signal to this line LBUS lt 0 7 gt Discrete Activates the backplane LBUSO to LBUS7 as the source for the sample clock input The signal must be generated from an adjacent module in the chassis acting as the master Also the master and slave modules must be configured for LBUS operation For details refer to the Local Bus Configuration section in Chapter 2 Response The 3172 returns INT EXT ECLTO or LBUS lt n gt depending on the current sample clock source setting VOLTage lt ampl gt MINimum MAXimum Description This command programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 500 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt ampl gt 5e 3 to Numeric 10 Sets the amplitude of the output waveform in units of 20e0 volts Amplitude setting is always peak to peak Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude value does not exceed the specified window lt MINimum gt Discrete Sets the amplitude to the lowest possible level 5 mV Astronics Test Systems 5 33 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the amplitude to the highest possible level 20 V or 22 V depending on the range Response The 3172 returns the present amplitude
102. kan a aee a E A A RE a E dateas Hae AEREE 4 32 RT Hiel 4 33 X Instr ument SYNC ses Eege Eege 4 35 THE System PanelSi sicie r aa aE aaea O EEE Sraa VANE Eaa Sonne aE RdA 4 39 General GIE 4 40 RAUL McA de ese E EEE A E E EE E 4 41 the Composers EE 4 41 The Waye ale E 4 42 The Wave Composer Menu Bar 4 43 Pil Oe 4 44 Edit Men eegene 4 46 View e ul ne EE 4 47 En EE 4 48 Hate Lee 4 49 The Waveform e KEE 4 50 Generating Waveforms Using Equation Editor cccccccceceeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeetene 4 51 Writing Equations E 4 53 Astronics Test Systems V 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equation Conventions xc ene ee Need el Nee eo ae Ze Wa taeda ea ae 4 54 BR ien Re Le e EE 4 55 EQUATION Examples cece heehee ee EE bat Deer meh ee Te eet 4 56 Combining WaveformS os eet seivcsite ncgins AER va levee nds euaetbgs dee tees dee Ed Eed age 4 60 DRAN RE COMPOSE EE 4 62 The Pulse Composer Menu Bar ints ctacese pacszscsuactecceeacateaduneeeiotdiadsetyganduvdiertncnepagectraccumen te 4 62 a 4 63 Edit MON VE 4 64 View Menu EE 4 65 TOOS En WE 4 66 The Pulse Composer E EE 4 66 RE ue Me 4 67 Setting the Pulse Editor Options ccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeetegaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeees 4 69 Using the Pulse EE 4 70 Pulse Example Section E EE 4 73 Pulse Example Section 2 reae e ithe E Ee A E E E hee 4 74 Pulse Example Section 3 EEN 4 75 P lse Example Section EE 4 76 POSS VEX ARPS Secti
103. level This is the default for Gated mode trig gate tran This option makes the input transition sensitive The gate opens on the first transition and closes on the next transition lt gate event gt This event controls Gated mode You may select the source of the gate events from a number of inputs including the front panel or VXlbus backplane trigger line The gating sequence continues unless you change the run mode or turn off power Use the following commands to restore Continuous mode trig gate O Turns off the Gated mode The generator reverts to Triggered mode init cont on Places the 3172 into Continuous mode Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode except that only one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output cycles In Burst mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a valid trigger event initiates a burst of output waveforms Any trigger source can initiate a burst If a hardware trigger source is selected the edge sensitivity can be programmed for either the rising or falling edge of the input signal Each time a transition at the trigger input occurs the 3172 generates a counted burst of output waveforms At the end of the burst the output assumes a DC level equal to the amplitude of the first point of the waveform The burst counter is programmable from 1 to 1 M counts The 3172 can also operate in conjunction with Re triggered mode creating a continuous sequence of delayed b
104. minimum pulse width range This error may occur in half duty cycle pulse mode only and in conjunction with any of the run modes under the following conditions DUTY CYCLE lt WID Range To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Increase the duty cycle value 2 Increase the period value Error 507 Delay Conflict occurs when attempting to program a leading or trailing edge transition that is larger than the programmed pulse delay This error may occur in delayed pulse mode only and in conjunction with all run modes under the following conditions WID 0 625 LEE TRE gt DEL When such an error occurs the resultant output could look as illustrated in Figure 3 13 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of 3 53 3172 User Manual Controlling A3 Output 3 54 Publication Number 980949 Rev H the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Decrease the pulse width value 2 Decrease the delay value 3 Decrease the leading edge value 4 Decrease the trailing edge value The A3 module is a single channel high voltage amplifier It does not generate waveforms itself but simply amplifies low voltage signals from a W2 P2 module To use it with the W2 waveform generator module use a coaxial cable to connect the W2 output to
105. modulation is turned off the instrument generates a continuous wave CW signal or steady state sine wave The following commands control the modulation of the carrier wave mod type off mod type am mod type fm mod type swe mod type fsk This disables modulation so that the output generates a CW signal CW is the sine waveform that is being modulated When placed in Modulation Off the sine waveform is continuously generated from the main output In this mode sine waveforms can be generated from 100 uHz to 30 MHz Modulation off operates in Continuous Mode only The CW settings do not automatically change when you switch from one modulation function to another This selects amplitude modulation AM The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the AM scheme modulation shape modulation frequency and modulation depth This selects frequency modulation FM The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the FM scheme modulation shape modulation frequency and marker placement This selects sweep modulation The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the sweep start and stop frequency sweep time and direction sweep spacing and marker placement This selects frequency shift keying FSK The 3 29 3172 User Manual Modulation Parameters 3 30 mod type ask mod type psk mod type fhop mod type ahop mod type 3d
106. of 1 PPM per year The accuracy of the internal source is adjustable but will shift with time and ambient temperature When better accuracy or stability is required or when clock synchronization to other devices is necessary you may select another source The 10 MHz source options are Internal from the built in source External applied to the front panel 10 MHz input connector CLK10 Available on the VXI backplane The CLK10 source has the least accuracy and stability of the three options but is useful for synchronization with other VXI modules Sequence The Sequence Advance Mode group provides control over advanced modes for the sequence generator Advanced options include Auto Stepped Single and Mixed Refer to Chapter 3 for details about these advanced modes Memory Management The Memory Management group provides access to the Memory Partition and Waveform Studio Screens The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 9 The Waveform Studio button opens the screen shown in Figure 4 10 Instructions for using these screens are given in the following paragraphs Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Using the Memory Partition Table Astronics Test Systems Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about waveform memory and segment control In general the 3172 generates arbitrary waveforms but they must first be downloaded from the host computer to the 3172 wavefo
107. of the trigger input signal When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle and then remains idle at an amplitude level equal to the voltage of the first point of the waveform You may set the instrument to receive triggers from the front panel connector backplane or the trigger command in your software A re trigger circuit requires only one trigger event after which it automatically generates a series of triggers In this case the re trigger delay parameter determines the time between waveform cycles The trigger signal whether it comes from the front panel VXlbus trigger line or a software command has to pass through electrical circuits These circuits cause a small delay known as system delay This delay determines the amount of time it will take from a valid trigger edge to the moment that the output reacts System delay cannot be eliminated completely and must be accounted for when using a trigger signal Note that the W2 modules have a single input for trigger and gated signals but the P2 module has two inputs one for trigger and the other for gate On the P2 module you first need to associate the trigger and gate inputs with the appropriate channel because there is only one input available for both In Gated mode the 3172 circuits generate an output waveform as long as a gating signal is present The instrument can be programmed to gate on two different signal types The normal mode is level sensitive where th
108. on and off filters that were selected with the OUTP FILT command Note that the filters are not accessible during standard sine waveform output And therefore if you intend to use filters change the output waveform function or type first and then you ll be allowed to apply filters as required Parameters Range Type Default Description Astronics Test Systems 5 25 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the output on and off Response The 3172 returns 1 if a filter is selected or 0 if a filter is de selected OUTPut LOAD lt load gt Description This command specifies the load impedance that will be applied to the 3172 output Parameters Name Type Default Description lt load gt Numeric 50 Will specify the load impedance that will be applied to integer only the 3172 outputs in units of Q The default setting is 50 Q The range of load impedance is 50 9 to 1 MQ Accurate setting of the load impedance is crucial for correct value of the amplitude level at the load Response The 3172 returns an integer value depending on the present output load setting OUTPut OFF ON 0 1 Description This command turns the 3172 output on and off Note that for safety the outputs always default to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the output on and off Response The 3172 returns 1 if the output is
109. on or 0 if the output is off OUTPut SYNC OFF ON 0 1 Description This command turns the 3172 SYNC output on and off Note that for safety the SYNC output always defaults to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the SYNC output on and off 5 26 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns 1 if the SYNC output is on or 0 if the SYNC output is off OUTPut SYNC POSition lt position gt Description This command programs the 3172 SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER mode only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt position gt 0 to 1e6 1 Numeric 0 Sets the SYNC position in waveform points The sync Integer only position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum Response The 3172 returns the present SYNC position value OUTPut SYNC SOURCe BIT LCOM SSYN PULS ZERO Description This command programs the condition that needs to be validated for the 3172 to generate the SYNC output Parameters Name Type Default Description BIT Discrete BIT Programs the bit validation This type is the normal sync output for the standard and arbitrary waveforms The bit output will revert to marker output when the instrument is programmed to generate modulated waveforms The width of the bit pulse is always four sample clock cycles and cannot
110. other two waveforms triangle and square are computed and the swept coordinates placed in the arbitrary memory The calculation of the sine and triangle waveforms takes a long time any time between seconds to minutes depending on the complexity of the sweep so should only be used when absolutely necessary in the application Figure 4 16 Sweep Modulation Panel 4 26 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual FSK PSK ASK Astronics Test Systems Step Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options linear or logarithmic Direction Use these keys to program the sweep direction Up selects a sweep from the Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation Parameters These allow the adjustment of the Sweep Start CW Stop and Sweep Time You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Marker parameter To access the required parameter click on the parameter s name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the TT Hl keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new setting The FSK PSK ASK panel Figure 4 17
111. point waveform sample has a vertical resolution of 16 bits 65 536 levels Another way to express this is that each sample has an amplitude resolution of one part in 65 536 For legacy emulation 12 bit waveform data is converted into 16 bit data with a four position shift The standard 3172 W2 has a waveform memory capacity of 1M points Each point has a unique address The address of the first point is zero and the address of the last point depends upon the waveform memory size If a waveform does not require the entire waveform memory then you may divide the memory into smaller segments each of which may store a separate waveform When the instrument is set to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time starting with address 0 and continuing to the last data point of the waveform The rate at which each sample is retrieved is defined as the sample clock rate The 3172 W2 provides programmable sample clock rates from 100 mS s to 200 MS s Unlike waveforms contained in the built in library arbitrary waveforms must first be downloaded into waveform memory One of the easiest ways to calculate the waveform samples is to use ArbConnection It provides an on screen editor called Wave Composer for creating and editing waveforms Figure 3 1 shows a complex waveform from the Wave Composer editor Chapter 4 provides instructions for using ArbConnection and its Wave Composer editor You may divide the 3172 W
112. programming the sweep parameters i Sweep control is internal The frequency will sweep from start to stop Programming frequencies at an interval determined by the sweep time value and controlled by a step type determined by the sweep step parameter There are two sweep modes Linear where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is linear and Logarithmic where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is logarithmic The commands for programming the frequency sweep function are described below SWEep FREQuency lt start_freq gt Description This specifies the sweep start frequency The 3172 normally sweeps from start to stop frequencies however if the sweep direction is reversed the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform frequency range Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 10e3 Programs the sweep start frequency Sweep start is 30e6 programmed in units of Hz Astronics Test Systems 5 79 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Response The 3172 returns the present sweep start frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep FREQuency STOP lt stop_freq gt Description T
113. required modulation scheme func mode half Selects the half cycle waveform function Similar to the standard waveform function half cycle functions are recomputed every time this function is selected or a parameter has changed When programming a waveform function you must consider the run mode since combinations of waveform types that are legal in one mode may not be legal in a different mode For example arbitrary and sequenced waveforms that do not conflict in Continuous mode may conflict in Burst mode Previous paragraphs provided sinusoidal waveform examples showing how to set amplitude and offset This section expands on that capability covering all nine standard waveforms in the 3172 W2 internal library sine triangle square pulse ramp Gaussian pulses exponential pulses DC and noise The following command sequence example demonstrates how to select a standard ramp waveform with an amplitude of 1Vp p an offset of zero a rise time of 10 of the ramp period and a fall time of 10 of the ramp period Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Astronics Test Systems rst outp 1 func mode fix func shap ramp ramp tran 10 ramp tran tra 10 volt 1 volt offs 0 3172 User Manual Restores factory defaults Activates the hardware connection to the front panel OUTPUT connector and turns the output on Selects the built in library of standard waveforms Selects the ramp from the b
114. select the modulation function but set the modulation type to Off the output generates an un modulated continuous waveform CW signal The frequency setting of the carrier in modulation mode is not the same as for standard waveform mode and must be programmed separately Use the following command to program the carrier frequency mod carr lt value gt Set the CW frequency in units of Hz The same value will be used for all modulation functions As explained above the Advanced Trigger mode allows the 3172 W2 output to idle when it has finished a waveform segment and is waiting for the next trigger event The output signal during this time is called the baseline The 3172 W2 offers two options for the base line 1 Carrier un modulated CW carrier 2 DC Level Use the following command to control the carrier base line mod carr bas carr Selects continuous wave CW when the modulated function idles between trigger events mod carr bas dc Selects continuous DC level when the modulated function idles between trigger events 3 31 3172 User Manual Generating Half Cycle Waveforms Using the Counter Timer 3 32 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Half Cycle function is a special case of standard waveforms except that the waveforms are generated a half cycle at a time and displaced by a programmable delay time In continuous mode the half cycles are generated continuously In triggered mode one half a
115. sequence successive SEQ commands will affect the selected sequence only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sequence_ gt 1 to 10 Numeric 1 Selects the active sequence number integer only 5 68 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns the active sequence number SEQuence DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt lt adv_mode gt lt sync_bit gt 7 Description This command builds a step in a sequence table It defines all of the parameters that are associated with the sequence step such as segment number link loop advance mode and sync mode Parameters Name Range Type Description lt step gt 1 to 4096 Numeric integer Programs the step in the sequence table Steps are indexed only from 1 to 4096 and must be programmed in an ascending order Empty step locations in a sequence table are not permitted lt seg_ gt 1 to 10k Numeric integer Assigns a segment to a specific step number When only encountered in the sequence table the segment number that is associated with the step is generated lt repeat gt 1to 1M Numeric integer Programs the repeat number of loops that a specific step only will play before advancing to the next step in the sequence lt adv_mode gt 0 1 Boolean A 0 programs normal advance a 1 programs trigger advance Steps with a 0 assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1
116. set up the 3172 rst Restore factory defaults Table 5 1 provides a complete listing of defaults outp 1 Enable output relay to turn output on volt lt value gt Set up the amplitude level volt offs lt value gt Set up the offset level Set up your oscilloscope to observe that the 3172 generates a sine waveform with the following properties On W2 modules Frequency 1 MHz Offset 0 V Amplitude 10 V Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Programming Amplitude and Offset Astronics Test Systems On P2 modules Waveform Pulse Period 1 ms Offset 0 V Amplitude 10 V The output of the 3172 is calibrated for signals applied to a 50 Q load If your amplitude is twice as higher than expected then the 3172 output may not be properly terminated In this case either add a 50 Q termination to the cabling or change your oscilloscope settings so that its input uses the built in 50 Q input termination Also note the interaction between amplitude and the offset as described below The 3172 amplitude and offset can be programmed within an amplitude window of 5 mVp p up to 22 Vp p 20 Vp p for POS or NEG ranges This window can be shifted and used in three amplitude ranges e Positive where signals can be programmed from 0 V to 20 V e Negative where signals can be programmed from 0 V to 20 V e Symmetrical for signal span from 11 V to 11 V Regardless of the amplitude range that y
117. similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Internal AM Parameters Figure 4 15 AM Panel Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems Modulating Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform There are four built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square or Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it The modulating waveform can be selected independently for each channel Freq Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform Note that the frequency setting must be smaller than the CW frequency for the AM function to operate correctly Note that the modulating frequency setting is common to both channels Depth The Depth parameter programs the modulation depth or index in percent of the un modulated CW amplitude The depth is symmetrical about the center of the CW amplitude Each channel can have a unique setting of the modulation depth To access the required parameter click on the parameter name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the T keys to adjust
118. standard Menu Bar Windows operations such as File Edit and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific operations such as Wave and System In general clicking on one of the menus pulls down a list of commands Clicking on a listed command may then either open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example clicking on File and then Exit will cause the immediate termination of the Wave Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Sine will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters The various commands in the menu bar are listed and described below ES wave Composer gt C TemS1 wad I x Eile Edit View Wave Download About Li 2 RM B il wett bi BB n Wavelenath 1024 Active seg 1 IE Sa L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 Vertical Scale 4kPts 500e 3kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 29 Wave Composer Opening Screen Astronics Test Systems 4 43 3172 User Manual File Menu 4 44 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The File menu has four selections that control waveform file operations This menu also can be used to print the active waveform or to exit from Wave Composer Descriptions of the menu selections from the File pull down menu are given below New Waveform The New Waveform Ctrl N menu item removes the current waveform from the graph window Changes made to the waveform gra
119. that is sensed at the trigger input connector will be counted and measured and its result processed and placed on the interface port Response The 3172 returns NORM INV or COMP depending on the present polarity setting 5 102 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual COUNter GATE lt time gt Description This command programs the gate time interval for frequency period averaged and totalize in gated mode Measurements will be taken only after the input has been armed and valid signal available at the input connector Notice however that the gate time internal must be larger than the period of the measure signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 6 to 1 Numeric 1 Programs the gate time interval in units of seconds In continuous mode the counter is self armed and therefore every valid signal at the counter input will open the gate and initiate a measurement cycle In hold mode the counter must be armed before the gate can open Always make sure the programmed gate time interval is larger than the period of the measured signal Response The 3172 returns the present gate time value in units of seconds COUNter RESet Description This command resets the counter timer and arm the instrument for its next reading COUNter READ Description This command interrogates the counter timer for a reading Note that the read command must follow a valid gate time
120. that they change to correspond with your anchor placements 2 You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4 32 Finally when you are done creating and editing your waveform you can save your work to a directory of your choice The name of the waveform file will be displayed in Wave Composer s title bar including the path A more general purpose way to create waveforms using ArbConnection is to use Equation Editor Equation Editor let you write equations for the desired waveform and lets ArobConnection calculate the values and display them on the graph Equation Editor detects syntax errors and can auto scale your waveforms so that no dynamic range is lost When you invoke Equation Editor the dialog box shown in Figure 4 35 appears The following paragraphs describe how to use the features of Equation Editor 24x Anchor Start pts fo End pts 1023 Amplitude p Equation Jamp sin 1 O oma p p t 0 1 v Waveform Amplitude m Level Adjuster Max 2047 Cycles Auto_Scaling Min ES H C Original Scale Default History Insert Wave Clear FER ons lt Aliases gt gt Figure 4 35 Equation Editor Dialog Box Astronics Test Systems There are four sub group parameters in the equation
121. the command Expect unsupported commands to generate errors Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 1 3172 SCPI Command Summary for 3171 Emulation PG1 PG2 ARB Keyword Parameter Form Default n 1 n 2 n 3 3172 SOURce lt n gt FUNCtion SHAPe DC DC x x D v SINusoid D SQUare x TRlangular x RAMP PULSe i USER DiGital S POLarity NORMal INVerted NORM x y COUNt lt numeric value gt 0 D v MOL Tage y MODE FIXed FIX x D D v LIST x v LEVel y IMMediate 4 AMPLitude lt numeric value gt 0 00 x x x y TRIGgered v AMPLitude lt numeric value gt 0 00 a OFFSet lt numeric value gt 0 00 v H Ference v STATe ON OFF OFF D v FREQuency y MODE CW CW x x x y CW lt numeric value gt 1e3 x y PULSe v PERiod lt numeric value gt 1 25e 8 x x x y WIDTh lt numeric value gt 1e 8 D x x y COUNt lt numeric value gt 0 D D D y POLarity NORMal INVerted NORM x x x y TRANsSsition v LEADing lt numeric value gt 5e 9 D x v TRAiling lt numeric value gt 5e 9 x x y STATe OFF ON OFF v Astronics Test Systems 5 7 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 1 3172 SCPI Command Summary for 3171 Emulation continued
122. the Triggered run mode init cont on This removes the 3172 W2 from interrupted run mode and reverts to Continuous mode In Gated mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a valid event opens the gate Only triggers from hardware sources can open and close the gate Use VXlbus backplane trigger lines or the front panel trigger input as the gating control You may set the edge sensitivity of the trigger signal for either the rising or falling edge of the signal At the end of the last output cycle the output assumes a DC level equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform There are two selectable conditions for opening the gate Two transitions in the same direction toggle the gate on and off The gate remains closed as long as the trigger signal is below 3 9 3172 User Manual Burst Run Mode 3 10 Publication Number 980949 Rev H the trigger level setting and opens when the trigger signal exceeds the trigger level setting Use the following commands to turn the gate function on and to select the condition that will open the gate init cont off Selects the interrupted run mode If you did not select a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode trig gate 1 Turns the Gated mode on trig gate lev This option makes the gate level sensitive The gate opens when the gating signal amplitude exceeds the value of the programmed trigger
123. the counter as follows Channel 1 input impedance High Channel 2 input impedance 50 Q Function TI A gt B Connect a BNC T connector to counter channel A Connect one end of the T connector to the function generator output 5 Connect the other end of the T connector to the TRG PLL input of the 3152B using a 50 Q terminator at the 3152B connector Po 6 Connect the 3152B output to counter input B 7 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL Fine Phase Offset 30 Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 61 for a counter reading of 8 28 us to 8 38 us 1 Repeat Setup 10 and Setup 11 until the errors have been minimized 7 24 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Reference OscillatorsUse this procedure to adjust the reference oscillators The reference oscillators determine the accuracy of the output frequency so if you Adjustments suspect that there is an accuracy issue proceed with the calibration of the reference oscillators Note that the 50MHz is marked as a factory adjustment and therefore it is not normally required to be performed during normal calibration cycles except if the gated oscillator accuracy does not meet the published specification limits or after a repair has been executed on this same circuit Setup 50MHz 50 MHz Gated Oscillator Adjustment Equipment Counter Function Generator BNC to
124. the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new setting 4 25 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Sweep The Sweep Modulation panel Figure 4 16 contains parameters for controlling the sweep function To turn the sweep function on and off click on the Sweep button in the State group The various groups in the sweep panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the Sweep function Sweep Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the sweep function These are Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Note that in sweep modulation the Start parameter replaces the CW value Function The Function buttons select which of the waveforms will be swept The sine wave is the default waveform and it is swept using the DDS circuit The
125. the warranty agreement Appendix A lists the instrument specifications Specifications apply under the following conditions e Output terminated into 50 Q e 30 minute warm up period e Ambient temperature range of 20 C to 30 C e For temperatures outside the above temperature range specifications degrade by 0 1 per C There are no options available for the 3172 series Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Supplied Accessories W2 Front Panel Connectors AM IN J1 A1 PM IN J1 A2 Astronics Test Systems The instrument is supplied with a CD containing the instruction manual ArobConnection software for Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems part number 922336 001 and VXIplug amp play soft front panel and drivers part number 922556 The W2 has a single Combo D sub 24W7 connector marked as J1 which has seven coaxial connections and 17 low frequency pins This connector embeds all of the I O signal that the W2 generates and needs to control its functions Figure 1 7 shows the connector and its pin assignments The following paragraphs describe each Arbitrary Waveform Generator input output signal TRIG IN 1OMHz REF IN SYNC OUT SCLK IN Gisisistisisisisisisisisisisise ARB OUT H Figure 1 7 W2 Module I O Connector The external Modulation coax input provides the capability to externally amplitude modulate the
126. therefore only double pulse delay is performed in this test and the results will verify the accuracy of the delayed pulse as well To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Double Pulse Delay Equipment Counter timer Accuracy Tests Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Period Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Double Pulse Run Mode Triggered High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Period 100 ms Pulse Width 10 ns Output On Dbl Pulse Delay As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Manually trigger the P2 for each test 2 Perform double pulse delay accuracy tests using Table 6 59 Reset counter reading after each test Table 6 59 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests P2 Double Pulse Delay Setting Error Limits Counter Reading Pass 10 00000 me 300us 1 000000 ms 80 0ns Y 100 000us 3 00us O 10 000us 300 5ns 1 000 us 30 5ns y O L 10ns 2 ml This tests the accuracy of the hold duty cycle pulse mode Actually Hold Duty Cycle the hold duty cycle mode is a special case of the single pulse mode Pulse Mode except in single pulse mode the pulse width remains constant regardless of the period settin
127. this Amplitude p 1000 Press Preview and see what you get Of course you get an uninteresting line that runs parallel to the X axis Now lets give the line some angle by typing Amplitude p 2 p 2000 Press Preview and see that the line slopes down It may still be not very interesting however pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation You cannot type Amplitude p 2p 1000 like you would normally do in your notebook You must use the multiply sign otherwise you ll get a syntax error Now we ll try to generate a simple sine waveform Try this Amplitude p sin 10 Press Preview and sorry you still get nothing on the screen The Wave Composer did not make a mistake The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows You are unable to see the result because the line on your screen running across the 0 vertical point Q REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting Now try this Amplitude p sin omg p Still no good but now press the Adjust button and here is your sinewave So what s wrong Well if you ll give it a little amplitude it might help so do it now exactly as follows Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p There you go You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points
128. to issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register The value of the unused bit 6 is always zero The Service Request Enable Register is written using the SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending SREO The generator always ignores the value of bit 6 Summary of SRE commands is given in the following Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control e Operation Complete Standard Event Status Register ESR Logical OR Queue Not Empty Standard Event Status Reaister SZ Output Queue read by Serial Poll al Status Byte Register read by STB Service Request Enable Register SRE lt value gt SRE Figure 5 6 SCPI Status Registers Astronics Test Systems 5 123 3172 User Manual Standard Event Status Register ESR 5 124 Publication Number 980949 Rev H SREO Clears all bits in the register SRE1 Not used SRE2 Not used SRE4
129. to 100 10 W2 GAUSsian EXPonent 1 to 200 10 w2 EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 10 w2 DC VOLTage 100 to 100 100 W2 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped NORM w2 TRACe DATA lt data_array gt w2 DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 w2 DELete NAME 1 to 10k w2 ALL W2 DIGital 1 W2 DATA W2 RATE 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 W2 SELect 1 to 10k 1 W2 SEGMent DATA lt data_array gt w2 5 12 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Apply Commands SOURce APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS w2 SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW w2 TRIangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW W2 SQUare FREQ AMPL OFFS DCY w2 PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WID LEE TRE w2 RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEE TRE w2 SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS CYC w2 GAUssian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP w2 EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP w2 DC DC_AMPL w2 USER SEG lt n gt SCLK AMPL OFFS w2 Sequence Commands SOURce W2 SEQuence DATA lt data_array gt w2 ADVance AUTOmatic TRIGgered STEP MIX AUTO w2 SELect 1to10 1 W2 DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt lt adv_mode_x gt lt sync_bit_x gt W2 DELete NAME 1 to 4096
130. to its factory defaults SYSTem ERRor Description Query only This query will interrogate the 3172 for programming errors Response The 3172 returns error code Error messages are listed later in this manual SYSTem VERSion Description Query only This query will interrogate the 3172 for its current firmware version The firmware version is automatically programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user except when performing firmware update 5 114 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns the current firmware version code in a format similar to the following 1 35 SYSTem INFormation CALibration Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its last calibration date Response The generator returns the last calibration date in a format similar to the following 24 Oct 2006 10 characters maximum SYSTem INFormation MODel Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its model number in a format similar to the following 3172 The model number is programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator returns its model number 3172 SYSTem INFormation SERial Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its serial number The serial number is programmed to a secure locatio
131. turned off OUTPut IMPedance 0 50 93 Description This command selects which source impedance is connected between the output amplifier and the output connector Load impedances applied to the output connector will affect the output level except when the 0 impedance option is selected WARNING Do not select 0 Q mode and short circuit the output continuously as this could damage the output amplifier Parameters Name Type Default Description 0 Discrete Selects 0 Q as the source impedance 50 Discrete 50 Selects 50 Q as the source impedance 93 Discrete Selects 93 Q as the source impedance Response The 3172 returns 0 50 or 93 depending on the source impedance setting OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt OFF ON 0 1 Description This command converts ECLTRG lines to outputs and places some signal on these lines to be used by other instruments in the chassis as synchronization signals Although the original purpose of these lines was to be used as ECL triggers to other instruments the 3172 is using these lines to synchronize clocks and start signals with other instruments in the chassis The ECLTRG lines run in parallel from slot to slot so it is not important where the receiving module is placed inside the chassis as long as the receiving instrument assigns the same lines as inputs Only two of these trigger lines are used ECLTRGO and ECLTRG1 5 24 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Para
132. turns the gate on and second turns the gate off Response The 3172 returns LEV or TRAN depending on the selected option TRIGger GATE OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the gate run mode on and off This command will affect the 3172 only after it is set to INIT CONT 0 mode Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the gate run mode off and on Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRiGger LEVel lt level gt Description The trigger level command sets the threshold level at the trigger input connector The trigger level command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 3172 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt level gt 10 to 10 Numeric 1 6 Programs the trigger level The value affects the front panel input only Note that this parameter is not available for the P2 module Response The 3172 returns the present trigger level value 5 40 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual TRIGger SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLT1 BUS Description This selects the source from where the 3172 will be stimulated to generate waveforms The source advance command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify t
133. two output channels of which each can operate independently of the other but both can also be locked out to operate in synchronized mode Each channel can output the following pulse shapes normal double and delayed Pulse polarity can be selected from normal Inverted and complemented and transitions can be defined to be fast or linear The 3172 run modes apply to the pulse output and hence the pulse can be triggered gated or generate a burst of pulse trains The pulse waveform is generated using analog circuits but the controlling circuits are digital and therefore the parameters can be programmed to a great degree of accuracy while the analog circuits guarantee for pulse stability and signal integrity All pulse parameters are controlled using dedicated remote commands however an additional input at the front panel provides an option of external control of the pulse width When selected an external signal modifies the width of the pulse when it transitions through certain threshold levels Each of the two pulse outputs has its own clock source which allows each channel to operate in an entirely different rate and mode from the other channel The P2 module has provisions to lock the two channels together so they run from a single clock source and the 3172 has provisions to run all W2 and P2 outputs from a single clock generator so that all 3172 outputs regardless of whether they are W2 or P2 channels can be synchronized to the same so
134. type On the other hand if you select the Arbitrary or Sequenced option from the Main Panel the 3172 will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below General Parameters The General Parameters group contains two parameters Amplitude and Offset The values in this group may be duplicated on other panels When you change amplitude or offset in the Parameters group the other panels are updated automatically SCLK The SCLK Sample Clock controls let you select the source of the sample clock and set the sample clock frequency The sample clock setting affects the 3172 in Arbitrary mode only It is programmed in units of samples per second S s and will affect the instrument Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual only when it is programmed to output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms The SCLK parameter has no effect on the frequency of standard waveforms The three switches in the SCLK group set the sample clock input to Internal External or ECLTO The default is Internal When you select External make sure an appropriate signal is connected to the external sample clock connector on the rear panel The ECLTO source is a backplane signal that allows ECL level signals to travel to all VXI modules Click on the SCLK button to access the SCLK parameter The value that is associated with the highlighted indicat
135. value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 mV would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned VOLTage OFFSet lt offs gt Description This command programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform The offset is calibrated when the source impedance is 50Q Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt offs gt 11to11 Numeric 0 Sets the offset of the output waveform in units of volts Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude do not exceed the specified window Response The 3172 returns the present offset value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 mV would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned VOLTage HlILevel lt high_level gt Description This command programs the amplitude high level value This value must be programmed in conjunction with the amplitude low level value Use this command to replace the amplitude offset commands The amplitude high level must be followed by the low level command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt high_level gt 19 995to Numeric 2 5 Sets the amplitude high level value Simultaneous 20 programming of the amplitude low level value is mandatory Response The 3172 returns the present high level value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 mV would be returned as 100e 3 pos
136. w2 ALL w2 SYNC TYPe LCOMplete BIT LCOM w2 Modulated Waveforms Commands SOURce MODulation w2 TYPE OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOPping OFF w2 AHOPping EXAM CARRier FREQuency 10 to 30e6 1e6 w2 BASeline CARRier DC CARR w2 Astronics Test Systems 5 13 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Modulated Waveforms Commands continued SOURce AM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN W2 INTernal FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 100 W2 DEPTh 0 to 100 50 W2 EXEcute MOD TYPE AM Ww2 FM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 30e6 100e3 W2 FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN W2 FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 W2 RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 W2 MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 30e6 1e6 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 30e6 10e3 w2 STOP 10 to 30e6 1e6 W2 RASTer 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 W2 FUNCtion SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare SIN Computed W2 TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 W2 DIRection UP DOWN UP W2 SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic LIN W2 MARKer FREQuency 10 to 30e6 505e3 W2 FSK w2 FREQuency SHIFted 10e 3 to 30e6 100e3 w2 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 W2 MARKer 1 to 4000 1 W2 DATA lt data_array
137. waveform shapes in the standard waveforms section USER Discrete Selects the arbitrary waveform shapes Arbitrary waveforms must be loaded to the 3172 memory before they can be replayed You can find information on arbitrary waveforms in the appropriate sections in this manual SEQuenced Discrete Selects the sequenced waveform output To generate a sequence you must first download waveform coordinates to different segments and then build a sequence table to generate a complex waveform that is using these segments MODulated Discrete Selects the modulated waveforms There is an array of built in modulation schemes However you can also build custom modulation schemes using the arbitrary function HALF cycle Discrete Selects the half cycle function COUNter Discrete Selects the counter timer auxiliary function Note that when you select this function all waveform generation of the 3172 is disabled and the 3172 is transformed into a stand alone counter timer Response The 3172 returns FIX USER SEQ MOD HALF or COUN depending on the present 3172 output function mode setting 5 36 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Run Mode The Run Mode Commands group is used to synchronize device Commands actions with external events These commands control the trigger modes of the waveform generator The instrument
138. with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1 5 V Function Arbitrary External AM ON Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 45 for DMM reading of 530 mV 5 mV 0 5 V Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function Range ACV 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Function Arbitrary External AM ON Amplitude 0 5 V Offset OV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 46 for DMM reading of 176 8mV 1 5 mV 150 mV Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Function Arbitrary External AM ON Amplitude 150 mV Adjustment 7 39 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 1 Adjust CAL SETup 47 for DMM reading of 53 1 mV 0 5 mV Setup 48 50 mV Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through term
139. you select the external pulse width mode Use the following command to program the trigger slope trig slop lt positive negative gt The default option is positive 3 44 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Programming Pulse Polarity Astronics Test Systems The pulse polarity parameter determines if the pulse is generated in the Normal Complemented or Inverted shape Pulse polarity can be selected in conjunction with any of the pulse modes except with external pulse width mode The three polarity modes are available for the symmetrical amplitude range only for positive and negative amplitude ranges only Normal and Complemented polarity options are available The various polarity options are shown in Figure 3 9 Normal Pulse Figure 3 9 Pulse Polarity Options As shown in this figure the complemented shape is mirrored around the horizontal axis in a way that the high level becomes low and likewise the low level becomes high In complemented mode the inversion process is symmetrical about the 50 value of the pulse amplitude In Inverted mode the normal pulse is mirrored about the O V horizontal axis positive values are converted to negative and negative values are converted to positive This mode is not available for negative and positive amplitude ranges because inverting the pulse shape would mean crossing over to ot
140. 0 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 40 for DMM reading of 176 5 mV 1 5mV Setup 41 150 mV Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 150 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 41for DMM reading of 53 1 mV 0 5 mV Setup 42 50 mV Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Impedance 50 Ohms Amplitude 100 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 42 for DMM reading of 17 68 mV 0 5 mV Astronics Test Systems 7 37 3172 User Manual Setup 43 Amplitude Adjustments External AM Setup 44 Setup 45 7 38 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 15 mV Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM
141. 0949 Rev H access to the data string that controls the sequence of base frequency and shifted frequency It contains the list of O and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its frequency shift keying sequence advance as programmed Figure 4 17 FSK PSK ASK Modulation Panel 0 1 Frequency In FSK the carrier waveform CW has two frequencies an initial frequency level which is set by the 0 frequency parameter and shifted frequency which is set by the 1 frequency The control data table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the frequency shifts from base to shifted frequency Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the FSK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the FSK marker output PSK The PSK group contains parameters that control the phase shift keying function These are control data O and 1 frequencies baud rate and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the PSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base phase and shifted phase It contains the list of O and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its phase shift keying sequence advance as programmed 0
142. 0M ALL STATe OFF ON OUTPut is the root keyword of the command FILTer and STATe are second level keywords LPASs is third level keyword A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H e The format used to show commands in this manual is shown below ommand Format Command Separator The MIN and MAX Parameters 5 2 FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability use the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms Use upper or lowercase letters Therefore FREQ FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string A value for the frequency parameter Such as FREQ 50e 6 must be specified Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower
143. 1 Phase In PSK the carrier waveform CW has two phase settings an initial phase which is set by the O Phase parameter and shifted phase which is set by the 1 Phase The control data Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the phase shifts from base to shifted phase Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the PSK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the PSK marker output To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the f H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new reading ASK The ASK group contains parameters that control the amplitude shift keying function These are control data non modulated and shifted phases and baud and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the ASK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base amplitude and shifted amp
144. 1 Period Accuracy Continuous Run Mode Tests 6 66 Table 6 52 Period Accuracy Gated Run Mode Tests 6 67 Table 6 53 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output ccc ceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeneee eee eee eeeceeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 6 67 Table 6 54 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range eee eeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaees 6 68 Table 6 55 Amplitude Accuracy Positive Hange ANNE 6 68 Table 6 56 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range cccccccccceeteeeeeeeeeteeeeenieeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaees 6 69 Table 6 57 Source Impedance Accuracy Test AANEREN 6 69 Table 6 58 Pulse Width Accuracy Tests ke 6 70 Table 6 59 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests EEN 6 71 Table 6 60 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests nnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrtrrrtrrrrrrrnrrrrrn nna 6 72 Table 6 61 Leading Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests ssesrrrrrrrrrrrtrrrrrrrrrrrtrrrrrrrrrrrrerene 6 73 Table 6 62 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests ccccceccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeecnneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 73 Table 6 63 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecnneeeeeeeeeeetenenaea 6 77 Table 6 64 Trigger Source Tess n a ate iene Waaecc een en ieee wok aicee 6 78 Table 7 1 Recommended Test Eoupment kee 7 2 Table 7 2 Calibration for W2 Module 7 10 Table 7 3 Calibration for W6 Module 7 11 Table 7 4 Calibration for P2 Module 7 16 XX Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Ma
145. 1024 Activeseg 1 Epp NZ Ka R Anchor 510 Start pts S a End pts 510 Defaut Waveform Amplitude Max 32767 Cancel Min Es OK r Wave Properties Cycles IG Start Phase 0 Power 3 Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 32 Generating Distorted Sine Waves from the Built in Library The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons The Toolbar for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 33 For the individual icons refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus Dep amp lt X fe Witt fal br S i 8 Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 1 e ZS Figure 4 33 Toolbar Icons Astronics Test Systems 4 49 3172 User Manual The Waveform Screen Publication Number 980949 Rev H Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen Figure 4 34 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform to between points 100 and 900 The various elements of the waveform graph are described below The waveform graph has two axes vertical and horizontal Both axes are divided into points The vertical axis represents 16 bits 64k levels of vertical resolution when modern mode operation is selected The horizontal axis by default has 1024 points from point O to 1023 This number
146. 10us i y O 10 00ps 100us 10us 1ys S 1 000ps 10us tys 102ns o 100s Ins 100ns 12ns S L 10ns 100ns 10ns 3ns id 2 For the following tests modify the leading and trailing edge settings to be the identical Modify the leading edge first 3 Perform the trailing edge linear transitions accuracy tests using Table 6 62 Table 6 62 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests Edge Setting Period Reading Limits Counter Reading 1000ms 10ms _ tms 100us 100 0us ims 100ps 10ys 10 00ps 100ps pel i OE 1000ps pue tps 102ns 100ns nei 100ns 12ns O L 10ns 100ns 1t0ns 3ns Astronics Test Systems 6 73 3172 User Manual External Pulse Width Mode Operation External Pulse Width Operation Tests Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the operation of the external pulse width mode This mode is particularly useful for reconstructing pulses from a week signal Period and pulse width are derived from the trigger level and slope settings The controlling signal is applied to the rear panel TRIG IN connector When the signal crosses the trigger threshold it generates a pulse of which its width is determined by the inverse transition of the signal Positive and negative slope settings determine if the width is derived from the positive trigger level crossing or the negative trigger level crossing To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modi
147. 1808 Calibration Date 09 Apr 2017 3 Installed Options 252 Firmware Revision E Click the Store button Store i Then click the Close button Figure 7 15 Confirmation for Locking Calibration Factors Astronics Test Systems 7 17 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3 Click the Store button Since the computer screen gives no visual response to the store operation you may wish to get a visual indication by observing a brief flash of the front panel Link indicator as you click the Store button 4 Click the Close button 5 Exit the AroConnection software by clicking the X in the upper right hand corner of the main window This completes the calibration procedure 7 18 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Factory Calibration Warm up Procedure W2 Module Factory calibration is performed with the 3172 installed in a VXlbus chassis Either a register based or message based controller may be used and the procedure is the same for both options The ArbConnection software application must be installed and interfaced to the instrument Some calibration steps require removal of the right side panel cover To keep the internal temperature stable leave the cover on except while making adjustments that require its removal To facilitate removal while the unit is in the VXI chassis remove all except two screws before in
148. 2 Function and Parameters Astronics Test Systems of System Delay in Appendix A Therefore when delaying the trigger always consider the added factor of the system delay Use the following command to turn on trigger delay and to program the delay time value trig del stat 1 This command turns on the trigger delay function When turned on the minimum delay time is 100 ns plus system delay trig de stat 0 This command turns off the trigger delay function When turned off the minimum delay time is equal to the system delay trig del tim lt value gt This sets the delay in units of time an alternative to the legacy compatible method above which uses units of sample clock points You may set the delay time in the range of 200 ns to 20 seconds in increments of 20 ns The 3172 is programmable to drive or receive triggers on the VXlbus backplane trigger lines TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 It is important to manage the trigger lines so that only one VXI instrument drives any given line The signals through the TTLTrg lines are always TTL Use the following commands to program the backplane trigger lines outp ttit lt n gt 1 This command defines a specific TTLTrg line as an output The SYNC signal is then applied to the active TTLTrg output and the front panel SYNC OUT connector The argument lt n gt designates the required TTLTrg line and can take values from 0 through 7 outp ttit lt n gt 0 This command removes the o
149. 2 waveform memory into segments and use each segment to contain a separate waveform This is useful in applications that require multiple waveforms and can benefit from changing quickly from one waveform to another The memory can be partitioned into as many as 16k segments with up to 16 384 different waveforms but the higher the number of segments the smaller the number of sample points that are available to each Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual DU SI le ave DOWN 3 At t D GG RH amp ee Ae E Gen fe bi S s Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 1 e E R Anchor 1023 ual Anchor gt Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts 10 Max 32767 Cycles Auto_Scaling Preview End pts 1023 Min 32768 h C Original Scale Defaut Equation m History Cancel Amplitude p Inset Wave Clear Open Save Earca OK 32000 sinfoma p 1 O e p 250 Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 3 1 ArbConnection Example of a Complex Waveform Creating Memory Segments Memory Management Segments are defined using the following command Commands trac det 1 2000 Defines segment 1 as having 2 000 sample points Any waveform downloaded to this segment must have exactly 2 000 data points This command has two variables segment number and segment size Note that numbers not names are
150. 3172 will stop generating these waveforms will revert to the standard exponential waveform and will update the exponential parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard exponential 30e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard exponential 22 waveform in units of volts lt offs gt 11to11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard exponential waveform in units of volts lt exp gt 100 to Integer 100 Programs the exponent of the standard exponential 100 waveform Astronics Test Systems 5 63 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset and exponent settings similar to the following example 1 6 5 0 100 APPLy DC lt ampl gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard dc and programs the amplitude simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate modulated waveforms the 3172 will stop generating these waveforms will revert to the standard dc waveform and will update the dc parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dc_ampl gt 100 to Numeric 100 Programs the amplitude of the standard dc waveform in 100 units of percent Response
151. 4 PG2 OUT J2 A5 EXT WID sensitive so that crossing a predetermined signal level will gate one of the outputs The polarity of the gate is programmable The input is a TTL level signal and is pulled up to 5 V through a 4 7 kQ resistor The TRIG IN connector accepts trigger events that stimulate the generation of output waveforms It can be programmed to stimulate either channel 1 or channel 2 The P2 module ignores this input when operating in Continuous mode When placed in Trigger or Burst mode the trigger input is made active and the P2 input waits for the proper event to trigger the instrument In Trigger and Burst modes the TRIG input is edge sensitive so that a signal transition will trigger one of the P2 outputs The output waveform is triggered when the TRIG signal voltage transitions through a threshold voltage The input is a TTL level signal and is pulled up to 5 V through a 4 7 kQ resistor The CLOCK OUT connector outputs a fixed level TTL signal capable of driving a 50 Q load The signal is derived directly from either channel 1 or from channel 2 periods The main output coax pin J2 A5 provides a path for channel 2 pulse waveforms The source impedance of this output is selectable from lt 2 Q 50 Q or 93 Q The cable connected to this output should be terminated with a 50 Q or 93 Q resistance The output amplitude is specified when connected to a 50 Q load If the output is connected to a different load resista
152. 4 MHz Min Freq 2 MHz Test Results Pass Fail 6 40 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual PSK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Amplitude 1 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Reset Waveform Modulated Modulation PSK Carrier Freq 10 kHz Shift Phase 180 Baud Rate 10 kHz Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step PSK list with alternating 0 and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify PSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sinewave Period 0 1 ms Phase Every 0 1 ms change 180 degrees Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 41 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H ASK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Amplitude 1 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Reset Waveform Modulated Modulation ASK Carrier Freq 10 kHz Base Amplitude 4 V Shift Amplitude 2 V Baud Rate 10 kHz Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare a
153. 4 and verify that the P2 generates a pulses every 10 us with every matched output trigger and source settings Table 6 64 Trigger Source Tests Auxiliary 3172 P2 Trigger Oscilloscope Trigger Output Setting Source Setting Reading Pass Fail TTLTO OFF TTLT1 ON TTLT1 10 us trig intervals TTLT1 OFF TTLT2 ON TTLT2 10 us trig intervals TTLT2 OFF TTLT3 ON TTLT3 10 us trig intervals TTLT3 OFF TTLT4 ON TTLT4 10 us trig intervals TTLT4 OFF TTLT5 ON TTLT5 10 us trig intervals TTLT5 OFF TTLT6 ON TTLT6 10 us trig intervals TTLT6 OFF TTLT7 ON TTLT7 10 us trig intervals Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Backplane Trigger Output Source Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary 3172 in an adjacent slot Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 20 dB feed through attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Output On Trigger Source TTLO 3 Configure the auxiliary 3172 as follows Frequency 2 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Trigger Input TTLO Output On 4 Connect the auxiliary 3172 output to the oscilloscope input Test Procedure 1 Setup the P2 trigger output source as specified in Table 6 64 and verify that the auxiliary 3172 generates a periodical single cycle 2 MHz sine with interval 1 us Test Results
154. 60 9 5 9 540 25 VDC 1 005 1 0 995 26 VDC 2 510 2 5 2 490 27 VDC 4 020 4 3 980 28 VDC 5 525 5 5 5 475 29 VDC 7 035 7 6 965 30 VDC 8 540 8 5 8 460 31 VDC 9 540 9 5 9 460 Set DMM function to Volts AC 59 VAC 3 8541 3 8891 3 9241 32 VAC 3 8541 3 8891 3 9241 52 VAC 2 4549 2 4749 2 4949 53 VAC 1 3992 1 4142 1 4292 33 VAC 1 1921 1 2021 1 2121 54 VAC 0 41926 0 42426 0 42926 34 VAC 0 34855 0 35355 0 35855 55 VAC 0 13992 0 14142 0 14292 35 VAC 0 10507 0 10607 0 10707 56 VAC 0 041926 0 042426 0 042926 36 VAC 0 034855 0 035355 0 035855 57 VAC 0 013642 0 014142 0 014642 37 VAC 0 010107 0 010607 0 011107 58 VAC 0 001621 0 002121 0 002621 38 VAC 1 7528 1 7678 1 7828 39 VAC 0 52533 0 53033 0 53533 40 VAC 0 17528 0 17678 0 17828 41 VAC 0 052533 0 053033 0 053533 Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual 7 12 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Item in DMM Low Limit Target High Limit Cal Panel Function Volts Volts Volts Adjust Pot 42 VAC 0 017178 0 017678 0 018178 43 VAC 0 004803 0 005303 0 005803 44 VAC 1 7528 1 7678 1 7828 45 VAC 0 52533 0 53033 0 53533 46 VAC 0 17528 0 17678 0 17828 47 VAC 0 052533 0 053033 0 053533 48 VAC 0 017178 0 017678 0 018178 49 VAC 0 004803 0 005303 0 005803 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This procedure calibrates the P2 pulse generator module Each P2 Pulse Generator modu
155. 65 535 counts The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in any order For a simple example of a sequenced waveform see Figures 1 9 through 1 12 The waveforms in Figures 1 9 through 1 11 are placed in memory segments 1 2 and 3 respectively The sequence generator links and loops these waveforms in a predefined order to generate the waveform shown in Figure 1 12 The sequence circuit is useful for generating long waveforms with repeated sections Although the waveform only needs to be programmed once the sequencer loops on this segment as many times as selected When in sequenced mode there is no time delay between linked or looped segments Figure 1 9 Segment 1 Sine x x Waveform 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Figure 1 10 Segment 2 Sine Waveform Figure 1 11 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform The following sequence was made of segment 2 repeated twice segment 1 repeated four times and segment 3 repeated two times Figure 1 12 Sequenced Waveforms 1 20 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual W2 Modulated Waveforms Sweep FM AM Astronics Test Systems The use of direct digital synthesis DDS technology gives the W2 frequency agility During operations such as sweep FSK FM and other modulation modes the W2 quickly synthesizes the modulated waveform using the DDS c
156. 7 A5 TTLTRGO 7 TTL Pulse with Arbitrary and Standard Waves LCOM in Sequence and Burst Modes including Burst Modulation Marker with Modulation Mode only programmable position 4 to 64 waveform points Point 0 to maximum segment size programmable with 4 point resolution Filters can be switched in and out freely except in standard waveform shape where the filters are automatically used by the instrument to reconstruct the sine shape 2 MHz Bessel 25 MHz Bessel 60 MHz Elliptic 120 MHz Elliptic Asynchronous timer generates triggers repeatedly 1 us to 20s External trigger input is enabled Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A3 10 KQ 10 V 10 mV 200 mVrms 30 Vrms DC to 5 MHz Positive Negative transitions selectable 2 10 ns Trigger commands from a remote controller only TTLTRGO 7 inputs or outputs programmable Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H waveform output Trigger Delay Trigger input to waveform output Resolution Error Re trigger Delay Waveform end to waveform restart Resolution Error Trigger Jitter Burst Counter PLL Characteristics Description PLL Input Characteristics External Lock Frequency Range Phase Control Fine Phase Control Accuracy PM Characteristics Description PM Input Bandwidth External Lock Frequency Range PM Input Connector Impedance Sensitivity Range PM Accuracy Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual 6 samp
157. 72 W2W2 for example is a message based product Table 5 2 lists all of the 3172 SCPI commands that represent full functionality of the instrument Note that there are some commands that pertain to W2 modules only and some only to P2 modules Table 5 2 separates and associates the commands that control the different modules The W2 designation implies that these commands apply to the arbitrary waveform generator and the P2 designation implies that the pulse generator can be programmed When W2 and P2 are listed W2 P2 both the arbitrary waveform generator and the pulse generator could be affected depending on the selected output channel 3172 in the association column implies that the command affects the entire system regardless of whether W2 or P2 modules are installed 5 9 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 2 3172 SCPI Command List Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Instrument Control Commands INSTrument SELect 1 2 3 4 1 W2 P2 COUPIe MODE MASTer SLAVe MAST W2W2 DELay 0 to 20 0 W2W2 PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS ADJ W2W2 SLAVe DELete lt LAN_IP_address gt 3172 INSert lt 3172 gt lt LAN_IP_address gt 3172 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 FORMat MODern LEGacy MOD 3172 Run Mode Commands INITiate MMediately CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 1 W2 P2 TRIGger IMMedi
158. 8 bit words before it can be used by the 3172 as sequence table data Figure 5 5 shows how to prepare the 64 bit word for the sequence step repeat and mixed mode flag There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 66 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 1 Each channel has its own sequence table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download sequence table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of sequencer steps is 1 maximum number is 4096 3 The number of bytes in a complete sequence table must divide by 8 The 3172 has no control over data sent to its sequence table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous sequence partition 4 The LSB bit is the only bit used in the mode byte This bit has an effect on the operation of the sequence only when Mixed Step Advance mode is active With the LSB bit set to 0 the sequence generator will advance to the next step automatically With the LSB bit set to 1 the sequence generator will advance to the next step only when a valid trigger signal is sensed at the trigger input 5 SYNC state bit is valid only when the sequence sync type is BIT 0 REPEAT GL Tt 4 LONG TRUNCATE 16 13 D SEGMENT NUMBER xX 1 ween TRUNCATE 7 1 D SYNC STATE x ECH BYTE TRUNCATE 7 1
159. 9 Numeric integer 0 Programs the power coefficient of the standard triangle only waveform Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset phase and power coefficient settings similar to the following example 1 e6 5 0 0 1 APPLy SQUare lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt dcycle gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard square and programs the frequency amplitude offset duty cycle simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate FM the 3172 will stop generating FM will revert to the standard square waveform and will update the square parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard square 30e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard square 22 waveform in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard square waveform in units of volts lt dcycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Programs the duty cycle of the standard square waveform in units of percent Response 5 60 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 50 APPLy PULSe lt freq gt lt ampl gt
160. AE 6 29 Table 6 32 PLL Tests PM Phase Offset 6 30 Table 6 33 Modulation Depth External AM Tests 6 39 Table 6 34 Frequency Measurement ACGcuracy ENEE 6 47 Table 6 35 Period Measurement Accuracy cece eceetere rete eee eeeecneeeeeeeeeeeteenecanieeeeeeeeeeennee 6 48 Table 6 36 Pulse Width Measurement ACcuracy 6 49 Table 6 37 Period Accuracy Continuous Run Mode Tests 6 51 Table 6 38 Period Accuracy Gated Run Mode Tests AA 6 52 Table 6 39 Amplitude Accuracy DAC oufput cece tree ee eeeene nett terre tecenaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaae 6 52 Table 6 40 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Hange 6 53 Table 6 41 Amplitude Accuracy Positive Hamge 6 53 Table 6 42 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range ccccceccceeceeeecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaees 6 54 Table 6 43 Source Impedance Accuracy Test AEN 6 54 Table 6 44 Pulse Width Accuracy Tests ANEN 6 55 Table 6 45 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests ENNEN 6 56 Table 6 46 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests nnnnnnnnnennnnntttttttttttttrrrrrrrrrrnnn nena 6 57 Table 6 47 Leading Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 6 58 Table 6 48 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests 0 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 6 58 Table 6 49 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests 0 cceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 6 62 Table 6 50 Trigger Source E 6 63 Table 6 5
161. AlsTRONICS TEST SYSTEMS Racal Instruments 3172 VXlbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator and Dual Pulse Generator User Manual Includes various 3172 configurations Publication No 980949 Rev H Astronics Test Systems Inc 4 Goodyear Irvine CA 92618 Tel 800 722 2528 949 859 8999 Fax 949 859 7139 atsinfo astronics com atssales astronics com atshelpdesk asironics com _http www astronicstestsystems com Copyright 2010 by Astronics Test Systems Inc Printed in the United States of America All rights reserved This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher THANK YOU FOR PURCHASING THIS ASTRONICS TEST SYSTEMS PRODUCT For this product or any other Astronics Test Systems product that incorporates software drivers you may access our web site to verify and or download the latest driver versions The web address for driver downloads is http www astronicstestsystems com support downloads If you have any questions about software driver downloads or our privacy policy please contact us at atsinfo astronics com WARRANTY STATEMENT All Astronics Test Systems products are designed to exacting standards and manufactured in full compliance to our AS9100 Quality Management System processes This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from any modification s of any product or part without Astronics Test Systems express written consent or misuse of an
162. Amplitude Level Adjuster Ei Dei ie De NM amp Ss ES ft Start pts fo Max 32767 p I Auto_Scaling Preview Min 32768 aaia ogey EE L Anchor 0 End ats ma 1 SES ao Se Amplitude p Insert Wave 7 Open on Cancel E s l i f 2000 sinfoma p cos omg p 30 V M Aliases gt gt 1 wm MH il i i l A i MI II Wi i nil H NW I Ul H il Du IW Vertical Scale 64KPts BkPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 37 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms In the following example 20 second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave The original waveform had a peak to peak value of 24000 points so 19 second harmonic is equivalent to 4500 points The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental so term 4500 sin 2 omg p is added to the original sine wave equation Use the following equation Amplitude p 24000 sin omg p 4500 sine 2 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 38 Astronics Test Systems 4 57 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 4 58 Equation Editor x Anchor nr Waveform Amplitude Level djuster Start pts 0 Max 32767 Cycles Manual Original End pts 1023 Min 32768 fi C Auto Defaut Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Des
163. Ce lt label gt lt file_name gt 3172 System Commands RESet W2 P2 SYSTem ERRor W2 P2 VERSion 3172 INFOrmation CALibration 3172 MODel 3172 SERial 3172 SMEMory MODe READ WRITe WRIT W2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 TEST ALL 3172 CLS 3172 ESE 1 to 255 1 3172 OPC 3172 RST 3172 SRE 1 to 255 1 3172 TRG 3172 ESE 3172 ESR 3172 IDN 3172 OPC 3172 OPT 3172 STB 3172 TST 3172 Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Instrument amp This group is used to control the state amplitude and offset settings of a channel as well as the waveform mode You can also synchronize Output Control multiple instruments and program phase offsets between adjacent Commands channels The output frequency and the reference source are also selected using commands from this group Table 5 3 summarizes the Instrument and Output Control Commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association INSTrument SELect 1 2 3 4 1 W2 P2 COUPle MODE MASTer SLAVe MAST 3172 W2W2 only DELay 0 to 20 0 3172 W2W2 only PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS ADJ 3172 W2W2 only SLAVe
164. Continuous mode and automatically starts generating waveforms which appear at the output connector as the output relay is turned on Use init cont on to return to Continuous mode from any interrupted mode In Triggered mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a trigger event initiates a single output cycle see Selecting the Trigger Source for details about trigger parameters Each time a transition occurs at the trigger input the 3172 generates one complete output cycle At the end of the waveform cycle the output assumes a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the first point of the waveform If you have not invoked any interrupted modes since applying power to the 3172 you may use the following command to turn off Continuous mode and default to Triggered mode init cont off Turns off Continuous mode changing to an interrupted mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will default to Triggered mode If you have used other interrupted modes since power up then send the following command sequence to guarantee a change to Triggered mode init cont off Turns Continuous mode off in case this was the most recent run mode trig retr off Turns Retriggered mode off in case this was the most recent interrupted run mode trig gated off Turns Gated mode off in case this was the most recent interrupted run mode trig burs off Turns Burst mode off in case t
165. Cumulative Interval Time D 1 1 Index Level 1 2 2 3 3 1 4 4 1 5 5 1 6 Figure 4 50 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example 4 73 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Example The first pulse section is complete We are ready now to start Section 2 building the second section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 51 Use the Pulse Composer s Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values in this section note that there are linear transitions required for this section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format group You are now ready to start programming values If you try to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will display a warning box alerting you that the design format can only be changed for an empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in the figure ll x ols Heip D Ge NM a amp m ew Ful Train DI SZ om GHe W Pulse Editor Section 2 lt Points gt Pulse Train Design Format H DC Intervals Time Level Points eh Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo m Section Properties Des
166. DEF command The one step method is slow and tedious however it allows better control for one who just begins his first sequence programming Advanced users can download a complete sequence table using the binary sequence download option The later being much faster for applications requiring large sequence tables Use the information below to understand sequence commands and how to implement them in your application Astronics Test Systems 5 65 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 8 Sequence Control Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURce SEQuence DATA lt data_array gt W2 ADVance AUTOmatic TRIGgered STEP MIX AUTO W2 SELect 1to10 1 W2 DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt lt adv_mode_x gt lt sync_bit_x gt W2 DELete NAME 1 to 4096 W2 ALL W2 SYNC TYPe LCOMplete BIT LCOM W2 SEQuence lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This command will build a complete sequence table in one binary download In this way there is no need to define and download individual sequencer steps Using this command sequence table data is loaded to the 3172 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for lo
167. DELete lt LAN_IP_address gt 3172 INSert lt 3172 gt lt LAN_IP_address gt 3172 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 FORMat MODern LEGacy MOD 3172 OUTPut AMODulation OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 IMPedance 0 50 93 50 W2 P2 ECLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0to1 We P2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 W2 P2 Ell Ter LPASs FREQuency 2MHz 25MHz 6OMHz 120 MHz 25MHz W2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 W2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 SYNC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 POSition POINt 0 to 1e6 1 0 W2 SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc PULSe ZEROcross BIT W2 WIDTh 4 to n 8 4 W2 TRIGger SOURce BIT LCOMPlete INTernal EXTernal BIT W2 P2 TTLTrg O0to7 0 W2 P2 SOURce 1 2 3 4 1 3172 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 W2 P2 5 18 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 INT W2 P2 FREQuency EXTernal SOURce INTernal ADJacent RASTer LBUS INT P2 CW 10e 3 to 30e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 W2 RASTer 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 W2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrgO LBUS INT W2 VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 5e 3 to 20 MINimum MAXimum 1 2 range We2 P2 OFFSet 10 to 10 Centered for range W2 P2 Hi evel 19 995 to 20 2 5 P2
168. DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 8 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 30 for DMM reading of 8 5 V 40 mV 9 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 9 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 31 for DMM reading of 9 5 V 40 mV The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude accuracy is an issue 5 V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 7 33 3172 User Manual Setup 33 Setup 34 Setup 35 7 34 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Adjustment 1 Adjus
169. Discrete Will prepare the shared memory to place data on the backplane data bus Data will not be shared before this function is turned on using smem 1 Response The 3172 returns WRIT or READ depending on the selected shared memory setting SMEMory OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to toggle the shared memory function on and off Use smem mode writ to prepare the instrument for DMA data load from the backplane data bus Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 1 Toggles the shared memory function on and off When place in on position the instrument cannot accept normal data until the data transfer has been completed Programming examples are given in the driver code Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the present shared memory setting TEST Description Use this command to test the functionality of the 3172 Bear in mind that this test does not replace the performance checks but comes to provide basic confidence that the instrument operates and responds correctly to basic commands and functions Response The 3172 returns 0 when no error is detected Non zero response implies problems in one or more of the tested circuits that requires further investigation by a qualified test engineer 5 116 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual a Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar IEEE STD 488 2 commands that perform similar functio
170. ECLTrg1 BUS EXT We P2 ADJcent SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS W2 P2 RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 TIMe 100e 9 to 20 100 9 w2 TlMer 1e 6 to 20 15e 6 W2 Astronics Test Systems 5 37 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H INITiate CONTinuous 1 0 ON OFF Description This command sets the output in continuous operation and interrupted operation The run mode commands will affect the 3172 only after it will be set to interrupted operation Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 0 Discrete 1 1 selects the continuous run mode 0 selects the interrupted run mode While in this switch option you can program the 3172 to operate in triggered gated or counted burst run modes Response The 3172 returns 1 or 0 depending on the selected option TRIGger Description Use this command to trigger the 3172 from a remote computer You may also use the common command trg which has the same effect This command will affect the 3172 after you program the instrument to operate in an interrupted run mode init cont 0 and only when you select the trigger source to be BUS Response The 3172 will respond to a remote trig command depending on the selected mode and function TRIGger BURSt OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the counted burst run mode on and off This command will affect the 3172 only after it will be set to INIT CONT 0 Parameters Range Type Default
171. EEN 5 5 Legacy vs Modern Command Sat oesgeg eet el alae ance ead eee 5 5 3172 Legacy OMIM aN EE 5 6 3172R 3172 COMMA ates atl ecce trots tale cath veal cate Gah Pelee Go ace a dea telat coe cab ca MS 5 9 Instrument amp Output Control CommandS eegene Seegen Ee 5 18 Ruin Mode Commande eegen ere Eege eene EE ue Eege 5 37 Standard Waveforms Control Commande AAA 5 44 Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands W2 Module On 5 51 The Apply Control Commands W2 Module Only ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeenees 5 57 Using the Apply Command on ciccicieiuicestoncanpeswediawenyhetticerdd murepienecey hl tauet chen ed oad ede aed 5 57 Sequenced Waveform Control Commands W2 Modules On 5 65 Modulated Waveform Global Control Commands W2 Module On 5 71 Modulation Control Commands W2 Module On 5 73 AM Progra MMiNg ege Eed a NEE cence eadleseehicchtees ee 5 75 FM Modulation Programming tege een Ge See we ees 5 76 Sweep Modulation Programming BEE 5 79 FSK Modulation Programming sisi seeieiscthtceseiradetesnacceteethiain als thin eelaie ead 5 83 ASK Modulation Programming EE 5 84 PSK Modulation Programming E 5 86 Frequency Hopping Modulation Programming Au 5 89 Amplitude Hopping Modulation Progorammimg 5 91 Pulse Waveform Commands P2 Module On 5 94 Half Cycle Control Commands W2 Module Onhy 5 98 Counter Control Commands W2 Module Om 5 101 Power Amplifier Control Commands A3 Module On 5 103 Sy
172. EERSTEN LEE lee CEET EECH EE 20 Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H EE S ee e e as ede ees Ae a Ne 1 14 PPB OU KEE 1 15 JISAT scan eee eee OS a Magna pepe Banik nena Pee OS ee ee ae ee he 1 15 OL TIN WEE 1 15 Eh eege 1 15 Ted Kale 1 15 PZ Front Panel Connectors gaer eege eebe eege eege 1 16 POU EE 1 16 EK E EE 1 16 RST TEN RE 1 16 eee EE ti ce ees OS hh hice ake ate BS agin bated Sick ade are 1 16 TRIGIN RE 1 17 Eed meh acne aes cated aces R eee 1 17 eier EE 1 17 CL PA cies das nate aren cat naa n aaee errr Er n iS 1 17 Pe Eegeregie 1 17 Fo E E PERCE TRE an OE E EI Ore EE 1 17 GA RT EE 1 17 O tp t WN AVL ONS ee Eed Eens 1 17 W2 Standard FIXED WaveformS isi iiessessicesitectecaseecues fteencel saseueesitaenceteestaaeuease ENgeEeeNE 1 18 W2 Arbitrary User EE eersten ge ee See Greet See 1 18 W2 Sequenced WaveformS EE 1 19 W2 Modulated Waveforms eege EECHER eeg eg 1 21 SWC Cie oe eh eeh A ee i a eee eee 1 21 I esate ek sat TIENE ait i a fa spa ee 1 21 LEE EE 1 21 Frequency Hopping cece Geen e eege EE 1 22 Amplitude Tel ele e EE 1 22 SE 1 22 Pisa cae Bh se rest en anise erect ih eee eG aetna ee BU ge Satan ene anne dana One Daa Ree Sean Reena Seba ee 1 22 PSK Egeter oy cea de eens wa de lees be EEEa tees sale ten E ea ae Geeta ca tte be Re eatin 1 22 W2 Half Cycle WaveformS EE 1 22 W2 Counter EE 1 23 P2 POISE e 1 23 General RUM Modes cissccets cea e e A E E E ee 1 23 Co
173. EQuency SOURce INTernal ADJacent RASTer LBUS INT P2 EXTernal W2 CW 10e 3 to 30e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 W2 RASTer 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 W2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrgO LBUS INT W2 VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 5e 3 to 20 MINimum MAXimum 1 2 range W2 P2 OFFSet 10 to 10 Centered for range W2 P2 HILevel 19 995 to 20 2 5 P2 LOLevel 20 to 19 995 2 5 P2 RANGe SYMMetrical POSitive NEGative SYMM We P2 PHASe OFFSet 0 to 1e6 1 0 W2 FUNCtion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence MODulation HALFcycle FIX W2 COUNter Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Publication Number 980949 Rev H Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Standard Waveforms Commands SOURCce SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN W2 GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 W2 POWer 1to9 1 w2 TRIangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 W2 POWer 1to9 1 W2 SQUare DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 W2 PULSe D I aw 0 to 99 999 10 w2 WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 W2 TRANsSsition LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 W2 TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 W2 RAMP DELay 0 to 99 99 10 w2 TRANsSsition LEADing 0 to 99 99 10 W2 TRAiling 0 to 99 99 10 W2 SINC NCYCle 4
174. Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading MF _6 0 6 Divisions LI 10 MHz _6 0 6 Divisions J 20MHWz 641 8 Divisions LI L 30MHz 641 8Divisions 3 Change amplitude to 10V and adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display Perform sine wave flatness DDS waveforms tests using Table 6 22 Astronics Test Systems 6 13 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 6 22 Sinewave Flatness Test DDS Output Continued W2 Sine Frequency Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading LNS _6 0 6 Divisions 10MHWz 60 6 Divisions 20MHz 641 8 Divisions L 30MHz 641 8Divisions LI This tests the accuracy of the source impedance The W2 has three Source Impedance source impedances that can be used lt 2 Q 50 Q and 93 Q The Characteristics usage of the source impedance depends on the characteristics of the load impedance Regardless of the source impedance the W2 is of driving its full output swing into minimum of 50 Q Test the accuracy of the source impedance if you suspect that this is a problem with the output levels at different source impedance settings Source Impedance Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV Range 2V 2 Connect W2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform
175. FM for generating arbitrary frequency modulation profiles without being limited by the standard sine triangle and square modulating shapes and 3D for generating chirps and simultaneous variations of amplitude frequency and phase on each channel separately gt Operation gt Modulation gt Auxiliary e Composers Wave Pulse FM 3D Serial Data Figure 4 28 Composers Panel Because the 3172 is an arbitrary waveform generator it has to be loaded with waveform data before it can start generating waveforms The waveform generation and editing utility is part of ArbConnection and is called the Wave Composer This program gives you tools for the definition of arbitrary waveforms It can also convert waveform data from other products such as oscilloscopes and use the data directly as waveforms The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create edit and download waveforms to the 3172 using the Wave Composer To launch the Wave Composer point and click on the Wave tab in the Composers section of the Panels bar Figure 4 29 shows an example of the wave composer The Wave Composer has three main sections the Menu bar Toolbar and Waveform graph Refer to Figure 4 29 throughout the description of these sections Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The Wave Composer The Wave Composer menu bar provides access to
176. H Fix Dwell Time Equipment Oscilloscope Frequency Hops Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 1 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Hop Hop Mode Fix Dwell Time 50 us Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare open the Hop Table composer and download the following table Pon Frequency 1 0e6 1 2e6 1 4e6 1 6e6 1 8e6 2 0e6 2 2e6 2 4e6 2 6e6 2 8e6 Test Procedure 1 Verify Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Frequency steps fixed dwell time of 50 us Max A 2 8 MHz Min A 1 0 MHz Period 500 us Test Results Pass Fail 6 44 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Amplitude Hops Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 50 us Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 5 V div Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Amplitude Hops Hop Mode Fix Dwell Time
177. M input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 8 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 8 5 V 40 mV 9 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 9 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 9 5 V 40 mV Amplitude The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the Adiustments specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude J accuracy is an issue Setup 45 5 V Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 5V Period 1 ms Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 45 for a DMM reading of 2 5 V 15 mV Setup 46 1 5 V Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as fol
178. MM input Function ACV Range 20 V 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Period 1 ms Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform source impedance checks using Table 43 Table 6 43 Source Impedance Accuracy Test 2 500 30 mV 2 500 100 mV 1 748 100 mV 6 54 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Width Accuracy Pulse Width Accuracy Tests This tests the accuracy of the pulse width To eliminate counter threshold hysteresis problems the tests are performed with the fastest transitions only and at ranges that will not be effected by counter errors To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Equipment Counter timer Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Pulse Width Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Period 100 ms Output On Pulse Width As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform pulse width accuracy tests using Table 6 44 Table 6 44 Pulse Width Accuracy Tests P2 Pulse Width Setting Error Limits Counter Reading 10 00000 ms annuel 1 000000 ms 30 0us 100 000 us 3 00us y 10 000 u
179. Main Output signal All standard and arbitrary waveforms can be modulated using this input Amplitude modulation depth is programmable from 0 to 100 The AM input is active only after selecting the External AM option The external Phase Modulation coax input provides the capability to externally modulate the phase of the Main Output signal The PM input is enabled only when the instrument is placed in PLL operating mode Phase can be adjusted from 130 to 130 using an amplitude swing of 20 Vp p 3172 User Manual TRIG IN J1 A3 10 MHz REF IN J1 A4 SYNC OUT J1 A5 SCLK IN J1 A6 1 14 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The TRIG IN connector accepts signals that stimulate the generation of output waveforms The W2 ignores this input when operating in Continuous mode When placed in Trigger Gated or Burst mode the trigger input is active and the W2 waits for the proper condition to trigger the instrument In Trigger and Burst modes the TRIG input is edge sensitive so that a signal transition will trigger the W2 The direction of the transition is programmable In gated mode the TRIG signal is level sensitive The output waveform is enabled when the TRIG signal voltage is beyond a threshold voltage The threshold voltage and direction are programmable within the range of 10 V to 10 V When the PLL function is selected this input feeds the reference signal to the PLL circuit The PLL input must be stable and r
180. ON position Astronics Test Systems ships the 3172 with the logical address set to 2 as shown in Figure 2 1 HIE Figure 2 1 Switch S1 Set to Logical Address 2 3172 User Manual Local Bus Configuration 2 2 Publication Number 980949 Rev H A 3172 can synchronize phase lock with other 3172 modules installed in the same VXI chassis One of the synchronization methods uses the VXI Local Bus lines LBUSO LBUS7 The Local Bus has advantages of high bandwidth and the capability to synchronize any quantity of modules in the same chassis To use the Local Bus the modules to be synchronized must be configured as instructed below and must be operated in Modern Mode not Legacy Mode NOTE Originally configuration of Model 3172 for Local Bus operation was performed at the factory In September 2013 a feature was added to allow the user to configure the 3172 If you need to configure a 3172 module for Local Bus operation and it does not have the side panel access openings shown in Figure 2 2 contact Customer Support Contact information is provided in the Warranty Statement at the front of this manual When synchronizing phase locking a group of modules they must be installed in a contiguous group of slots in the VXlbus chassis The reference module master that the others will synchronize to must be immediately to the left of the other modules slaves in the group To enable use of the Local Bus
181. OOTp OFF ON 0 1 0 3172 HOSTname lt host_name gt 3172 KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 3172 TIMEout 2 to 300 45 3172 PROBes 2 to 10 2 3172 SYSTem IP mp adrs gt Description This command programs the IP address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt ip_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the IP address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current IP address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3172 returns the present IP address value similar to the following 192 168 0 6 5 110 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual SYSTem IP MASK lt mask_adrs gt Description This command programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt mask_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current subnet mask address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3172 returns the present IP address value similar to the following 255 255 255 0 SYSTem IP BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to toggle BOOTp mode on and off Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Di
182. P2 DCYCle 1 to 99 50 P2 DELay Oto 10 0 P2 DOUBle DELay 0 to 10 200e 6 P2 POLarity NORMal COMPlement INVerted NORM P2 TRANSsition STATe FAST LINear SYMMetrical FAST P2 LEADing 10e 9 to 5e 3 10e 6 P2 TRAiling 10e 9 to 5e 3 10e 6 P2 Half Cycle Commands HALFcycle DELay 200e 9 to 20 1e 6 w2 DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 w2 FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 1e6 w2 PHASe 0 to 360 0 w2 SHAPe SINusoid TRIangle SQUare SIN w2 Counter Commands COUNter FUNCtion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe TOTalize FREQ w2 DISPlay MODE NORMal HOLD NORM w2 GATE TIME 100e 6 to 1 1 w2 RESet w2 READ w2 Power Amplifier Commands OUTPut AMPLifier AUTO HIGH LOW AUTO A3 POWer OFF ON 0 1 0 A3 5 16 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued 3172 User Manual Keyword Parameter Form Default Association LAN Configuration Commands SYSTem IP ADDRess lt IP_address gt 3172 MASK lt mask gt 3172 GATeway lt gate_way gt 3172 BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 0 3172 HOSTname lt host_name gt 3172 KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 3172 TIMEout 2 to 300 45 3172 PROBes 2 to 10 2 3172 USB Mass Memory Commands MMEMory CATalog 3172 CDIRectory lt directory_name gt 3172 DELete lt file_name gt 3172 LOAD TRA
183. PI commands need to be directed to a DLL instead of to the VISA library In either case you may use SCPI Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Connecting toa LAN Network commands through ArbConnection s command editor without programming Chapter 4 provides installation and operating instructions for ArbConnection The 3172 has a front panel connector that allows connection to a local area network system This LAN port has three purposes Download waveform data directly from an external computer without using the VXlbus controller Control the 3172 in a system that does not have a VXlbus slot 0 controller Use Ethernet to control VXlbus modules adjacent to the 3172 using VXIbus local bus lines for modules designed to interface with the 3172 in this way The programming section of this manual lists the default settings Additional descriptions of LAN settings are given below Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device is also possible but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines crossed If your site is already wired connect the 3172 via twisted pair Ethernet cable Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10 100 BaseT network use phone cables will not work Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator After you connect the 3172 to the LAN port proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter f
184. PPLy GAUSsian lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard gaussian and programs the frequency amplitude offset and exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate modulated waveforms the 3172 will stop generating these waveforms will revert to the standard gaussian waveform and will update the gaussian parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard gaussian 30e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard gaussian 22 waveform in units of volts lt offs gt 11 to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard gaussian waveform in units of volts lt exp gt 4to 100 Integer 10 Programs the exponent of the standard gaussian waveform Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset and exponent settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 10 APPLy EXPonential lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard exponential and programs the frequency amplitude offset and exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate modulated waveforms the
185. Publication Number 980949 Rev H Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 8 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 8 5 V 40 mV 9 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 9 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 9 5 V 40 mV 1 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 31 for a DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV 2 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 2 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 32 for a DMM reading of 2 5 V 10 mV Equipment DMM Preparation 4 Configu
186. Q 50 Q or 93 Q nominal Short Circuit to Case Ground 400 mA current limit Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Standby Amplitude Window Zout lt 2 Q Window Zout 50 Q Level Zout lt 2 Q Level Zout 50 Q Resolution Accuracy measured at 1 kHz into 50 Q 1 Vp p to 11 Vp p 100 mVp p to 1 Vp p 10 mVp p to 100 mVp p DC Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Rise Fall Time 10 90 Aberration Zout 50 Q Sync Output Connector Level Continuous Run Mode Sync Type Width Interrupted Run Modes triggered gated Sync Type Trigger Input Characteristics Sources External Connector Level Damage Level Frequency Range Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Output ON or OFF Output Disconnected NEG mode 0 to 20 V POS mode 0 to 20 V SYMM mode 11 V to 11 V NEG mode 0 to 10 V POS mode 0 to 10 V SYMM mode 5 5 V to 5 5 V SYMM mode 5 mV to 22 Vp p SYMM mode 2 5 mV to 11 Vp p 12 bits 1 of setting 50 mV 1 of setting 20 mV 1 of setting 5 mV NEG mode 0 to 20 V POS mode 0 to 20 V SYMM mode 0 V to 11 V 1mvV 1 1 from Amplitude 15 mV 11 ns lt 6 5 Front panel Combo D sub 5W5 A4 TTLTRGO 7 TTL Pulse fixed position 10 to 20 ns ns typical Pulse same width as trigger signal External trigger input is enabled Front panel Combo D sub 5W5 A3 TTLTRGO 7 TTL pulled up to 5 V through a 4 7 KQ resistor 10 V
187. SK marker or index Astronics Test Systems 5 83 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 4000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3172 returns the present marker position FSK DATA lt fsk_data gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 3172 to hop from carrier to shifted frequency and vice versa Data format is a string of 0 and 1 values which define when the output is the carrier frequency and when it shifts frequency to the FSK value 0 defines carrier frequency 1 defines shifted frequency Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Below you can see how an FSK data table is constructed The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 3172 will step through this list outputting either carrier or shifted frequencies depending on the data list Zero will generate carrier frequency and One will generate shifted frequency Note that the waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample FSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt fsk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the g
188. Sample clock frequency is measured in units of samples per second S s The following equation computes the frequency of an arbitrary waveform at the output connector Frequency Sample Clock Freq Number of Data Points For example using a sample clock frequency of 80 MS s with a 1 000 point waveform will generate an 80 kHz waveform at the output connector The following command sets the sample clock frequency for arbitrary and sequenced waveforms freqg rast lt value gt Set sample clock frequency in units of samples per second Sampling clock frequency can be in the range of 100 mS s to 200 MS s The number of points in the waveform must be an integer multiple of four For example you may use a waveform length of 25 804 throughout the entire range but if you increase the number of points by two then the 3172 W2 will generate an error The internal sample clock generator has a wide dynamic range that allows the creation of an infinite number of waveforms and frequencies With its top frequency reaching frequencies close to 200 MHz it must use dividers to create lower frequencies Such dividers can increase phase noise and jitter Some applications require better stability and phase noise making a single tone Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Generating Sequenced Waveforms Astronics Test Systems sample clock source the most desired source The 3172 W2 does not have
189. Shift Range Resolution Baud Range ASK Data Bits Length Counter Timer Characteristics Operation Measurement Functions Frequency Period Averaged Frequency Range Period Averaged Range Resolution Period Pulse Width Range Resolution Totalize Frequency Range Accumulation Range General Input Trigger Level Range Sensitivity Damage Level Minimum Pulse Width Slope Gate Time Reading Modes Repetitive Hold Gated Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual 0 V to 20 Vp p Maximum amplitude 4096 1 bit sec to 10 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 The 3172 has a special mode where the instrument type is transformed to operate as a counter timer When this mode is selected the operation of the arbitrary waveform and its outputs are disabled Frequency Period Period Averaged Pulse Width and Totalize 20 Hz to 100 MHz typically gt 120 MHz 10 ns to 50 ms 7 digits in one second of gate time reduced proportionally with lower gate times 500 ns to 50 ms 100 ns 20 Hz to 100 MHz 1 to 10 1 Front panel TRIG IN BNC connector 10 V 500 mVp p 12 V 210 ns Positive Negative transitions selectable 100 us to 1s Continuous measurements are executed when signal is present at the input Single measurement is executed upon command Active in Gated Totalize mode only A 11 3172 User Manual Time Base Type Temperature Stability Long Term Stability Publication Number 980949 Rev H TCXO 1 ppm 0 C 40 C
190. Sync Source Zero Test Procedure Observe that the SYNC output has 10 sinc cycles for each 0 crossing levels 1 Test Results Pass Fail 6 26 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual PLL Operation PLL Checks Frequency Lock This tests the operation of the PLL function The W2 locks automatically to an external trigger source The frequency and the start phase of the external signals are applied to the W2 settings After lock the start phase of the W2 can be modified from 180 to 180 Equipment Counter function generator Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As required by the tests 2 Connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG PLL IN connector Using a T connector connect the same output to the counter input CH A Use 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the W2 trigger input side 3 Configure the counter as follows Function Ratio A gt B Input 50 Q 4 Connect the W2 output to the counter input CH B 5 Configure the model W2 as follows Function Arbitrary Waveform Square 20 points Output On PLL On Test Procedure Modify the function generator frequency settings and observe that the counter readings match the function generator frequency settings as specified in Table 6 29 1 Table 6 29 PLL Tests Frequ
191. Tabor Electronics gt gt 3172 Demo cad E Ioj xj File View System Help Link 3172 w2 Offline lt No del ID Ge NM Panels 3172 WV2 Output Panel w Operation Output j_Run Mode 3172 W2 Standard Waveforms Panel x Standard z e A tan eaene 3172 W2 Arbitrary Sequence Panel gt x l Half Cycle 3172 W2 Half Cycle Panel x a X Instrument Sync System f 3172 e FM Panel e di E e 72 W2 AM Panel e FPK 3172 W2 Panel Fa cae Iess W2 FSKIPSK ASK Panel e a Countertimer 3172 W2 AmpiFreq Ea Panel e Trig Level DI min e M i Jee 3172 2 Counter Timer Panel Mode S Slope O Reading 2 Period P Pulse wich O Gate Time 42 Normal G Posive S P Period u Totalize O giel D A told 2 Negative Wave Composer gt Ch Temsi wat KE lol x File Edit view Wave Download About Kn A8 H eae eee SAS E ES SE Wavelength 1024 Active seg E SZ L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 1 4 ArbConnection Wave Composer Example Astronics Test Systems 1 7 3172 User Manua l Publication Number 980949 Rev H lol x a F on E Current r al View Full Train _ Section Structure gt r Pulse Train Design Format inden Level E E DC intervals ST 1 2 100 100 Time Level Points 500 600
192. Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 14 for a rise time reading of 20 us 0 5 Us Setup 15 200 us Leading Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 50 us div Termination 50 Q Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 15 for a rise time reading of 200 us 5 us Setup 15 2 ms Leading Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 5 ms div Termination 50 O Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 16 for a rise time reading of 2 ms 50 us Astronics Test Systems 7 49 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Leading Edge The pulse trailing edge adjustments assure that the trailing edge l Adjustments transition times of the generated pulses are within the specified limits Note that each channel has its own trailing edge adjustments and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with
193. The MSS bit is not part of the IEEE STD 488 1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll However the RQS bit if set will be sent in response to a serial poll Bit 7 Decimal value 128 Not used always set to 0 The Status Byte summary register can be read with the STB common query The STB common query causes the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status summary message as a single lt NR1 Numeric Response Message gt element The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register The STB common query does not alter the status byte 5 121 3172 User Manual Clearing the Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 122 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Removing the reasons for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register Sending the CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages With the output queue empty the MAV summary message is set to FALSE Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs The Service Request enable register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator
194. The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned ASK BAUD lt rate gt Description This allows the user to select ASK word rate The word rate is the interval at which the bit streams in the ASK data array are clocked causing the output amplitude to hop from one level to shifted amplitude level values and vice versa Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rate gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the frequency shifts from carrier to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present baud value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100kHz would be returned as 100e3 positive numbers are unsigned Astronics Test Systems 5 85 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H ASK FREQuency MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 3172 will generate a pulse designated as the ASK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the ASK data list Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 1000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3172 returns the present marker position ASK DATA lt ask_data gt Description Loads the
195. Use the following sequence of commands to select an output voltage window output load impedance and then program the amplitude and offset values rst Restore factory defaults Table 5 1 provides a complete listing of defaults outp 1 Enable output relay to turn output on outp imp lt value gt Set up the output impedance 0 50 or 93 volt rang lt value gt Set up an amplitude range pos neg or symm volt lt value gt Set up the amplitude level volt offs lt value gt Set up the offset level If your load impedance is not matched to the output impedance the amplitude reading at the load will differ from the programmed value The 50 Q setting is the default setting and is recommended for use in most applications that require a good pulse response and minimal aberrations Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Selecting an Output Function Selecting a Run Mode Astronics Test Systems The 3172 W2 has four basic output function types Use the following commands to select the waveform type func mode fix The 3172 W2 outputs the standard waveform currently selected by the FUNC SHAP command func mode user The 3172 W2 outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the TRAC SEL command func mode seq Selects the Sequenced Waveform function Waveform segments must be downloaded to the instrument before it can sequenced generate waveforms In addition the SEQ DEF command must be use
196. V and change the W2 trigger level to 4 V Verify that the W2 triggered waveforms are spaced 0 1 ms apart on Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 19 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Backplane Trigger Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary W2 in an adjacent slot Source Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode Triggered Run Mode Src As specified in Table 6 26 Waveform Sinewave Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Configure the auxiliary W2 as follows Frequency 2 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Continuous Trigger Output As specified in Table 6 27 Output On Test Procedure 1 Set up the trigger output and trigger source as specified in Table 6 27 and verify that the W2 generates a single cycle 2 MHz sinewave every 1 us with every matched output trigger and source settings Table 6 27 Trigger Source Tests Auxiliary W2 W2 Trigger Oscilloscope Trigger Output Setting Source Setting Reading Pass Fail TTLTO OFF TTLT1 ON TTLT1 1 us trig intervals TTLT1 OFF TTLT2 ON TTLT2 1 us trig intervals TTLT2 OFF TTLT3 ON TTLT3 1 us trig intervals TTLT3 OFF TTLT4 ON TTLT4 1 us trig intervals TTLT4 OFF
197. W2 INTernal FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 100 W2 DEPTh 0 to 100 50 W2 EXEcute MOD TYPE AM W2 EM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 3066 100e3 We FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN W2 FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 W2 RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 W2 MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 30e6 1e6 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 30e6 10e3 W2 STOP 10 to 30e6 1e6 W2 RASTer 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 We FUNCtion SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare SIN___ Computed _ W2 TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 W2 DIRection UP DOWN UP W2 SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic LIN W2 MARKer FREQuency 10 to 30e6 505e3 W2 FSK FREQuency Astronics Test Systems 5 73 3172 User Manual Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commands continued Publication Number 980949 Rev H Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SHIFted 10e 3 to 30e6 100e3 We BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 We MARKer 1 to 4000 1 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We SOURCce ASK AMPLitude STARt 0 to 16 5 W2 SHIFted 0 to 16 1 W2 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 We MARKer 1 to 1000 1 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We PSK PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 W2 SHIFted 0 to 360 180 W2 RATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 We DATA lt data_array gt We MARKer 1 to 4000 1 W2 FHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX W2 TIMe
198. W2 defaults to a 1 MHz 5 Vp p sine wave when you apply power or reset the unit If you turn the output on before changing any settings the output defaults to a sine wave signal For safety the SYNC OUT connector of the 3172 defaults to the Off state when the unit is first powered up or receives a software reset To avoid the production of random signals at the output connector keep the SYNC output in the Off state while setting up the instrument The SYNC output signal is hard wired to the output connector and therefore the output impedance remains low regardless of whether the output is on or off Use the following command to turn the SYNC output on and off Outp sync 1 Turns the SYNC output on Outp sync 0 Turns the SYNC output off Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual When you apply power or reset the 3172 the SYNC output defaults to a single pulse that has a fixed width of four sample clock periods Selecting the The main purpose of the SYNC output is to produce a pulse that other devices may synchronize with The width of the SYNC signal SYNC Source might be too narrow for slower devices The pulse width and W2 Modules Only several other parameters may be programmed using the following c ommands outp sync sour bit outp sync sour Icom outp sync sour ssyn outp sync sour puls outp sync sour zero Astronics Test Systems Provides a signal th
199. Waveforms File name Files of type Comma delimited cs LeCroy format CU LeCroy format ice Space delimited prn imited txt Cancel l Figure 4 30 Open Waveform Dialog Box Exit 3172 User Manual Ends the current Wave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon these changes Astronics Test Systems 4 45 3172 User Manual Edit Menu 4 46 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Edit menu is used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the graph The edit operations are explained below Autoline Autoline mode lets you draw one or more connected line segments To draw a line in Autoline mode click the left mouse button at the start point Click again at the next point to complete the line segment repeating this way until finished creating connected line segments Click on the right mouse button to terminate Autoline mode Sketch Sketch mode lets you draw freehand segments To draw in sketch mode on the waveform graph drag the cursor using the left mouse button Release the mouse button when you want to stop Use the right mouse button to terminate Sketch mode Filter The Filter operation is calculated using a moving average This is done by recalculating each point as an average of a number of symmetrical points adjacent to each point You can
200. a decimal value in the range of 0 to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 RSQ cannot be set The binary weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register STB Description Use this command to query the Status Byte for reported errors or events Astronics Test Systems 5 119 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Response The generator returns a summary of the Status Byte register The STB command is similar to a serial poll sequence but is processed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll except the request service bit bit 6 is not cleared if a serial poll has occurred TRG Description Use this command from a remote interface as a soft trigger in lieu of an external generator This command affects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to BUS TST Description Use this command to test the functionality of the 3172 Bear in mind that this test does not replace the performance checks but comes to provide basic confidence that the instrument operates and responds correctly to basic commands and functions Response The 3172 returns 0 when no error is detected Non zero response implies problems in one or more of the tested circuits that requires further investigation by a qualified test engineer The 3172 uses the Status Byte register group
201. a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 14 FM Panel Standard FM Parameters These parameters are active only when one of the built in waveforms is selected as the modulating signal These are Sine Triangle Square or Ramp The modulation frequency deviation and marker frequency control the standard FM modulation scheme Modulating Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform There are two basic options Standard built in waveforms and Arbitrary waveforms If you do not need exotic waveforms you can use one of the built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square or Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range On the other hand you can select the arbitrary modulating wave option where you can use any shape although you must load the modulating waveform from an external application such as the FM composer in AroConnection Information on the standard and arbitrary FM functions is given in Chapter 3 Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it Arbitrary FM Parameters Allow adjustment of the sample clock of the modulating waveform These parameters are active only when arbitrary modulating waveform option is selected The modulating waveform must be downloaded from an external utility such as ArbConnect
202. a list of frequencies and the output will step from one frequency level to another in the same order as programmed in the hop data table To access the required parameter click on the button below the parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the TH keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new setting 4 31 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Hp The Auxiliary tab provides access to a group of panels that control Auxiliary Panels some auxiliary functions Figure 4 19 There are three panels in this group Counter Timer which provides access to the auxiliary Counter Timer function Pulse Generator which provides access to the digital pulse generator function and X Instrument Sync for multi instrument synchronization control Laien Counter Timer Instrument Syne Figure 4 19 Auxiliary Panels 4 32 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Counter Timer The Counter Timer panel Figure 4 20 contains controls that select the measurement function and adjust the counter timer parameters for measuring external signals The counter timer measures signals that are connected to the TRIG IN input The various parameters that cont
203. a single tone sample clock source but it provides a front panel input that can accept a clock from an external source When this input is in use the internal clock generator is disabled and the 3172 W2 waveforms are clocked at a rate defined by the external signal Using an external clock source can improve phase noise and jitter to approximately 20 dB Hz at 10 kHz offset from the carrier Apply the external sample clock signal to the front panel SCLK IN connector Make sure your signal level is within the levels specified in Appendix A The following commands select the source of the sample clock input freg rast sour int This is the default selection where the 3172 W2 self generates its sample clock signal All other inputs are disabled freq rast sour ext This selects the front panel SCLKIN connector as the source of the sample clock signal Observe the signal range and levels as specified in Appendix A freq rast sour eclt0 This selects the backplane ECLTrg0 line as the sample clock source This is a special mode that allows synchronization between adjacent 3172 W2 modules Note that the VXI specifications limit the ECLTrg0 frequency to 62 5 MHz Backplane synchronization is covered in a separate section Sequences are comprised of waveform segments that reside in the waveform memory The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in a user defined order To avoid unexpected results it is essential that waveform segmen
204. acy of the output amplifier and attenuators The amplitude accuracy is checked for all three amplitude ranges Symmetrical Positive and Negative Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect P2 channel 1 to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude As specified in the Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Test Procedure 3 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests using Table 6 39 Table 6 39 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output P2 Amplitude DMM Reading Each Range Setting Error Limits 10 00 V 5 00 V 50 mV 3 000 V 1 5 V 25 mV 200 mV 100 mV 15 mV 1 000 V 500 mV 18 mV 100 mV 50 mV 15 mV 6 52 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The offset accuracy is checked for all three amplitude ranges Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Positive and Negative Test the accuracy of the offset if you suspect that this is a problem with the output amplifier Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 20 mV Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Offset As specified in the te
205. ading 1 MHz Continuous Gated Transition 1 MHz Continuous Gated by transition Waveform Gated Level 1 MHz Continuous Gated by level Waveform OoOo o Single shot Burst 1e6 waveforms Burst Astronics Test Systems 6 15 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Delayed Trigger Equipment Function generator 50 Q T connector Counter Characteristics ArbConnection CAD Preparation 1 Configure the Function generator as follows Amplitude 1V Frequency 1 MHz Trigger Mode Triggered Wave Square Wave 2 Place the T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one side of the T to the W2 TRIG IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel A input of the counter 3 Connect the W2 output to channel B input of the counter 4 Configure the counter to TI A to B measurements 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 99 6 Configure the W2 channel 1 only as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level OV Trigger Delay On Delay As required for the test Amplitude 5V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 25 Table 6 25 Trigger Delay Tests 3172 W2 Delay Setting Error Limits Counter Reading ts tyst330ns So o pt mss ims
206. ading and continues with the same process as long as the signal is available at the input In hold mode the counter is armed to receive signal at the trigger input When signal is sensed the gate to the counter opens for duration as programmed with the Gate Time parameter processes the result displays and holds the reading until the next Reset Arm command To display and modify the gate time parameter click on the Gate Time LED and modify the gate time per your requirements Gate time rage is from 100 us to 1 s Normal counter timer readings are displayed when the Reading LED is selected Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual X Instrument Sync The X Instruments Synchronization table provides a fast and easy method of synchronizing modules that reside within a single VXI mainframe AroConnection finds 3172s which may be synchronized and allows the selection of groups and synchronization paths and allows the setting of phase offsets between modules Figure 4 21 shows a list of modules that were detected by ArbConnection and listed in the Instruments Pool This list can now be manipulated to form one or more groups of synchronized instruments Use the procedure below to set up groups and to activate the synchronization First notice the variety of instruments that are listed in the Instruments Pool Actually they all are the same 3172 units except they are mounted on different platforms for variou
207. ading edge offset between master and slave units is programmable lt 75 ns 4 sample clock cycle Standard Arbitrary and Sequenced using the automatic sequence advance mode only Continuous Triggered Gated and Counted Burst 200 ns to 20 s separately programmable for each synchronized instrument 20 ns 1 5 kHz to 30 MHz 2 5 MSa s to 150 MSa s limited by a specific VXI backplane ability to transmit high frequency signals Leading edge offset is programmable for master and slave units Operates in conjunction with the continuous run mode only lt 100 ns to 20 s 20 ns Single slot C size module A16 A24 A32 D16 Slave Message or Register Based 3 0 A 1 3172 User Manual SCPI Revision SCPI Emulation Logical Address Settings Shared Memory Write only General Power Requirements EMC Certification Operating temperature Storage Temperature Safety Workmanship Standards Publication Number 980949 Rev H 1993 0 3171 1 255 configured via DIP switches D16 A24 A32 35W maximum CE marked 0 C 55 C 40 C 70 C Designed to meet IEC 1010 1 UL 3111 1 CSA 22 2 1010 Conform to IPC A 610D W2 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Specifications Run Modes Description Continuous Triggered Gated Frequency Accuracy 10 MHz Reference Source Internal External Connector Impedance and Level External Sample Clock Source Connector A 2 Define how waveforms start and stop Run m
208. ading of 4 V 20 mV Setup 28 5 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 5 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 28 for DMM reading of 5 5 V 25 mV Setup 29 7 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Offset 6 995 V Impedance 50 ohms Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 29 for DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV 7 32 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setup 30 Setup 31 Amplitude Adjustments Setup 32 Astronics Test Systems 8 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the
209. al Bus synchronization refer to the INSTrument COUPle commands When locking the 3152B to an external source applied to the TRIG PLL IN connector the auto detection circuit sets up the lock in range and prepares the PLL circuits for a final phase lock After phase lock has been achieved the 3152B duplicates the frequency and start phase of the external source A front panel LED illuminates when the external source signal is valid and the instrument has locked onto it When phase locking to a signal on the TRIG PLL IN connector phase adjustment commands allow phase shifting of the locked signal from 180 to 180 referenced to the input signal In addition the phase can be shifted by applying a signal to the front panel PM IN connector where DC to 10 KHz voltage levels can phase modulate the locked instrument The ECLTrig bus in the VXI chassis allows synchronizing multiple 3152Bs inside the same VXlbus chassis without external connections The ECLTO and ECLT1 lines provide the necessary signals to achieve lock between modules Using this method one instrument is configured as master and the rest of the instruments are configured as slaves They do not need to be in adjacent chassis slots When synchronized the slave instruments are initially locked to the start phase of the master but later can be configured to have phase offsets relative to the master Phase offset is programmable from 0 to 360 Although signals synchronized thr
210. ally be set to operate in arbitrary mode Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments places each section of the pulse train into a different memory segment and the generator will automatically be set to operate in sequenced mode Select this option for the example we are going to build later IO xi l EE De Hp ER P rultrain z Se A on op Pulse Editor Options i Mode of Operation Memory Management Freely Select Mode of Operation Do not Override Loaded Segments Force Pulse Train to Single Segment ve Glo Pulse Design with no Arbitrary Waveform Model Limitation ce Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments Sequenced Waveform Mode Pulse Transition Management r Design Units Time units ms sl Level Units fV DI C Limit Increments 1 amp Allow System Control Cancel Pulse currently not specified Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 48 Selecting Pulse Editor Options Design Units As you design your pulse pattern it is easiest to design it using the same engineering units as are used in your pulse specification Time Units Select between us ms and s for the pulse interval Level Units Select between mV or V for the amplitude level The ms and V units will be used in the example to follow 4 69 3172 User Manual Using the Pulse Editor Publication Number 980949 Rev H Memory management There are two options in the memory management group Do Not O
211. ameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted Engineering unit suffices with numeric parameters eg MHz or KHz can also be sent If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will ignore values which are not allowed and will generate an error message The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter VOLT AMPL lt amplitude gt Discrete Parameters Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values i e FIXed USER and SEQuence They have short and long form command keywords Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters The following command uses discrete parameters SOUR FUNC MODE FIXed USER SEQuence Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false The generator accepts OFF or 0 for a false condition The generator accepts ON or 1 for a true condition The instrument always returns 0 or 1 when a boolean setting is queried The following command uses a boolean parameter OUTP FILT OFF ON The same command can also be written as follows OUTP FILT 0 1 Arbitrary Block Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the Parameters generator s memory Depending on which option is installed the 3172 can accept binary blocks up to 1M bytes The following c
212. amplitude each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the amplitude step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the amplitude step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Amplitude Hop Data Array 1e0 100 Ze 2000 3e0 3000 4e0 4000 5e0 5000 Ge 6000 Ze 7000 8e0 8000 9e0 9000 10e0 10000 In the above example the first number is the amplitude value and the second number is its dwell time Therefore only even number of sets can be located in this table Parameters Name Type Description lt var_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of amplitude hop values and their respective dwell time AHOP MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the amplitude list the 3172 will generate a pulse designated as Hop marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 5000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index amplitude hop integer only position Astronics Test Systems 5 93 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns the present marker position Pulse Waveform Commands P2 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Use the following command for programming the pulse generator functions and their associate
213. an store ten separate sequences and this command selects the active sequence Once selected the active sequence is generated at the output connector Note that by selecting an active sequence you do not automatically change the output to sequenced mode seq def 1 1 10 0 1 This command defines a link The parameters are from left to right link number segment number loop counter advance flag and sync flag These parameters are explained in the Generating Sequenced Waveforms section Using the Sequence Define command repetitively you may program a complete definition of your sequence When entering a large number of links efficiency can be improved by using an alternate syntax which allows a table of sequence definitions to be downloaded directly Use the following command to program a complete table from an array seq data lt array gt This will program the entire sequence table without programming individual links The sequence generator steps through the link list in descending order In Continuous Run mode the sequence repeats automatically after the last step has been completed When the generator is in Triggered mode the output stops at the last point of the last waveform in the sequence In Gated mode the sequence always completes after the gate stop signal To remove a link from the sequence table use the following command 3 27 3172 User Manual Controlling the Sequence Advance Modes 3 28 seq del
214. and programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt probes gt 2 to 10 Numeric 2 Programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period and the LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by this parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3172 reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 3172 returns the present keep alive number of probes Astronics Test Systems 5 113 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H System The system related commands are not related directly to waveform generation but are an important part of operating the generator These Commands commands can reset or test the instrument or query the instrument for system information Table 5 16 System Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association RESet W2 P2 SYSTem ERRor W2 P2 VERSion 3172 INFOrmation CALibration 3172 MODel 3172 SERial 3172 SMEMory MODe READ WRITe WRIT w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 TEST ALL 3172 RESet or RST Description This command will reset the 3172
215. and pulse width are derived from the trigger level and slope settings The controlling signal is applied to the rear panel TRIG IN connector When the signal crosses the trigger threshold it generates a pulse of which its width is determined by the inverse transition of the signal Positive and negative slope settings determine if the width is derived from the positive trigger level crossing or the negative trigger level crossing To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Equipment Oscilloscope Function Generator 50Q feedthrough termination Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Level Output TTL Frequency 100 kHz 2 Connect the function generator to the P2 External Pulse Width input 3 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the P2 as follows Pulse Mode Ext Width Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify that the P2 generates pulses with the following properties Period 10 us Pulse width 5 us Test Results Pass Fail 2 Change the P2 slope setting to negative and observe that the offset has a reverse impact on the pulse width Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 59 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This tests the operation of the two specific pulse run mode
216. ange 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 120 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 6 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 6 130 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 130 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 7 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 7 139 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 139MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 8 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 8 145 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM 7 22 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 145 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 9 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV PLL Adjustments The PLL operation is basic to the sample clock generator Correct operation of the PLL circuit assures the accuracy of the frequency path as well as the accuracy of the PLL phase Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a frequency and or PLL accuracy issue Setup 9 PLL Preparation Equipment No equipment required for this step Pr
217. ange Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 4000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3172 returns the present marker position 5 88 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Freq uency Use the following commands for programming the frequency hop g parameters Hop control is internal The frequency will hop from Hopping frequency to frequency at a rate determined by the dwell time value Modulation and controlled by a sequence of frequencies in the HOP data table Programming There are two hop modes Fixed Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from frequency to frequency is constant and Variable Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from frequency to frequency is programmable for each hop The commands for programming the frequency hopping function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes FHOP DWELI MODe FIXed VARiable Description This selects between fixed or variable dwell time for the frequency hops Select the fixed option if you want each frequency to dwell equally on each step The variable option lets you program different dwell times for each frequency hop The 3172 output hops from one frequency to the next according to a sequence given in a hop table The variable dwell time table contains dwell time data for each step however the fixed dw
218. appears You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 0 End Point Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points The example below shows five sine cycles Amplitude 16 bit resolution waveforms have 65 536 levels The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine The example is showing a sine waveform with maximum peak to peak amplitude for a 16 bit waveform Any number range below the maximum and minimum values generates a sine with reduced dynamic range Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle at which the sine will start The example shows start phase of 90 Power The example shows sine cubed Sine to the power of 1 will Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 O x Ed h ownload About Denas lt x io Be R Wavelength
219. are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail 6 60 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 5 3172 User Manual Change the P2 run mode setting to Burst and change the Burst Count setting to 5 Observe that 5 pulses are visible at every cycle of 1 ms Test Results Pass Fail 6 Verify that Sync Output shows synchronization pulse having 5 ms pulse width Verify that the SYNC is high for the duration of the burst Test Results Pass Fail 7 Remove the P2 output from the oscilloscope input and connect to the counter input 8 Change the counter function to Totalize 9 Change the P2 burst count to 1 000 and internal timer to 1 second 10 Reset counter and observe that the counter reading increments 1 000 counts every second Test Results Pass Fail 11 Move function generator output to the P2 gate input 12 Change the P2 run mode setting to Gated and observe that the pulse waveforms appear during the gate time only Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 61 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H e This tests the operation of the delayed trigger Note that only one Delayed Trigger delay can be utilized at the time so if you are using the double Characteristics pulse mode the delay is automatically associated with the dou
220. are identified as Setup Number at the title of each of the adjustments in the following procedure Remote adjustments have the range of 1 through 256 with the center alignment set to 128 Therefore if you are not sure of the direction set the adjustment to 128 and add or subtract from this value If you have reached 1 or 256 and were not able to calibrate the range there is either a problem with the way you measure the parameter or possibly there is a problem with the instrument In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarifications and support Note in the following procedures that although configuration of the P2 is done automatically some of the configurations are shown for reference only There is no requirement to change configuration of the P2 during the remote adjustment procedure except in places where specifically noted 7 42 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Reference Oscillator Use this procedure to adjust the reference oscillators The reference oscillators determine the accuracy of the output period so if you Adjustments suspect that there is an accuracy issue proceed with the calibration of the reference oscillators Note that the 50MHz is marked as a factory adjustment and therefore it is not normally required to be performed during normal calibration cycles except if the gated oscilla
221. are revision indication is shown in Figure 7 18 The computer that will be used for performing the update must have the 3172 Plug amp Play driver installed If it does not then you may download the current version from the Astronics Test Systems software download web site search for 3172 plug amp play Use the following procedure to upgrade the firmware once you determine that a firmware upgrade will improve the performance of your instrument 1 Install the 3172 in a VXlbus chassis and apply power to the chassis Run the VXI resource manager Resman exe Copy the new 3172 object file to a folder on the hard disk The object file has a filename containing the model number and version number For example the file ri8172 v3 07 bin is for Model 3172 version 3 07 4 Launch updater exe To locate it navigate to the installation path of the 3172 Plug amp Play driver The path is typically C Program Files IlVI Foundation VISA WinNT ri3172 In this folder is the firmware updater folder containing the file updater exe Double click updater exe to launch the updater 5 The updater window will appear as shown in Figure 7 19 In the Resource Name pull down menu select the logical address of the module to be updated In the example shown in Figure 7 19 the item VXIO 2 INSTR refers to logical address 2 7 67 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H updater M Resource Name M Fi
222. as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 15 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 43 for DMM reading of 5 31mV 0 5 mV The adjustments assure that the amplitude levels are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude modulation accuracy is an issue 5 V Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 5V Function Arbitrary External AM ON Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 44 for DMM reading of 1 768 V 15 mV 1 5 V Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Setup 46 Setup 47 Astronics Test Systems Function Range 3172 User Manual ACV 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input
223. as follows Function Period Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the counter timer input Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse Output On Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Period As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform period accuracy continuous run mode tests using Table 6 37 Table 6 37 Period Accuracy Continuous Run Mode Tests Pass 100 0000000 ms _ t00ns 10 000000 ms t0Ons LOD me dm 100 000 us 100ps ES 10 000 us 1 000 us Period Accuracy Equipment Counter timer Pulse Generator Gated Run Mode Preparation Tests 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Period Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse Run Mode Gated Output On Period As required by the tests Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Test Procedure 1 Perform period accuracy gated run mode tests using Table 6 38 Note that the reading will be stable during 2 seconds when the external pulse generator opens the gate Discard other readings as irrelevant Astronics Test Systems 6 51 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 6 38 Period Accuracy Gated Run Mode Tests P2 Period Setting Counter Reading Pass 100 0000000 ms Amplitude Accuracy Amplitude Accuracy Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accur
224. assigned to segments Segment numbers range from 1 through 16 384 You may define the segments in any order For example you may define segment 3 then segment 1 and then later define segment 2 You may not change the size of a segment once you have defined it You cannot query the segment definition parameters so make sure you keep track of them if you intend to partition the memory into many segments You may use the above command to create as many segments as required However if you have many segments it is more efficient Astronics Test Systems 3 21 3172 User Manual Loading Arbitrary Waveforms 3 22 Publication Number 980949 Rev H to combine all segments into a single waveform and then create a memory partition table for the individual waveform segments To do this use the following command segm lt array gt Downloads the entire memory partition table to the instrument in one operation Chapter 5 provides details on the use of this command Deleting Memory Segments To delete a waveform memory segment use the following command trac del lt value gt Deletes a segment specified by lt value gt from the available segment list but does not erase the contents of the segment Note that if you delete a segment the memory portion that belonged to this segment is no longer accessible The next segment defined is placed at the end of the partition table If you delete the last segment that you defined t
225. asurement function Pulse width can be measured on either continuous or non repetitive signals Since the width of the signal is directly proportional to the gating time the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the pulse width of the signal The best resolution in period measurements is 10 ns ITOTalize Discrete Selects the totalize measurement function In this mode the gate opens when the first valid signal is sensed at the counter input and remains open until programmed otherwise Pulse are counted and displayed continuously until intervened externally The counter can accumulate 8 digits before it will overflow An overflow indication is available Response The 3172 returns FREQ PER APER PULS or ITOT depending on the present measurement function setting COUNter DISPlay MODe NORMal HOLD Description This command programs the display time mode for the counter timer The two modes are normal for continuous display readings and hold for single reading after arming the counter input Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Selects the continuous reading mode In this case the counter input is self armed which means that every valid signal that is sensed at the trigger input connector will be counted and measured processed and results placed on the interface port HOLD Discrete Selects the single reading mode In this case the counter input is armed first and the first valid signal
226. at is synchronized with an external trigger event when the W2 is placed in one of its interrupted modes Generates a narrow sync signal every time the segment is generated The sync position along the waveform can be programmed using the OUTP SYNC POS command OUTP SYNC POS is used to set both the TRIiGger point and the SYNC point The BIT signal is recommended for use in continuous mode Generates a sync signal in SEQuence mode only once when the selected segment appears for the first time in the sequence The identity of the segment can be programmed using the TRAC SEL command The sync position along the selected waveform can be programmed using the OUTP SYNC POS command The LCOM signal is recommended for use in Sequenced mode Generates a sync signal at intervals that are synchronized with the internal clock generator This option is useful to minimize jitter when using an oscilloscope The SSYNc signal is recommended for use in Triggered mode Generates a pulse each time a segment waveform is generated The pulse width is specified in points using the OUTP SYNC WIDTh command This command is a useful alternative to the BIT sync source especially when the bit pulse is too narrow It is also helpful when using the W2 to emulate the sync pulse of another instrument that it is replacing in a test system Generates a SYNC signal which remains low when the main output level is below 0 3 3 3172 User Manual Changing the
227. ate BURSt STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 We P2 COUNt 1 to 1000000 W2 1 to 65 536 P2 1 W2 P2 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 TIMe 100e 9 to 20 W2 100e 9 to 1 P2 100e 9 W2 P2 GATE MODe LEVel TRANsition LEV w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 LEVel 10 to 10 1 6 W2 SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg1 BUS EXT We P2 ADJcent SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS W2 P2 RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 TIMe 100e 9 to 20 100e 9 w2 TIMer 1e 6 to 20 15e 6 w2 5 10 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 2 Model 3172 W2 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Output Control Commands OUTPut 0 AMODulation OFF ON 0 1 50 P2 IMPedance 0 50 93 50 W2 P2 Fil Ter LPASs w2 FREQuency 2MHz 25MHz 60MHZz 120 MHz 25MHz w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 w2 LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 SYNC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 P2 POSition POINt 0 to 1e6 1 0 w2 SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc PULSe ZEROcross BIT W2 WIDTh 4 to 64 4 w2 TRIGger SOURce BIT LCOMPlete INTernal EXTernal BIT W2 P2 TTLTrg 0to7 0 W2 P2 SOURce 1 2 3 4 1 3172 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 W2 P2 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 EXT in W2 only INT W2 P2 FR
228. ber 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The 3172 returns the present power value SQUare DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt 7 Description This command programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty_cycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Programs the square wave duty cycle parameter in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present duty cycle value PULSe DELay lt delay gt Description This command programs delay of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse delay parameter in units of percent 99 999 Response The 3172 returns the present pulse delay value PULSe WIDth lt pulse_width gt Description This command programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt pulse_width gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width parameter in units of percent 99 999 Response The 3172 returns the present width value Astronics Test Systems 5 47 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PULSe TRANsition lt rise gt Description This command programs pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arb
229. bit digital word The EXT SCLK connector accepts sample clock signals from an external source It is AC coupled to accommodate positive ECL PECL or negative ECL NECL amplitude level clock signals Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ARB OUT J1 A7 SCLK IN J1 2 Digital Pattern Outputs Astronics Test Systems having frequencies from DC to 200 MHz This signal replaces the internal clock generator either for low noise applications or for synchronization purposes The sample clock input is active only after selecting the External Sample Clock Source option The main output coax pin J1 A7 provides standard Arbitrary and modulated Waveforms The output impedance of this output is selectable from lt 2 Q 50 Q or 93 Q The cable connected to this output should be terminated with a 50 Q or 93 Q resistance The output amplitude is specified when connected to a 50 Q load If the output is connected to a different load resistance determine the actual amplitude from the resistance ratio of the internal output impedance to the load impedance The SCLK IN connector is connected for compatibility with the 3171 legacy hardware This pin is not connected in the 3172 W2 configuration It is AC coupled to accommodate positive ECL PECL or negative ECL NECL amplitude level clock signals having frequencies from DC to 40 MHz This signal replaces the internal clock generator either for low noise
230. ble 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 38 for DMM reading of 1 768 V 15 mV Setup 39 1 5 V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 39 for DMM reading of 530mV 5 mV Setup 40 0 5 V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV 7 36 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude
231. ble pulse delay and cannot be utilized for the trigger delay To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Trigger Delay Tests Equipment Function generator 50 Q T connector Counter ArbConnection Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Amplitude 1V Frequency 1 MHz Trigger Mode Triggered Wave Square Wave 2 Place the T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one side of the T to the P2 TRIG IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel A input of the counter 3 Connect the P2 channel 1 output to channel B input of the counter 4 Configure the counter to TI A to B measurements 5 Configure the P2 channel 1 only as follows Trigger Delay On Delay As required for the test Amplitude 5V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 49 Table 6 49 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests P2 Delay Setting Error Limits Counter Reading Pass Fail LL Oo EEN dE Me Ee tyst230ns 6 62 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Backplane Trigger Source Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary 3172 in an adjacent slot Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Set
232. blem with the 3152B In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarification and support Repeat steps 4 through 9 above for each row in the calibration table Perform all steps in the order presented in the table Close the calibration panel by clicking the x in the upper right corner Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Note After making calibration adjustments it is essential that you lock the calibration factors as described in the section titled Locking the Calibration Factors below This will store the calibration factors in flash memory so that the instrument will retain its calibration when power is turned off Astronics Test Systems 7 9 3172 User Manual 7 10 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 7 2 Calibration for W2 Module Item in DMM Low Limit Target High Limit Cal Panel Function Volts Volts Volts Adjust Pot 12 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 RV10 13 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 14 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 15 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 16 VDC 0 020 0 00000 0 020 17 VDC 0 050 0 00000 0 050 RV2 18 VDC 0 995 1 1 005 19 VDC 2 490 2 5 2 510 20 VDC 3 980 4 4 020 21 VDC 5 475 5 5 5 525 22 VDC 6 965 7 7 035 23 VDC 8 460 8 5 8 540 24 VDC 9 460
233. blication Number 980949 Rev H folder and copies the files that are required to run the program Then it creates a workgroup and icons to start AroConnection Invoke ArbConnection by double clicking the icon on the desktop If you cannot find the icon on your desktop click on Start gt Programs gt ArbConnection The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box displays as shown in Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options K x Communications Setup Interface Startup Options C Specify an Address Val RB Communicate Only Previous Session Setup Reset Instrument amp Panels D Detect Automatically LAN C Work Offline Interface _ Model List Address E KS x r Seele don t show this Add Address Remove Address Cares JS Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options Dialog Box If desired you may check the Store mode and don t show box to prevent this dialog box from displaying every time you invoke ArbConnection The purpose of this dialog box is to configure the program to communicate properly with the 3172 For example if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4 you may click Specify an Address and then enter the required address Then ArbConnection will automatically use the specified address each time it starts up If you choose not to have this dialog box displayed automatically at startup you may still access and change the opt
234. box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 55 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine The dialog box shown in Figure 4 57 appears You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Anchor Defines the first point where the created wave starts Note that if you change the start point the left anchor automatically adjusts itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 200 End Point Anchor Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 5 x il e ad About amp i Veh os ae if SC ra Pai S s Wavelength 1024 Deviation 100000 Emm R Anchor 500 Anchor l Start pts 200 End pts 500 Default p Peak Deviation Max 1050000 Cancel Min 950000 OK r Wave Properties Cycles 3 Start Phase 0 Power 1 Vertical Scale 100e3Hz 12500Hz Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 57 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The 3D Composer
235. caling fee X EET End pts 1023 Min 32768 fi C Original Scale Deiat r Equation History Cancel Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save ect OK fc sine wav sin omg p 5 c Noise wav 10 E Aliases gt gt Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 41 Combining Waveforms into Equations Astronics Test Systems 4 61 3172 User Manual The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer Menu Bar 4 62 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Pulse Composer is a tool for creating and editing pulses without the need to think about sample clock number of points and complex equations Pulses are created on the screen simply and efficiently in a special dialog box by typing in the width and level or by using the rubber band method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude and time duration The Pulse Composer can also multiply pulse sections to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals When you finally have your pulse design on the screen the program determines if the pulse design will fit in one memory segment or use multiple segments and employ the sequence generator for repeatable segments In either case bear in mind that if you already have some waveforms stored in memory segments these will be erased to make room for the new pulse design If you insist on keeping arbitrary waveforms and still download complex pulses you can ch
236. can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar The maximum length depends on the memory installed in your instrument The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maximum of 1 Meg words with standard 1MB memory and 4 Meg words with the 4MB memory expansion option where available L Anchor 0 Max 2047 Cycles I Auto_Scaling _Preview Endipts j1023 Min 2048 1 C Orignal Scale _Defaut r IL d L Equation 7 Amplitude p amp sin 10 oma p p t 0 3 we Aliases gt gt 4 50 r Waveform Amplitude p Level Adjuster Start pts 0 History Insert Wave Clear Open GE Cancel x Figure 4 34 Waveform Screen Notice that on the left top and right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen These are the anchors The anchors are used as the start and end pointers for waveform creation For example if you want to create a sine waveform Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Generating Waveforms Using Equation Editor between point 100 and point 500 you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built in library There are two ways to control anchor placements 1 Drag the left anchor triangle to the desired left position Do the same for the right anchor Notice that the anchor coordinates appear at the top of the waveform screen and
237. case where the pulse width can exceed the value of the period setting is in triggered mode where external trigger events determine the period of the pulse Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt width gt 7e 9to 10 Numeric 1e 3 Will set the width of pulse in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse width must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3172 will return the present pulse width value in units of seconds Astronics Test Systems 5 95 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PULSe DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt Description This command affects the output only when the 3172 is placed in Hold Duty Cycle pulse mode The programmed duty cycle parameter holds maintains constant duty cycle scenario regardless of the period setting Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty_cycle gt 1 to 99 Numeric 50 Will set the pulse duty cycle in units of percent Note that this parameter will affect the pulse output only in the Hold Duty Cycle pulse mode Response The 3172 will return the present duty cycle value in units of percent PULSe DELay lt delay gt Description This command will program the delayed interval of which the output idles on the low level amplitude until the first transition to high level amplitude The delay is measured from
238. ch an amplitude and offset combination Bit 4 Execution Error This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator Bit 5 Command Error This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement Bit 6 User Request This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device Bit 7 Power On This bit indicates that the device s power source was cycled since the last time the register was read Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE Error Messages Astronics Test Systems The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of the ESE Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE Common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Re
239. ch as ArbConnection The previous section details the modulation schemes and lists the parameters that control the modulating signals A complete listing of the modulation control parameters is given in the Programming Reference in this manual To program the sweep parameters use the following commands swe star lt value gt Set the starting frequency for the sweep swe stop lt value gt Set the ending frequency for the sweep swe time lt value gt Set the amount of time that will elapse from swe dir up the start to the end of the sweep Set the sweep direction to up from the start Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Controlling the Carrier Frequency Controlling the Carrier Base Line Astronics Test Systems frequency to the stop frequency swe dir down Set the sweep direction to down from the stop frequency to the start frequency swe spac lin Select linear sweep steps where the generator steps the frequency through the sweep range in linear increments swe spac log Select logarithmic sweep steps where the generator steps the frequency through the sweep range in logarithmic increments swe mark lt value gt Define marker position The marker will generate a pulse at the SYNC output when the marker frequency setting is crossed In general when you select a modulation scheme the waveform being modulated the carrier is always a sine wave When you
240. chronization process Activate Once this button is pressed the instruments will synchronize in the selected groups and the master will control the timing of the servant modules Close terminates the current session but does not change the synchronization status The System tab Figure 4 25 provides access to a group of panels The System that control some general system parameters and provides access Panels to calibration There are two panels in this group General System which provides access to some system commands utilities and filters and Calibration which provides access to the remote calibration utility Note however that access to the calibration panel is permitted to qualified service personnel and requires a user name and password Information on how to access the calibration panel is given in Chapter 7 GeneraliFilters Calibration Figure 4 25 System Panels Astronics Test Systems 4 39 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H General Filters The General Filters panel Figure 4 26 provides access to some general system common commands allows read back of information stored in the flash and provides a means to add filter s in series with the output path The General Filters panel and the various parameters that control its functions are described below Serial Nurnber Figure 4 26 General Filters Panel System The System group has three buttons that are normally associated with sys
241. ciadsceeededonnnele lenuectedinanele ended ongeela toni eege 7 25 DOTUP TOXO ege SEENEN EE 7 26 Base Line Offset Adjustments AAA 7 26 Offset AGUSTIN GIG EE 7 28 Amplitude Adj stMments eege a a e E phoned a he eee 7 33 Amplitude Adjustments MOdulation c cccccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeeees 7 36 Amplitude Adjustments External AM ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecenaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneneeeeeees 7 38 Pulse Response EIERE ee eiert egene Zeg eeneg 7 41 Procedure P2 MOda Ae d Heed Ae sae eo ete ys ita OS a 7 41 Reference Oscillator Adlustments kee 7 43 Pulse Keel AdjuStMEntS et eege deeg eegene ege 7 44 Pulse Width AUST SS aeneae rne aine etaa ae ated e A EEE Zeg 7 44 Pulse Delay Aeltteltoente e s ieee g ien eege Sg Maid taueehl eli ih nuteanelaaresetinas 7 46 Pulse Leading Edge Adjustments kee 7 47 Astronics Test Systems xi 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Leading Edge Adjustment Au 7 50 Pulse Vertical Balance Adjustments Akne 7 52 Baseline Offset Adjustments engen ode Aide ee ee eee i a Eder e 7 54 Offset AdjusStMEntS dee deed a EE evens saa a EEE a ewes es detent EE EE eas ete 7 55 Amplitude ACIUSUMEHISt ee Aaa eaten tae ea ae SE 7 61 Pulse Response EE 7 63 Adjustment Procedure A3 Module keen 7 64 Amplifier Gain Adjustments ae cetaaate caeedacndand heniedeeartlehaatiueedeeauaiheeeeai eae 7 64 Gain Adjustments EE 7 64 P lse Response Adj stMentS ris ai a d
242. cks and calibration procedure Astronics Test Systems 8 19 2014 Updated per ECN05013 Revised Chapter 7 Table 7 3 to correct the W6 programmed amplitudes and expected responses for several calibration steps xxi 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank xxii Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction What s in this Manual What s in this Chapter Astronics Test Systems This manual contains information for operating and servicing the Racal Instruments 3172 series of VXlbus Arbitrary Waveform Pulse Generators Generally what is applicable to the 3172 is the same for all other models except where otherwise stated Throughout this manual we refer to all units as the 3172 When there are differences in the specific models the differences are described in detail More specific information on the 3172 models is included in the section 3172 Configuration Different Model Numbers later in this chapter Legacy mode information can be found in Chapters 3 and 5 The manual is divided into functional chapters which guide you through the various operations that are necessary to install and to prepare the instrument for its intended operation The following lists the chapters that are included in this manual e Chapter 1 provides general description of the instrument and identifies key
243. contains parameters for controlling the shift keying modulation functions To turn one of the functions on and off click on the appropriate button in the State group The various groups in this panel are described below State The State buttons enable or disable the shift keying functions General The General group contains parameters that are common to all of the shift keying functions These are CW frequency and baseline CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output FSK The FSK group contains parameters that control the frequency shift keying function These parameters are control data 0 and 1 frequencies baud rate and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the FSK group provides 4 27 3172 User Manual 4 28 General Publication Number 98
244. controlling the 3172 from a ArbConnection remote computer It provides three types of functions Front panel control Through a simulated front panel you can control the 3172 in much the same manner as a bench top instrument Waveform generation and editing Using drawing tools and equations you may define and edit arbitrary waveforms Downloading After you define a waveform you may download it to the waveform memory on the 3172 System To use ArbConnection you need the following Requirements 1 Computer Pentium Ill or better 2 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 3 Screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels 4 Pointing device mouse or trackball 5 National Instruments VISA version 2 6 or higher or equivalent Installing Before you install AroConnection make sure that there is at least g 10 megabytes of available space on your hard disk ArbConnection Installation of AroConnection requires the visa32 dll runtime engine You may download the latest version of this file from National Instruments web site www ni com After downloading this file move it to your Windows system folder Then run the setup exe file on the ArobConnection installation CD The installation program installs AroConnection on a logical drive of your choice the default is drive C It automatically creates a new Astronics Test Systems 4 1 3172 User Manual Startup amp Communication Options 4 2 Pu
245. controls and features It also describes briefly all functions and features that are available for the user e Chapter 2 describes hardware and software installation Chapter 3 provides descriptions of all functions features run modes and operating modes It also describes in detail how to operate the instrument e Chapter 4 demonstrates the capability of AroConnection to control the 3172 and to create and download waveforms and control tables to the working memory e Chapter 5 lists all of the commands that control the instrument It also has detailed descriptions of the limits and factory default values of the programmable parameters e Chapters 6 and 7 contain service information that allows you to do performance tests and to calibrate the product e Appendix A lists the 3172 product specifications This chapter contains a general and functional description of the Racal Instruments 3172 VXlbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator It also explains the front panel connectors operational modes and all available features However some options available for the 3172 1 1 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H may not be installed in your specific module A complete listing of the available options is included later in this chapter Conventions Used his manual uses the following conventions in this Manual Introduction 3172 Configuration Different Model Numbers 1 2 ei NOTE A note contains information relati
246. counter threshold hysteresis problems the tests are performed with the fastest transitions only and at ranges that will not be effected by counter errors To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Equipment Counter timer Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Pulse Width Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Period 100 ms Output On Pulse Width As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform pulse width accuracy tests using Table 6 58 Table 6 58 Pulse Width Accuracy Tests P2 Pulse Width Setting Error Limits Counter Reading 10 00000 ms annuel 1 000000 ms 30 0us 100 000 us 3 00us y 10 000 ps 300 5ns Cid L us 30 5ns O L 10ns 2 ml Pulse Delay Double Pulse Delay Accuracy 6 70 This tests the accuracy of the pulse delay circuit To eliminate counter threshold hysteresis problems the tests are performed with the fastest transitions only and at ranges that will not be effected by counter errors For your information the pulse delay and the double pulse delay share the same circuits Also the measurement of delayed pulse is more complicated because it involves manual subtraction of the the SYNC to start delay and
247. ction generator Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency 1 kHz 2 Using a T adapter connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG PLL IN connector and the other cable to the counter input Channel A Use 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the W2 trigger input side 3 Configure the counter as follows Function A B Input 50 Q both channels 4 Connect the W2 output to the counter input Channel B 5 Configure the DC source as follows Amplitude As required by the test 6 Connect the DC source to the PM input 7 Configure the model W2 as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Waveform Square Wavelength 36 points Output On PLL On Test Procedure 1 Modify the DC source settings and verify readings as specified by the tests in Table 6 32 Table 6 32 PLL Tests PM Phase Offset DC Source Error Counter Freq Setting Amplitude Limits Phase Reading Pass Fail 10 kHz 2V 320 15 10 kHz 4 5 V 270 15 10 kHz 2V 40 15 10 kHz 4 5 V 90 15 Arbitrary This tests the integrity of the waveform memory The waveform memory stores the waveforms that are being generated at the output Waveform Memory connector and therefore flaws in the memory can cause distortions Operation 6 30 and impurity of the output waveforms Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949
248. cute knob to update the instrument Some controls in this panel also appear in other panels When you change a parameter in this panel the other panels are updated automatically The functional groups listed above are explained in detail below General Parameters The General Parameters group contains two parameters Amplitude and Offset To access a parameter click on its name The LED next to the parameter then changes to on and the display shows the current value You may use the dial keyboard or TT and J keys to adjust the value After you change the value click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 Wave Mode The Wave Mode group is used for selecting which of the available waveforms will be generated at the output connector The 3172 provides five types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary Sequenced Modulated and Half Cycle Click one of these buttons to select the waveform type The default function type is Standard If you want to change the Standard waveform parameters you may select Standard from the Panels bar Run Mode Using the controls in the Run Mode group you may select Continuous mode or one of the interrupted modes Triggered Gated or Burst There is no additional panel for Continuous mode 4 7 3172 User Manual 4 8 Publication Number 980949 Rev H but if you click one of the other run mode options then you may adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger panel SYNC Output
249. cy control lets you set the output frequency of the selected waveform shape When this control is selected and highlighted you may modify it using the dial keyboard or TT Hi keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new value 10 MHz Ref The 10 MHz group contains buttons that control the source of the 10 MHz reference for standard waveforms The 10 MHz clock is the reference that feeds the sample clock and the DDS clock and therefore determines accuracy and stability The internal 10 MHz source has 1 PPM stability over the operating temperature range and a time stability of 1 PPM per year The accuracy of the internal source is adjustable but will shift with time and temperature When better accuracy or stability is required or when clock synchronization to other devices is necessary you may select another source The 10 MHz source options are Internal from the built in source External applied to the front panel 10 MHz input connector CLK10 Available on the VXI backplane The CLK10 source has the least accuracy and stability of the three options but is useful for synchronization with other VXI modules The Arbitrary Sequence panel Figure 4 8 is invoked by clicking the Arbitrary Sequence button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary Sequence Panel from the Panels menu the 3172 will not change its output
250. d Waveform Square Wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 50 Q 4 Connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the W2 to the Oscilloscope input 6 Configure the W2 as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Sequence Seq Advance Step Amplitude 2V Trigger Source External Output On 7 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segment 1 Sine 1000 points Segment 2 Triangle 1000 points Segment 3 Square 1000 points Segment 4 Sinc 1000 points Segment 5 Gaussian Pulse 1000 points 8 Using ArbConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 1 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 1 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 1 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 1 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 1 Test Procedure 1 Press the Manual Trigger on the function generator and observe that the waveforms advance through the sequence table repeatedly Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 23 3172 User Manual Single Advance Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3 Note Leave the same setup for the next test Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation Same preparation as for previous step except change mode to single sequence advance 1 Change Oscilloscope configuration to single Test Procedure 1 Press the Manual Trigger on the function generator and observe that one cycle waveform advances through the sequence table
251. d first and enter other pulse parameters in a descending order A list of setting conflicts is given later in this chapter The 3172 P2 has five basic pulse modes Normal Delayed Double Hold Duty Cycle and External Width Control Use the following commands to select the pulse modes puls mod norm The 3172 P2 outputs the normal pulse waveform The parameters that control the pulse shape are period width polarity and transitions puls mod del The 3172 P2 outputs the normal pulse but delayed from the sync output by a pre determined delay time Use the puls del command to program the delay value puls mod doub The 3172 P2 outputs double pulses The second pulse is delayed from the first pulse by a pre programmed delay time Use the puls doub del command to program the delay value puls mod hold The 3172 P2 generates a normal pulse waveform with a fixed ratio of pulse width to period regardless of the period setting Use the puls dcyc command to program the duty cycle value puls mod ewid The width control of the 3172 P2 output pulse is referenced to an external input where signals crossing a certain threshold level determine the width of the pulse This function can also be used for amplitude to pulse width conversion The basic pulse mode is the Single Pulse Single pulse defines the shape of a single pulse only In continuous operating mode it appears as a string of pulses with constant period width and amplitude In trigge
252. d parameters Ignore this section of the manual if you do not have the P2 module installed in your 3172 Module Only carrier There are two independent pulse generator channels in each P2 module use the command inst sel to control individual channels In case you have 3172 W2P2 the pulse channels are designated as 2 and 3 but for the 3172 P2P2 four channels the channels are designated as 1 2 3 and 4 Figure 5 1 shows the channel designation for the various models Table 5 11 Pulse Waveform Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURCce PULSe MODe NORMal DELayed DOUBle HOLDdcycle EWID NORM P2 PERiod 20e 9 to 10 1e 3 P2 WIDTh 7e 9 to 10 100e 6 P2 DCYCle 1 to 99 50 P2 DELay Oto 10 0 P2 DOUBle DELay 0 to 10 200e 6 P2 POLarity NORMal COMPlement INVerted NORM P2 TRANsition STATe FAST UNear SYMMetrical FAST P2 LEADing 5e 9 to 5e 3 10e 6 P2 TRAiling 5e 9 to 5e 3 10e 6 P2 PULSe MODe NORMal DELayed DOUBle HOLDdcycle EWIDth Description This command will program the mode of the pulse Pulse mode options are Single pulse Delayed pulse Double pulse Hold duty cycle pulse External width pulse and PWM1 Parameters Name NORMal DELayed 5 94 Type Discrete Discrete Default NORM Description Selects the normal pulse output In triggered run mode this selection generates a single pul
253. d programs the frequency of the half cycle waveforms in units of hertz Hz It has no affect on the frequency of other waveform functions Parameters Astronics Test Systems 5 99 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the frequency of the half cycle waveform in units 1e6 of Hz This parameter does not affect the frequency of other waveform functions Response The 3172 returns the present half cycle frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned HALFcycle PHASe lt phase gt Description This command programs the start phase of the half cycle sine and triangle waveform This command has no affect on other waveform functions Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter for the half cycle sine and triangle waveforms in units of degrees The phase can be programmable with resolution of 0 05 throughout the entire frequency range of the half cycle function Response The 3172 returns the present start phase value HALFcycle SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare Description This command defines the type of half cycle waveform that will be available at the output connector Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the half c
254. d to define the sequence When programming a waveform function you must consider the run mode since combinations of waveform types that are legal in one mode may not be legal in a different mode For example arbitrary and sequenced waveforms that do not conflict in Continuous mode may conflict in Burst mode The 3172 offers five run modes Continuous Triggered Re triggered Gated Burst In Continuous mode the 3172 repeats the selected waveform continuously The other four modes are known as interrupted that is the output does not generate waveforms until an event initiates a single or multiple output cycle Interrupted modes require a single trigger or multiple triggers to initiate output cycles Trigger events come from various inputs such as VXlbus backplane trigger lines or the front panel connector Information on selecting a run mode and trigger source is given in the following paragraphs Use the following commands to select run modes init cont on Selects Continuous mode This is the default state of the instrument Use this command to return to Continuous run mode from any other interrupted mode init cont off De selects Continuous mode If you did not previously select a specific interrupted mode the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode 3 7 3172 User Manual Continuous Run Mode Triggered Run Mode 3 8 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Upon power up the 3172 defaults to
255. data stream that will cause the 3172 to hop from one amplitude level to shifted amplitude level and vice versa Data format is a string of 0 and 1 which define when the output generates base level and when it shifts amplitude to the ASK value 0 defines base level amplitude 1 defines shifted amplitude level Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the ASK data list Below you can see how an ASK data table is constructed The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 3172 will step through this list outputting either base or shifted amplitudes depending on the data list Zero will generate base level and One will generate shifted amplitude Note that the waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample ASK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt ask_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to shift from base to shifted amplitude and vice versa j Use the following commands for programming the PSK parameters PSK Modulation The PSK function can shift from start to shifted phase setting within Programming the range of 0 to 360 at a frequency determined by the rate value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the PSK data table The commands for programming the phase shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes
256. de 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Run Mode Burst Burst Count 5 Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Freq 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Re trigger On Re trig Delay 200 us Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify re triggered FM burst standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Repetitive burst of 5 cycle sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Re trigger delay 200 us Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail 6 36 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual FM Arbitrary Equipment Oscilloscope Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation EM Mod Waveform Arbitrary AON Carrier Freq 1 MHz FM SCLK 2 5 MS s Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare open the FM Composer and download the following waveform Wavelength 4000 points Waveform 4 cycles
257. displayed pulse Open The Open Ctrl O menu item lets you choose a previously saved pulse file and load it to the Pulse Composer graph The PLS file extension which is a text format is supported by this operation ll x Deng Bao Vertical Scale 10 V 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 75 2ms 7 52ms Div Astronics Test Systems Full Train 7 Current E Sea 8 Ae F om CH2 View wll W Pulse Editor Section4 lt DCIntervals gt Section Structure m Pulse Train Design Format index Level miwal IA Cer Ee Time Level Points d 1 1 0 0 5 bS SES t 2 5 Append Insert Delete 3 2 0 0 7 3 2 4 2 Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units Mm Section Start 40 ms Repeat 2 Duration x A 35 2 ms F a OO d OM EON Figure 4 42 Pulse Composer Screen Save The Save Ctrl S menu item lets you store your active waveform as a text file with a pls or wav extension If this is the first time you save your pulse the Save As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name path and format pls or wav for your pulse file 4 63 3172 User Manual Edit Menu 4 64 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Save As Use the Save As menu item the first time you save your pulse It will let you select name location and format for your pulse file Print With this menu selecti
258. dual memory segments Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Waveform Studio Segment table Seq State File name Length 1 Mapped C Wav16bit pulse way 1024 2 Mapped CA Wav 16bit sin3 way 1024 3 Mapped C ei 1024 4 Mapped C4 Wav 1 6bit Complex way 5 Waveform Shape lt segment 4 gt AMM AZ Figure 4 11 Sequence Table Example The Sequence Table is highlighted in Figure 4 11 To access the Sequence table click anywhere on the Sequence Table area If it was not yet it will turn white as opposed to the Segment Table area that turns gray There are five major elements that you should consider while programming a sequence table They are Link Seg Loops Adv and Sync These terms are explained below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the links in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations to how you associate links to segments except that you cannot program assign segments to the sequence table that were not defined previously Loops This parame
259. e 4 24 ECLT Synchronization Example 4 38 So far the X Instruments Synchronization fields were discussed and described The following describes the functions of the buttons Clear All Assignments used to completely reset the table Note that only editable fields are affected by this action Once pressed the table will look as shown in Figure 4 21 Move Up used to change the position of a module to place it toward the top of the group and master status Note that this operation affects the line that is currently highlighted Move Down used to change the position of a module so it is placed below its current position in the group and can be used to demote a master to a servant Note that this operation affects a line Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual that is currently highlighted Path LBUS ECLLT is used for selecting the connection path LBUS specifies a VXI local bus connection and requires that the master is plugged into the leftmost position and all servants are plugged into adjacent slots to the right to the master module ECLT specifies the VXI backplane ECLTrg line synchronization mode For this mode the location of the master and servant units in the chassis is not crucial because the trigger lines run across the backplane through all slots Apply used to prepare the instruments for the synchronization sequence This button must precede the activation of the syn
260. e Chor ebessen eo 1 13 Figure 1 8 P2 Module I O Gone Chor iiccceitiettneticrcerirerdeopei a nadine Eeer deene 1 16 Figure 1 9 Segment 1 Sine x x Waveiomm AAA 1 19 Figure 1 10 Segment 2 Sine Waveform AEN 1 20 Figure 1 11 Segment 3 Pulse Wavetomm ANEN 1 20 Figure 1 12 Sequenced VEER eehgecheeEkg SEAN EEEEeNESEN SE doit ackveanna yienacteaavaetviaeeea tee 1 20 Figure 2 1 Switch S1 Set to Logical Address 2 2 1 Figure 2 2 Local Bus LBUS Jumper Installation ANNE 2 3 Figure 3 1 AroConnection Example of a Complex Waveiorm 3 21 Figure 3 2 Sequence Table Created in ArbConnection An 3 26 Figure 3 3 Single Pulse Parameters Gummar ENNEN 3 38 Figure 3 4 Delayed Pulse EE 3 39 Figure 3 5 Double Pulse liest geed enacaepeactytsveueede gaceesavtaneatydeiecckieaivectyde ehreaeateienat es 3 41 Figure 3 6 Hold Duty Cycle Mode Exvample AAA 3 43 Figure 3 7 External Pulse Width Mode Positive Slope Example sssssssseseeessserererrnrrrsssrrrrrrrne 3 44 Figure 3 8 External Pulse Width Mode Negative Slope Example ssssssssssssssssersserrnrrrsssrrrrrrne 3 44 Figure 3 9 Pulse Polarity Onions ET 3 45 Figure 3 10 Fast and Linear Transitions Compared eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneereneererernnenrnne rnnr rnrn nnna 3 46 Figure 3 11 Linear Transition Fanger i egieki n dees deed Age 3 48 Figure 3 12 Output Waveform with Error 500 Example 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeetee enna 3 51 Figure 3 13 Outpu
261. e ECLTrg0 line as the reference input Response The 3172 returns EXT TTLT lt n gt or ECLTO depending on the selected PLL reference source setting PHASe2 ADJust lt phase gt Description This command programs the phase offset between the reference input and the 3172 output The output start phase is shifted in reference to the external signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 180 to 180 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the reference and the output waveform The phase is programmed in units of degrees Note however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the waveform For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 35 but another waveform that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 6 Response The 3172 returns the present phase offset value in units of degrees 5 108 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual PHASe2 FINE lt fine_phase gt 7 Description This command programs the phase offset between the reference input and the 3172 output in smaller increments The output start phase is shifted in reference to the external signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 36 to 36 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the reference and the output waveform in smaller increments The phase is programmed in units of d
262. e Panels toolbar is shown in Figure 4 3 By clicking the buttons on the Panels toolbar you may access the corresponding virtual control panels detailed later in this chapter When you launch ArbConnection the Output panel is initially open arbConnection lt lt Tabor Electronics gt gt 3172 Demo cad ioj x File View System Help Link s172 we offline lt No ad D Ge RM Figure 4 2 ArbConnection Menu and Link Bar Astronics Test Systems Operation Modulation Figure 4 3 Main Panels Toolbar 4 3 3172 User Manual Control Panels 4 4 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Each control panel replicates the look and feel of a bench top instrument s front panel Refer to the Output panel in Figure 4 5 Other panels are similar so the following description of the Output panel serves as guide for controlling the rest of the panels Looking at Figure 4 5 identify the following controls and indicators Pushbuttons LEDs Radio buttons Dial Digital display The functions of these are as follows Pushbuttons Clicking the mouse on a pushbutton toggles an option on and off For example clicking the State button in the Output section turns the 3172 output on To help indicate this the button then appears as though pushed in and a red bar at the center of the button appears to be illuminated Clicking the Output button a second time turns off the output and then the button no longer appears pushed in o
263. e W2 AM IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel 2 input of the oscilloscope Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Configure model W2 controls as follows Function External AM Output On Carrier Freq 1 MHz nP Test Procedure 1 Modify the amplitude of the external function generator and verify modulation depth operation on the oscilloscope using Table 6 33 Table 6 33 Modulation Depth External AM Tests Function Gen Modulation Oscilloscope Amplitude Depth Reading Pass Fail 1V 10 5V 50 10 V 100 Astronics Test Systems 6 39 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H FSK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FSK Carrier Freq 2 MHz Shift Frequency 4 MHz Baud Rate 10 kHz Marker Index 1 Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step FSK list with alternating 0 and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Squarewave Period 0 2 ms Max Freq
264. e a tee Gane adi 7 64 Pulse Adj StMENtS siise miina a a a be a a ae a eee ea 7 64 Updating the ele EE 7 65 Updating Registered based Firmware 1 721 7 65 Updating Message based Firmware AANEREN 7 67 Appendix EE A 1 3172 Module Specifications iicascanceisssansnscaniuseinveinensovansustescavandensnesesnsdannusetuseneseinaseavausersdes A 1 3172 VXI Module Gpechtcattons ke A 1 Backplane Multiple Instrument Synchronization c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeea A 1 Leading Ge Ee EE A 1 VXIbus General Jotoratort zeit tienen heats as eee ny had athelae AER A 1 HEEN de ee eg Me cach E dace A 2 W2 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Specifications ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeaeeeeeeees A 2 PU WON EE A 2 Frequency ACCUIACY ss deeg gaie a n a EE aa EAEE e R EA O A E EE a EAA Ea EE de A 2 HEET ee ue A 3 Main AUNT EE A 3 Eltere Se Saad e ttale Santee Te grate he Soa gala anda ee eege A 4 Trigger Input Characteristics xtccscsswaui ote ape ceed ele Ne stable eee GENEE Een A 4 TOVA Bene ary A RE EE POE Se PEER OEE PERE PE MEE TEE ESSE OEE SEP POR ee PSE See A 4 PLE Ate cat one cet Costs cet Eteach cet To eld acini ca a EE A 5 PING MarAGtCNS EE A 5 External AM Characteristics eegenen ESCHER Ee Ne Eege een A 6 Function Generator Chatten euer Seet t dees dee EE deg A 6 SOWA ore Saab e e a Ee A 6 Sine Wave Performance standard and arbitrary waveforms ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeennneeeeeeees A 6
265. e advance options Operation Automatic Advance Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the Counter as follows Function 2 Connect the counter channel B to the W2 output TOTB Measurement 3 Configure the W2 as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Sequence Run Mode Trigger Trigger Source BUS Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segments 1to5 Wavelength 128 points Waveform 1 cycle square 5 Using AroConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 100 000 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 100 000 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 100 000 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 100 000 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 100 000 Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger button and observe that counter reading is 500 000 counts Reset counter and repeat the test a few times Every time the counter reading should be 500 000 counts exactly Test Results Pass Fail 6 22 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Step Advance Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Triggere
266. e dialog box If you are already familiar with the changes and do not wish to see the download summary every time you download a pulse waveform you can check the box and it will not be shown on future downloads You can restore this summary by selecting the View gt gt Download Summary menu item Mode of Operation This describes mode of operation setting to be used after completion of the pulse download This field could display one of two options Arbitrary or Sequenced Pay attention to the note that says Select from the menu View gt gt Options Since for this example we checked the Force Pulse Train to Single Segment see Figure 4 50 so that the generator forces the waveform mode to be Arbitrary and thus only one segment can be loaded with the pulse train Memory Management By selecting the arbitrary mode of operation the pulse train is forced to a single segment This summary shows which segment has been populated and how much memory is needed to build the required pulse train Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The FM Composer Astronics Test Systems Instrument Settings Shows the amplitude offset and sample clock settings that will be changed on the generator The settings in this summary cannot be affected from the Pulse Editor options settings These are computed and modified automatically for the current pulse train pattern and will change from pattern to patte
267. e is 1 ms Width The Width parameter specifies the width of the pulse at the 50 point between its high and low level settings The pulse width interval is not affected by the setting of other parameters such as rise and fall time Use the following command to program the pulse width puls wid lt value gt The pulse width is programmable from 7 ns to 10 seconds The default value is 100 ns High Level The high level parameter defines the top amplitude level of the Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is larger than the low level setting does not exceed 20 V and does not fall short of the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting Use the following command to program the pulse high level Volt hil lt value gt The high level is range dependable it can be programmable from 19 995 V to 20 V The default value is 2 5 V Low Level The low level parameter defines the lowest amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the high level setting does not exceed 20 V and does meets the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting requirement Use the following command to program the pulse high level Volt lol lt value gt The high level is range dependable it can be programmable from 20 V to 19 995 V The default value is 2 5 V Delayed Pulse Mode Delayed Pulse mode is a special mode that delays the pulse o
268. e is a frequency linearity and or accuracy issue 160 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setup 2 Setup 3 Setup 4 Astronics Test Systems 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 160 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 2 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 180 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 180 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 3 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 200 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 200 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 4 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 110 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3172 as follows SCLK 110 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 7 21 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 1 Adjust CAL SETup 5 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 5 120 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV R
269. e next signal and programmed from 100 ns to 20 seconds with a resolution of 20 ns As previously mentioned the 3172 has four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and Burst However the W2 behaves differently when generating modulated waveforms While the modulated and non modulated run modes are similar the modulated run mode offers two start options for the output signal during idle Idle is the period of time before the output is triggered or gated to generate a modulated waveform The first option is where the W2 before receiving a trigger event outputs continuous non modulated waveforms When the trigger or gate occurs the W2 outputs the modulated waveform When that waveform has completed the instrument resumes outputting non modulated waveforms The second option is where the W2 before receiving a trigger or gate outputs a DC level When triggered or gated the W2 outputs the modulated waveform When that waveform has completed the instrument resumes outputting a DC level A single or dual waveform generator in a single slot no matter how advanced may become a limiting factor for applications requiring 1 25 3172 User Manual Multiple 3172 W2 Modules PLL Synchronization W2 only Phase Modulation W2 only 1 26 Publication Number 980949 Rev H multiple simultaneous waveforms Various techniques exist to synchronize the outputs of multiple waveform generators but none are simple because real
270. e output is enabled only while the trigger signal is above the trigger level threshold voltage The second mode is transition edge sensitive where the gate opens on the first transition and closes on a subsequent transition Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Burst Mode Trigger Sources Modulation Run Modes W2 only Synchronization of Astronics Test Systems Regardless of the selected gating mode the generator always completes the waveform at the end of the gate and then idles at a DC level Note that the W2 modules have a single input for trigger and gated signals but the P2 module has two inputs one for trigger and the other for gate On the P2 module you first need to associate the trigger and gate inputs with the appropriate channel because there is only one input available for both The Burst mode is an extension of the Triggered mode where the generator is programmed to output a pre determined number of waveforms The sources to trigger a burst are the same as for the Triggered mode The 3172 responds to a variety of trigger sources such as the TRIG IN connector backplane trigger lines TTLTrg0 7 and a software trigger There are also two built in self generating trigger generators One repeats itself at pre programmed intervals from 100 us to 20 seconds The other has a programmable delay time The re trigger delay is measured from the end of the signal to the start of th
271. e performed during normal calibration cycles except if the pulse response of the output stage has been degraded and does not meet the published specification limits or after a repair has been executed on these very circuit Pulse Response Mechanical calibration Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20 dB feed through attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Square Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the oscilloscope input Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50 Q 3 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20 mV Adjustment 1 Set CAL SETup 50 2 Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 3 Adjust RV1 and RV3 for best pulse response 8 ns type 5 aberrations Invoke ArbConnection 2 Click the Module button in the Panels bar Select the channel to calibrate 3 Click the System button in the Panels bar Then click Calibration The Calibration Panel Figure 7 17 will appear 7 41 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse parameters Figure 7 17 P2 Pulse Generator Channel 1 Calibration Panel Note Parameters that are adjusted only during Factory Calibration are enclosed in parentheses All other parameters are calibrated during Factory Calibration or Periodic Calibration Calibrations are marked with numbers from 1 to 51 and should be carried out exactly in the order as numbered on the panel The numbers that are associated with each adjustment
272. e placed on these lines can come from a number of sources described in the outp trig sour command before Response The 3172 returns n 0 when a specific backplane trigger line is off or n 1 when a specific backplane trigger line is turned on n can range from 0 to 7 ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 Description This command selects the reference source for the sample clock generator Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects an internal source The internal source is a 1ppm TCXO EXTernal Discrete Activates the external reference input An external reference must be connected to the 3172 for it to continue normal operation CLK10 Discrete Selects the backplane CLK10 source The CLK10 clock 5 30 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual is routed in parallel to all backplane connectors and therefore all of the modules that are installed in the chassis can use the same clock source This is particularly useful for synchronization purposes Response The 3172 returns INT EXT or CLK10 depending on the present 3172 reference clock source setting FREQuency EXTernal Description This command queries the frequency at the trigger input The same trigger is also used for phase locking to an external signal This command returns the frequency value of the external signal only when the instrument is set to PLL mode Response The 3172 measures and re
273. e snnassaceca cevescansdasiceticleeecacedandens ee Eege ek A 14 EE Eeer A 14 Pulse Width Double Pulse cc ccecccccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeegseeeeeseeeseaeeeeeteeneeeeees A 14 Linear TRANSITIONS ere o r tation edatrions than tain sa shawustealraind sd amrwnstdncuaanawe sdaltnine sd buawbidan ERER AR A 14 ele BREET A 15 External e ie WEE A 15 PAS SPCCINCAUOINS e tere ee eege ee eege hae A 15 Input Characteristics piesne a sia NEE A 15 ETENE EE A 15 Amplitier e EE A 15 Bypass IS iat e eee ate hice Sarah den ee seer eet A 15 Output e EE A 15 Oho EEN A 15 Square Wave ee EE A 15 Sine Wave ee A 16 MAGICA EE A 16 EET IOUT Ten EE A 16 Astronics Test Systems xiii 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank xiv Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table of Figures Figure 124 3172 CONMMIQUPALONS EE 1 4 Figure 1 2 Racal Instruments 3172 W2P2 Configuration Shown sssssssseseesssssssrrrnnnrsserrrrerre 1 5 Figure 1 3 AroConnection Control PanelSwescciaceccciieticd el sne ive selon bade epee decnaiede Dees S 1 7 Figure 1 4 AroConnection Wave Composer Example ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeecnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 1 7 Figure 1 5 AroConnection Pulse Composer Example ssssssseenerrreesssererrrnrtrsserrrrrrnnnrsserrrrernnee 1 8 Figure 1 6 AroConnection Serial Data Composer Exvample 1 8 Figure 1 7 W2 Module O Con
274. e the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 6 995 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 22 for DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV 8 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 20V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 8 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 23 for DMM reading of 8 5 V 40 mV 9 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 9 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 24 for DMM reading of 9 5 V 40 mV Setup 25 1 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter
275. e vertical adjustment on the oscilloscope adjust the vertical trace to show exactly 6 vertical divisions 2 Perform rise fall time tests output using Table 1 4 Table 1 4 Rise Fall Time Tests PARAMETER ERROR LIMIT OSCILLOSCOPE FAIL TESTED READING Equipment Oscilloscope Load Resistance x100 high voltage probe Overshoot Tests Preparation 6 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Time Base 500 ns div Amplitude 50 V div 7 Connect the A3 output to the load resistance 8 Connect the x100 high voltage probe across the load resistance 9 Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Function Standard Waveform Square Frequency 10kHz Amplitude 8Vpp Output On 10 Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 Input Test Procedure 3 Using the variable vertical adjustment on the oscilloscope adjust the vertical trace to show exactly 6 vertical divisions 4 Perform overshoot tests using Table 1 5 Table 1 5 Overshoot Tests PARAMETER ERROR LIMIT OSCILLOSCOPE FAIL TESTED READING Astronics Test Systems 6 83 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 6 84 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 7 Calibration and Firmware Update n thi This chapter gives instructions for performing calibration and What s in this firmware updates of the 3172 VXlbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator Chapter A A WARNING Abeta A The procedures described i
276. e waveform that has a OV to 3 3V amplitude a 50 duty cycle a 1ms period and a 100ns transition time you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 0 Time interval 0 Cumulative Time 0 Index 2 Level 3 3 Time Interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 1 Index 3 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 4 Level 0 Time interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 6 Index 5 Level 0 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note that as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters and the specified point is marked with a red dot Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Section Structure The term Section Structure is used to define the pulse train s common properties There are four parameters that can be programmed in this group Index Level Time Interval and Cumulative Time Index Is added automatically as you program pulse segments The index line is highlighted as you point and click on pulse segments on the Pulse Editor screen Level Specifies that peak level of the programmed segment As you build the pulse the level window is expended automatically to fit the required amplitude range 4 71 3172 User Manual 4 72 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Time Interval Specifies the time that will lapse for the current index level Y
277. e width measurement function coun func tot Selects the totalize function The counter will detect and count all trigger events from the trigger input You may adjust the gate time and display mode If you want to take continuous counter readings use the default display mode as follows coun disp mod norm Enables continuous measurements and read cycles coun disp mod hold Stops the measurement cycle and performs a single measurement when triggered by a read operation The next measurement cycle may be performed after you clear the counter buffer using the following command coun res Resets the counter clears the output queue and arms the counter for its next measurement event Chapter 5 contains programming references that will allow you to program all of the counter timer parameters Astronics Test Systems 3 33 3172 User Manual Counter Timer Limitations Synchronizing through the Local Bus 3 34 Publication Number 980949 Rev H A summary of counter timer limitations is given below 1 Measurement speed The rate at which the counter performs its measurements depends upon the display mode setting The Normal setting simulates the display of a bench top instrument where the user sees the result of each measurement as it completes The display time is roughly 300 ms allowing enough time to check the result after each gate time cycle The maximum rate is three measurements per second when using low period gate tim
278. e will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned Astronics Test Systems 5 87 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PSK DATA lt psk_data gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 3172 to hop from phase to phase Data format is a string of 0 and 1 which define when the output generates the various phases The size of the data word depends on the PSK function Below you can see how a PSK data table is constructed The PSK data table sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 3172 will step through this list outputting either start or shifted phases depending on the data list Zero will generate start phase and One will generate shifted phase Note that the output waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample PSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt psk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to step from one phase setting to another PSK MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 3172 will generate a pulse designated as PSK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the PSK data list The PSK MARK command is common to all PSK modulation functions Parameters Name R
279. easurement Accuracy Function Generator Setting ror Limits 3172 W2 Duty Cycle Emtee Limits Counter courier Reading Pass Fail 100 kHz 50 5 000 us 100 ns 100 kHz 70 7 00 us 100 ns 7 00pst100ns IT 100 ns 2 Change the counter timer slope to Negative 3 Verify that the pulse width reading is 3 0 us 100 ns Digital Output Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 1 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Configure model W2 controls as follows Digital Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Digital Signals on the Sync Cursor and DIGO to DIG Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 49 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Test Procedures The P2 module is a dual channel pulse generator where each channel can be used separately or jointly depending on the P2 Module application on hand Use the following procedures to check the P2 module against its specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what are the acceptable limits for the specific test If the instrument fails to perform with
280. ecified in Appendix A The half cycle commands are summarized in Table 5 12 5 98 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 12 Half Cycle Command Summary 3172 User Manual Keyword Parameter Form Default Association HAL Fcvcle DELay 200e 9 to 20 1e 6 W2 DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 W2 FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 1e6 W2 PHASe 0 to 360 0 W2 SHAPe SINusoid TRIangle SQUare SIN w2 HALFcycle DELay lt delay gt Description This command programs the interval of which the output idles between half cycles The idle level is normally 0 V except if programmed otherwise with the volt offs command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 200e 9 to 20 Numeric 1e 6 Sets the delay time interval between half cycles in units of seconds Response The 3172 returns the half cycle delay value in units of seconds HALFcycle DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt Description This command programs the duty cycle of the square waveform when the half cycle square shape is selected Note that this command has no effect on the standard square wave duty cycle Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty_cycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Sets the delay time interval between half cycles in units of seconds Response The 3172 returns the square wave duty cycle value in units of percent HALFcycle FREQuency lt freq gt Description This comman
281. eck the Force pulse to one segment option and the 3172 will do some extra muscle flexing to fit the pulse as required To launch the Pulse Composer point and click on the Pulse tab in the Panels bar Figure 4 42 shows an example of the Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer has three main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 42 throughout the descriptions to follow The Pulse Composer menu bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the menus pulls down a list of commands Clicking on a listed command may then either open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example clicking on File and then Exit will cause the immediate termination of the Pulse Composer The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H File Menu e Edit View 3172 User Manual The File menu has 4 menu items that control pulse waveform file operations This menu also can be used to print the active waveform or to exit from Pulse Composer Descriptions of the menu selections from the File pull down menu are given below New The New Ctrl N menu item clears the pulse graph Changes made to the pulse graph should be saved before using the New function because it is destructive to the
282. ed FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Triggered sine waves Sine Frequency 10 kHz Trigger Period 1ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 33 3172 User Manual FM Burst Standard Waveforms Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 2 V Square Connect the function generator output connector to the W2 TRIG IN connector Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Mod Run Mode Burst Burst 5 Trigger Level OV Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure Verify Burst FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Burst of 5 Sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Burst Period 1 ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail 6 34 Astronics
283. editor plus control buttons and the equation field These parts are described below 4 51 3172 User Manual 4 52 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Anchor The anchors define start and end point at which the equation will be generated By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal time scale however the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations Start defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point End defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 16 bits of vertical resolution That means that the equation is computed resolved and generated with 1 65 536 increments and accuracy The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases 1 when the amp parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto Information on these two operations is given later Max defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and
284. eform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 30 Programs the ramp fall time parameter in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present fall time value SINC NCYCle lt N_cycles gt Description This command programs the number of O crossings of the standard SINC pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt N_cycle gt 4to 100 Numeric 10 Programs the number of zero crossings Integer only Response The 3172 returns the present number of zero crossings specified GAUSsian EXPonent lt exp gt Description This command programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform This command has no Astronics Test Systems 5 49 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 1 to 200 Numeric 10 Programs the exponent parameter Response The 3172 returns the present exponent value EXPonential EXPonent lt exp gt Description This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 100 to Numeric 10 Programs the exponent parameter 100 Response The 3172 returns the present exponent value DC
285. egrees Note however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the waveform For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 35 but another waveform that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 6 Response The 3172 returns the present fine phase offset value in units of degrees Astronics Test Systems 5 109 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H LAN Svstem The LAN system configuration commands are available with the z y e Model 3172 only Message Based carrier that has the LAN connector Configuration installed on its front panel Use these commands to configure module Commands address and other LAN parameters It is strongly recommended that this be done with a computer specialist because wrong programming may place the instrument in an unknown configuration which may lock the LAN operation completely and only hard reset will be necessary to restore the instrument to its original defaults ei NOTE Last LAN configuration settings will remain as long as the instrument is turned on New LAN configuration settings will take effect only after the instrument has been powered off and on Table 5 15 LAN Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SYSTem IP ADDRess lt IP_address gt 3172 MASK lt mask gt 3172 GATeway lt gate_way gt 3172 B
286. ell time table does not contain any dwell time information and therefore if you select the fixed option make sure your dwell time is programmed as required Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects the fixed dwell time frequency hops mode VARiable Discrete Select the variable dwell time frequency hops mode Response The 3172 returns FIX or VAR depending on the selected dwell setting FHOP DWELI lt dwell_time gt Description This selects the dwell time for frequency hops when the selected mode is Fixed dwell time hops The dwell time table in this case does not contain the dwell time per step parameters and therefore the value which is programmed with this command remains constant for the entire hop sequence Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dwell_time gt 200e 9 to Numeric 200e 9 Programs dwell time for the fixed dwell time frequency 20 hop function The same dwell time will be valid for each frequency hop Dwell time is programmed in units of s Response Astronics Test Systems 5 89 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H The 3172 returns the present dwell time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FHOP FIX DATA lt fix_hop_data gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the frequency lis
287. elow you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 amplitudes The 3172 will hop through this list outputting the next amplitude each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of ims and the amplitude step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Amplitude Hop Data Array 0 1e0 2e0 3e0 4e 0 5e 0 100e 3 200e 3 300e 3 400e 3 500e 3 Parameters 5 92 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Name Type Description lt fix_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of amplitude values AHOP FIX DATA lt var_hop_data gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the amplitude list The dwell time for each amplitude list item is variable and is supplied in the variable hop table data array Note that the HOP DWEL command has no effect on this sequence Also note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the amplitude hops list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 amplitudes and their associated dwell times The 3172 will hop through this list outputting the next
288. ency Function Generator Error Counter Frequency Setting Limits Ratio Reading Pass Fail 500 Hz 1 00 0 01 5 kHz 1 00 0 01 50 kHz 1 00 0 01 500 kHz 1 00 0 01 5 MHz 1 00 0 01 10 MHz 1 00 0 01 Astronics Test Systems 6 27 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PLL Checks Phase Equipment Counter function generator Offset Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As required by the tests 2 Connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG PLL IN connector Using a T connector connect the same output to the counter input Channel A Use 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the W2 trigger input side 3 Configure the counter as follows Function A gt B Input 50 Q 4 Connect the W2 output to the counter input Channel B 5 Configure the model W2 as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 200 points Output On PLL On Phase Offset As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Verify counter phase readings as specified in Table 6 30 Table 6 30 PLL Tests Phase Offset Function Generator W2 Error Counter Frequency Setting Phase Setting Limits Phase Reading Pass Fail 50 kHz 5 5 L n 90 90 3 169 169 3 100 kHz 5 355 3 90 270 3 169 191 3
289. end anchor points Level Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new amplitude and offset boundaries If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation The same way you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset If you check the Manual option you ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again If you check the Auto option your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field You will be using the Equation field for writing your equations Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation Click on the Store button to store your equation if Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Writing Equations Astronics Test Sy
290. ended equipment for calibration is listed in Table 7 1 Other Recommended test instruments may be used only if their specifications equal or Test Equipment exceed the required characteristics Table 7 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No Manufacturer Digital Oscilloscope with jitter package LC684D LeCroy Digital Multi meter DMM 2000 Keithley Frequency Counter Rubidium reference 2202R Astronics Test Systems Function Generator with manual trigger WW2571A Tabor Electronics Accessories Coaxial cable One end fitted with BNC male Other end fitted with contact part number DM53740 Cinch or Cannon or Astronics part number 602300 900 BNC T connector 2 BNC females with 1 BNC male Adapter dual banana jacks with BNC male Feed through termination 500 0 1 5W Required for Factory Calibration only Although Model 3172 can operate at ambient temperatures from 0 C to 50 C calibration should be performed under laboratory conditions with an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and relative humidity of less than 80 Environment 7 2 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual e e Some calibration steps require removal of the right side panel Configuration cover To keep ihe infor temperature stable leave the cover on during warm up and calibration except while making adjustments that require its removal To facilitate re
291. eneeesumettnentoen eames 3 20 Managing Arbitrary Waveform Memory ooo ecceeeceesessesteseseesesseeesseseeseecseeeceneueeteneeneneeeesees 3 20 Memory Management Commands cccccceceeececcceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaes 3 21 Loading Arbitrary EE EE 3 22 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency ENEE 3 24 Using the External Sample Clock Input se eeh Dee Nee aed a ae ee 3 24 Generating Sequenced Waveloms nenne 3 25 SEQUENCE Runa Le EE 3 27 Controlling the Sequence Advance Modes AEN 3 28 Generating EE 3 29 NEE HE 3 29 Eed EE 3 29 Modulation Krater tt Eege etc 3 30 Controlling the Carrier Frequency EE 3 31 Controlling the Carrier Base Line ENEE ENNEN 3 31 Generating Half Cycle Et E 3 32 Using the Co nter H EE 3 32 Counter Timer Limitations xi c sssccceeanceescaneteesgetacedscbetensddes See iets EEN ENEE 3 34 Synchronizing through the Local BUS ccceeeeceeeeeeee teeter eeteeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaeeeeeeees 3 34 Controlling P2 Pulse Modes and Parameters senssnnnsneeesesenerrrrresserertnterrrnnrrsserrrnrrnnnnsserrrnne 3 36 Generating Pulse EE ed EE 3 36 Selecting a Pulse MOOG saueren age NekEeNESEEEENE beens ph eee R T 3 37 Single TE 3 37 Delayed Pulse Kleent sence a e ee nal ee ee 3 39 Depens gebeten ee 3 41 m10 eler ee M 3 42 External Pulse Width Oe 3 43 Programming PulSe Polarity EE 3 45 Applying Linear Transitions cc2 seecctse2k EENS EAR ceed eedetecdin ds Gad dele EEN 3 46 P
292. enerator when to shift from carrier to shifted frequency and vice versa ASK Modulation Use the following commands for programming the ASK parameters S ASK control is internal The amplitude will toggle between two Programming amplitude settings at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the ASK data table The commands for programming the amplitude shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes 5 84 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ASK lt amplitude gt Description This programs the normal amplitude setting The amplitude shifts when the pointer in the data array points to gl Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt amplitude gt 0 to 20 Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude setting in units of volt Response The 3172 returns the present amplitude value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned ASK SHIFted lt shift_ampl gt Description This programs the shifted amplitude The amplitude shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_Lampl gt 0 to 20 Numeric 1 Programs the shifted amplitude setting in units of volt Response The 3172 returns the present shifted amplitude value
293. ength As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform Sinewave distortion tests using Table 6 14 Table 6 14 Sinewave Distortion DAC Output Tests W2 Sinewave W2 Reading SCLK Settings Points Frequency Limits 400 kS s 4000 100 0 Hz 40 Ms s 4000 10 00 kHz lt 0 2 100 Ms s 2000 50 00kHz lt 0 2 100 Ms s 1000 _100 00kHz lt 0 2 Sinewave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DAC Output Preparation 1 Connect W2 output to the spectrum analyzer input Use 50Q and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the W2 as follows Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude 5V Output On Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sinewave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 15 6 10 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 6 15 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC oan Test W2 Freq Reading Spectrum Analyzer Settings Limits gt 44 dBc 100 E gt 44 dBc Ms 10 MHz gt 44 dBc 1 MHz 100 MHz 30 MHz gt 29dBc 10 MHz 150 MHz OOO TOO 0 D 2 Change amplitude to 10V and perform sine wave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 16 Table 6 16 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test Continued W2 Freq Reading Spectr Analyzer Settings Limits gt 35 dBc 100 set gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 10 MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 30 MHz gt 25dBc 1 MHz _150 MHz KR 100 MHz
294. eparation 1 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL 2 Set CAL SETUP 61 3 Set CAL VAL 120 4 Set CAL SETUP 63 Adjustment None required This step is part of the preparation for Setup 10 below Setup 10 Phase 0 Equipment Digital Oscilloscope Function Generator BNC T Connector one male to two females BNC to BNC coaxial cable Preparation 1 Prepare the external function generator waveform as follows Amplitude 5 Vp p Waveform Square Frequency 10 kHz 2 Set the oscilloscope channel impedance as follows Channel 1 1 MQ Channel 2 500 3 Connect a BNC T connector to oscilloscope channel 1 4 Connect one end of the T connector to the function generator output 5 Connect the other end of the T connector to the TRG PLL input of the 3152B Astronics Test Systems 7 23 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 6 Connect the 3152B output to oscilloscope channel 2 7 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL Adjustment 8 Adjust CAL SETUP 62 for counter reading of 250 ns to 250 ns Setup 11 Phase Fine 0 Equipment Counter Function Generator T Connector BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Prepare the external function generator waveform as follows Amplitude 5 Vp p Waveform Square Frequency 10 kHz 2 Configure
295. epeatedly cross the trigger level threshold setting Signals having a low slew rate may cause jitter because of noise Therefore make sure that the transition time is fast enough to minimize jitter The TRIG IN input is also used in FSK ASK and PSK modes where the output shifts between two frequencies amplitudes or phases The output signals have the nominal frequency amplitude and phase when the TRIG IN level is at logic 0 and a shifted frequency amplitude or phase when the TRIG IN level is at logic 1 This input accepts a 10 MHz reference signal At the factory this input is configured for TTL logic levels It may be changed to 0 dBm but only by qualified service personnel The EXT 10 MHz input is available for applications requiring a more accurate stable reference than can be attained by the 1 ppm TCXO reference built into the W2 module The reference input is active only after selecting the External 10 MHz Reference Source option The SYNC OUT connector outputs a single TTL level pulse for synchronizing other instruments such as an oscilloscope to the output waveform The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform The location of the SYNC signal relative to the waveform is programmable as is the pulse width When the sweep or any other modulation function is enabled the SYNC connector is also useful as a marker output For digital patterns the SYNC output is controlled by bit M12 J1 4 of the 16
296. er Response The 3172 returns SIN TRI SQU RAMP or ARB depending on the selected function shape setting FM FREQuency lt fm_freq gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fm_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in 350e3 units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating waveforms only is affected Response The 3172 returns the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM FREQuency RASTer lt arb_fm_freq gt Description This command sets the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary modulating waveform Arbitrary modulating waveforms must be created in an external utility and downloaded to the FM arbitrary waveform memory before this function can be used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt arb_fm_freq gt 1 to 2 5e6Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary modulating waveform in units of S s Response The 3172 returns the present sample clock of the arbitrary modulating waveform value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned Astronics Test Systems 5 77
297. erates level above 0 V only and the negative range generates negative levels below 0 V only Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Run Mode Astronics Test Systems To work with the Run Mode Control Panel Figure 4 6 click on the Run Mode button on the Panels toolbar Note that when you invoke the Run Mode Control Panel the trigger mode does not change To change the run mode use the Output panel The trigger parameters and settings in the Run Mode Control Panel take effect only if you have selected an appropriate run mode The Run Mode Control Panel has its controls divided into the following groups Trigger Modifier The Trigger Modifier group provides control over the retrigger interval and delay time To change the trigger delay or the re trigger interval click on one of these parameters The digital display then shows the current value which you may adjust using the dial keyboard or the T and HI keys After you adjust the value click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 Figure 4 6 Run Mode Control Panel Trigger Source The 3172 accepts triggers from a number of sources Bus VXI Backplane TTL Trigger 0 through 7 and ECL Trigger 1 External and Internal The VXI backplane trigger lines can synchronize operation with other devices residing in the VXlbus chassis The various trigger source options are Bus Disables all trigger inputs and allows software t
298. erator The intervals of the internal trigger generator are measured from start waveform to start waveform When the 3172 is prepared to operate in re trigger mode the output is waiting for an external or remote trigger signal Once triggered the instrument self triggers automatically but this time the intervals of the re trigger generator are measured from the end of the waveform to the start of the next waveform Re trigger can be initiated from any of the selected advance options The re trigger command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Set the 3172 to be in an interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the re trigger mode on and off Note that this parameter is not available for the P2 module Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option RETRigger TIMe lt time gt Description This parameter specifies the amount of time that will elapse between the end of the delivery of the waveform cycle and the beginning of the next waveform cycle Re trigger can be initiated from any of the selected advance options The re trigger intervals are measured from waveform end to waveform start The re trigger command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 3172 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters
299. erform the following steps e For Windows XP Vista 7 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type IPCONFIG 3 Press lt Enter gt If you need more information you can run ipconfig with the all option by typing IPCONFIG all at the DOS prompt This shows you all of the settings for the computer Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device Select the Ethernet adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the drop down list onnectin The 3172 has a front panel USB connector that allows connection to a C ect g to USB memory device This USB port has only one purpose to allow the USB Port the downloading of waveform data directly from a USB memory device without going through the VXI controller The waveform data has to be stored on the USB memory device in a special format The negotiation between the USB memory device and the instrument is automatic The application program can then select the loaded memory segment for use in an application Astronics Test Systems 2 7 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 2 8 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 3 Operation Overview Output Termination Astronics Test Systems This chapter explains how to operate the 3172 Unlike a bench top instrument the 3172 requires a computer to turn on functions change paramete
300. es The Hold display mode allows One reading at a time The reading starts when the input senses a valid trigger signal and ends after the gate has closed Processing time for the reading and the display is roughly 100 ms In this mode the counter can take a maximum of ten readings per second 2 Gate time period must be higher than the signal period The gate must open for an interval that allows enough transitions to pass through the counter gate If the gate time is too short to measure a signal the gate will open but no results can be obtained 3 Auxiliary functions disable waveform generation When the Counter Timer mode is selected all operations of the waveform generator are stopped and the waveform memory is purged Use the following commands to set up and control synchronization phase locking of two modules through the Local Bus inst coup path lbus_ This sets the coupling synchronization path to the Local Bus LBUS This command must be sent to the master module and the slave module s inst coup mode mast Send this command to the 3152B that will be the master module to which other modules will be phase locked inst coup mode slav Send this command to the slave module s that will be phase locked to the master module inst coup staton Send this command to the master module and then to the slave module It enables coupling phase locking Example The following procedure sets up a 3152B module as the master
301. es at a time In continuous run mode the output appears as a series of pulse pairs separated by a time interval set by the double delay time parameter If you place the instrument in triggered run mode a pair of pulses is initiated with every trigger To modify the pulse mode to double pulse mode refer to the Selecting a Pulse Mode section above The parameters associated with the basic double pulse mode are Period Width High and Low Levels and Double Pulse Delay which sets the delay between the pairs of pulses Double pulse delay is measured at the 50 amplitude points of the leading edges as shown in Figure 3 5 I t Fall Time Double Pulse Delay Figure 3 5 Double Pulse Mode Period The period parameter specifies the repetition rate of the pulse in continuous run mode The period parameter has no effect if the 3172 P2 is set up to operate in either the triggered or counted burst run mode Use the following command to program the period puls per lt value gt The period is programmable from 20 ns to 5 seconds The default value is 1 ms Width The Width parameter specifies the width of the pulse at the 50 point between its high and low level settings The pulse width time is not affected by settings of other parameters such as rise and fall 3 41 3172 User Manual Hold DCycle Mode 3 42 Publication Number 980949 Rev H times Use the following command to program the pulse w
302. escription of these parts 4 79 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H EFM Wave Composer gt C Program Files Tabor Electronics ArbConnection 4 0 1MP t FmDef wi loj x File Edit View Wave Download About De RBS vw E BWI 0 3 h Wavelength 1024 Deviation 150000 L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 1e6q Vertical Scale 150e3Hz 18750Hz Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 56 FM Composer Opening Screen The Menu Bar The FM Composer menu bar is an exact duplication of the menu bar of the Wave composer It provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View 4 80 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual File Menu Astronics Test Systems The File menu has 4 menu selections which that control waveform file I O operations Also use this menu to print the waveform or to exit the FM Composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New Waveform The New Waveform command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use this command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform menu item lets you browse for previously saved waveform files and to load these waveforms to the waveform graph This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to
303. ess Remove Address Cancel Then click Communicate button YXID 2 INSTRA Vx10 3 INSTR AIO 4d INSTP nil Select module type Figure 7 1 Startup amp Communication Options Window 1 Select Detect Automatically VXI MB and Communicate Only as shown in Figure 7 1 Then click the Communicate button 2 In the Model List box select the model number such as 3172 W2P2 or 3172 P2 3 The ArbConnection main window will then appear Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 ArbConnection Main Window 7 4 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 4 lf more than one VXI instrument is installed in the VXI chassis select the one containing the module you wish to calibrate Click the mouse where shown in Figure 7 3 to drop down a list of VXI instruments Then select one by logical address In Figure 7 3 only one VXI instrument is present Waveform Generator Calibration Astronics Test Systems gt Then select the VXI instrument in the drop down list in this example only one VXI instrument is present Figure 7 3 VXI Instrument Selection After performing the setup and initialization in the above section proceed with this section if you are calibrating a waveform generator module If you are calibrating a pulse generator module then go the the Pulse Generator Calibration section below 1 Using a coaxial cable BNC male to Cinc
304. ete lt segment_number gt Description This command will delete a segment The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform will be equal or smaller in size to the deleted segment If the deleted segment is the last segment then the size of another waveform written to the same segment is not limited For example let consider two segments the first being a 1000 point waveform and the second with 100 points If you delete segment 1 you can reprogram another waveform to segment 1 with size to 1000 points If you reprogram segment 1 with 1004 points the instrument will generate an error and will not accept this waveform On the other hand if you delete segment 2 which was the last segment you programmed then you can reprogram this segment with waveforms having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the segment number of which will be deleted numbers integer only TRACe DELete ALL Description This command will delete all segments and will clear the entire waveform memory This command is particularly important in case you want to de fragment the entire waveform memory and start building your waveform segments from scratch Y TIP The TRAC DEL ALL command does not re write the memory so whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery The TRAC DEL ALL
305. ete CARR This selects the carrier as the baseline for the modulation function when operating in one of the interrupted run modes The output will generate continuous none modulated sinusoidal waveform CW until triggered upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous CW DC Discrete This selects DC level as the baseline for the modulation function when operating in one of the interrupted run modes The output will generate continuous DC until triggered upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous DC level 5 72 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns CARR or DC depending on the present carrier baseline setting Modulation Control This group is used to control parameters for individual modulation schemes Control parameters are available for AM FM Sweep FSK ASK PSK Amplitude and Frequency hops and 3D The modulation Commands W2 control commands are summarized in Table 5 10 Factory defaults Module Only after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURce AM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN
306. ev H Error Re trigger Delay Modulation end to modulation restart Resolution Error Trigger Parameters Marker Output Description Output Level Marker Type Position Sweep Swept Waveform Sweep Step Sweep Direction Sweep Range Sweep Time FM Modulated Waveform Modulating Waveforms Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Frequency Range Peak Deviation ARBITRARY FM Description Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Waveform Modulating Waveform Sampling Clock Number of frequencies AM internal Modulated Waveform Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual 6 sample clock cycles 250 ns 5 of settings lt 100 ns to 20s 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns 5 of settings All trigger parameters such as level slope jitter etc apply Marks the crossing of a specific frequency and step setting The marker pulse is generated through the SYNC connector Marker placement is available for all modulation modes except external AM Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A5 TTLTRG 0 7 TTL Single pulse at the specified frequency Programmable for a specific frequency setting Sine square or triangle Linear or log Up or Down 10 Hz to 30 MHz 1 4 us to 40 s Sine wave Sine square triangle Ramp 10 Hz to 30 MHz 10 mHz to 350 kHz Up to 15 MHz Operated from an external utility only such as ArbConnection The modulating waveform can be designed as an arbitrary wavefor
307. f the 16 bit digital word The P2 has a single Combo D sub 5W5 connector marked as J2 which has five coaxial connections This connector embeds all I O signals that the P2 generates and needs to control its functions Figure 1 8 shows the connector and its pin assignments The following paragraphs describe each Pulse Generator input output signal PG2 OUT J2 A45 CLOCK OUT J2 44 TRIG IN GATEIN PG1 OUT Figure 1 8 P2 Module I O Connector The main output coax pin J2 A1 provides a path for channel 1 pulse waveforms The source impedance of this output is selectable from lt 2 Q 50 Q or 93 Q The cable connected to this output should be terminated with a 50 Q or 93 Q resistance The output amplitude is specified when connected to a 50 Q load If the output is connected to a different load resistance determine the actual amplitude from the resistance ratio of the internal output impedance to the load impedance The GATE IN connector accepts gating signals that stimulate the generation of output waveforms It can be programmed to gate either channel 1 or channel 2 The P2 module ignores this input when operating in Continuous mode When placed in Gated run mode the gate input is made active and the P2 module waits for the proper condition to gate the instrument The gate input is level Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual TRIG IN J2 A3 CLOCK OUT J2 A
308. filter the entire waveform or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment Smooth The Smooth operation lets you smooth out rough transitions in your waveform This is done mathematically by multiplying the waveform by the nonlinear portion of a cubic curve The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform graph that are bounded by anchors Anchor operations are described later in this chapter Place the anchors to the left and right of the waveform segment to be smoothed and select the Smooth operation The waveform will change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a cubic curve Note that small segments with fast transitions when combined with cubic functions tend to generate even larger transitions Therefore be sure to omit such sections of the waveform when you use the Smooth operation Invert The Invert operation lets you invert the entire waveform or a selected segment of a waveform The waveform is inverted about the 0 point on the vertical axis Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its original left position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor becomes the first point of the waveform Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point Th
309. follows Frequency 1 MHz Output On Trigger Source TTLO 3 Configure the auxiliary 3172 as follows Frequency 2 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Trigger Input TTLO Output On 4 Connect the auxiliary 3172 output to the oscilloscope input Test Procedure 1 Set up the P2 trigger output source as specified in Table 6 50 and verify that the auxiliary 3172 generates a periodical single cycle 2 MHz sine with interval 1 us Test Results Pass Fail 6 64 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Test Procedures he P2 module is a dual channel pulse generator where each channel can be used separately or jointly depending on the P2 Module application on hand Use the following procedures to check the P2 module against its specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what are the acceptable limits for the specific test If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem P2 Channel 2 The P2 module is comprised of two identical channels Each is SC ie tested separately The following tests check the performance and Characteristics characteristics of the second channel only If channel 2 fails to perform in the specified
310. fset but then the final offset between modules will be the difference between the offset settings of the salves to the master X Instrument Synchronization E x Instruments Pool State Model Address Chan Slot Path Ph Offs Meet Master 3100 3152B 3152B Vx10 13 3 ADJ 0 0 KSE 3100 3152B 31528 EE Ny pn E 31528 H 0 0 31528 Volt 8 0 0 3100 31528 VXIO 7 g 0 0 Path LBUS EGER Apply Activate Clear All Assignments Close Figure 4 22 Adjacent Synchronization between Two Instruments Astronics Test Systems 4 37 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H X Instrument Synchronization Instruments Pool x Move Up Model Address Ph Offs 1 Master 3100 3152B 3152B YXxI0 13 1 3 ADJ 0 0 REEDA 1 Slave 3100 31528 31528 VxI013 2 3 ADJ 1024 E 2 Master 3152B Vacltt 5 1 7 LBUS 0 0 2 Slave 31528 Val 1 8 LBUS 1024 2 Slave 3100 31528 Val 1 g LBUS 2048 Clear All Assignments Activate Close Figure 4 23 LBUS Synchronization between Adjacent Slots Instrument synchronization EE Instruments Pool x Move Up Group State Model Address Chan Slot Path Ph Offs 1 Master 3100 3152B 3152B Val 13 1 3 ADJ 0 0 pee ee 1 Slave 3100 3152B 3152B Val 13 2 3 ADJ 1024 SS 2 Master 31526 VxI0 5 1 7 LBUS 0 0 2 Slave 3152B Val E 1 8 LBUS 1024 2 Slave 3100 31528 Val 1 9 LBUS 2048 Clear All Assignments Figur
311. fundamental or carrier The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100 cos 110 omg p and the lower sideband by the term 100 cos 90 omg p Use the following equation Ampl p 6000 sin 100 omg p 1200 cos 110 omg p 1200 cos 90 omg p Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 40 Astronics Test Systems 4 59 3172 User Manual V Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Publication Number 980949 Rev H Geescht 2lsl Zigi o x Anchor gt Waveform Amplitude m Level Adjuster gt Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles Auto_Scaling _Preview Y E End pts 1023 Min 32768 fi C Original Scale Deiat r Equation Insert Wave pen Sie Cancel Insert Wave s _Open See aan Ill HN i Amplitude p 6000 sin 100 omg p 1200 cos 110 omg p 1200 cos 90 omg p _Aliases gt gt _Aliases gt gt i 0 i Hill ji ill II d i Figure 4 40 Using Equation Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal Combining Waveforms 4 60 with Sidebands The last feature to be described here allows you to combine waveforms which were previously stored in a file You can write mathematical expressions that contain waveforms simple operands and trigonometric functions similar to the example given below If you want to use stored waveforms in your equations you mu
312. fy parameters that are specified in the tests only Equipment Oscilloscope Function Generator 50Q feedthrough termination Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Level Output TTL Frequency 100 kHz 2 Connect the function generator to the P2 External Pulse Width input 3 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the P2 as follows Pulse Mode Ext Width Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify that the P2 generates pulses with the following properties Period 10 us Pulse width 5 us Test Results Pass Fail 2 Change the P2 slope setting to negative and observe that the offset has a reverse impact on the pulse width Test Results Pass Fail 6 74 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This tests the operation of the two specific pulse run modes Pulse Run Modes Internal Trigger and Internal Burst Although all run modes Operation characteristics are shared across the entire functionality of the P2 these two modes are specific for the pulse output Operation of other run modes was tested under separate headings in this chapter To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Pulse Run Modes Equipment Oscilloscope Function Generator 50 Q feedthrough Operatio
313. g period 10 us Trigger Source BUS Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger and verify that trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulse having 10 us pulse width Verify that the SYNC is high for the duration of the burst Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 25 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H SYNC Output Pulse Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model W2 channel as follows Waveform Sine Output On Sync Output On Sync Source Pulse Sync Width 8 Sync Position 48 Test Procedure 1 Observe that the SYNC output has 8 sample clock cycles width and that the position has shifted by 48 sample clock periods Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output Zero Preparation Configure the oscilloscope as follows 1 Time Base Amplitude Equipment Oscilloscope As required by the test 2 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model 3172 W2 channel as follows Waveform Sinc 0 Crossing 10 Output On Sync Output On
314. ge around the carrier frequency The deviation range is always symmetrical about the carrier frequency If you need non symmetrical deviation range you can use the arbitrary FM composer screen or an external utility to design such waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt deviation gt 10e 3 to Numeric 100e3 Programs the deviation range around the carrier 30e6 frequency in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present deviation frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB Description This command selects one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform 5 76 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform ARB Discrete Selects an arbitrary waveform as the modulating shape The waveform must be designed and downloaded to the FM arbitrary modulating waveform memory before one can use this option Information on how to create and download FM arbitrary waveforms is given later in this chapt
315. gh For low output levels use the following command outp ampl pow low Finally to let the A3 automatically select the best power supply Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual voltages use the following command outp ampl pow auto EN A Warning The A3 module is equipped with a hazard protection toggle switch on the front panel High voltages are not present at the output connector when the switch is in the OFF position You may use this switch to disable high voltage at the output in case of emergency Never touch the center pin of the output connector with bare hands or with a metallic object as lethal voltages may exist on this pin Always exercise causion when connecting a cable to the A3 output Make sure the high power switch is in the OFF position while connecting a cable to the A3 output connector Astronics Test Systems 3 55 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 3 56 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 4 ArbConnection What s in this This chapter explains how to install invoke and use the Ch 5 ArbConnection application It provides instructions for programming apter i instrument controls and parameters creating waveforms and downloading waveforms to the 3172 What is ArbConnection part number 922336 001 is a utility program S e included with the 3172 CD that aids in
316. gister The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value one indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting ESEO Summary of ESE messages is given in the following ESEO No mask Clears all bits in the register ESE1 ESB on Operation Complete ESE2 ESB on Request Control ESE4 ESB on Query Error ESE8 ESB on Device Dependent Error ESE16 ESB on Execution Error ESE32 ESB on Command Error ESE64 ESB on User Request ESE128 ESB Power on In general whenever the 3172 receives an invalid SCPI command it automatically generates an error Errors are stored in a special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored When you have read all errors from the queue the generator responds with a 0 No error message If more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue is replaced with 350 Queue Overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the generator responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared when
317. gment only to the 3172 memory Download All downloads the complete table to the 3172 memory Export This allows exportation of Waveform Studio settings to another session Import This allows importation of Waveform Studio settings from another session Save saves current table settings Clear Mem wipes out the entire memory and clears the table for fresh settings Close removes the Waveform Studio from the screen If you have not saved your work the table setting will be lost Sequence Table As was explained in the above the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments and up to 16 k segments can be defined and used as individual arbitrary waveforms Having a limited size of waveform memory can for some applications pose a limitation however if sections of the waveform are repetitive one may use the sequence generator to take these segments and replay them as part of the complete waveform without losing valuable memory space and without scarifying waveform coherence and integrity The tool for combining repetitive and multiple segments in one long waveform is called Sequence Generator and ArbConnection has a special dialog box where sequences are designed This tool is called Sequence Table Using the Sequence Table you can use waveforms that you already downloaded to the 3172 from the Segment Table link and loop in random order to create one long and complex waveform that combines the indivi
318. gram the ASK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the PSK function Program the PSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application 5 71 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H FHOPping Discrete This turns on the frequency hopping function Program the hop parameters to fine tune the function for your application AHOPping Discrete This turns on the amplitude hopping function Program the amplitude hopping parameters to fine tune the function for your application Response The 3172 returns OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOP or AHOP depending on the present modulation type setting MODulation CARRier lt frequency gt Description This command programs the CW frequency Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sine waveform The CW frequency setting is valid for all modulation types Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the carrier waveform in units 30e6 of Hz Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sine waveform Response The 3172 returns the current carrier frequency value MODulation CARRier BASeline CARRier DC Description This command programs the carrier baseline when the modulation is used in triggered mode Parameters Name Type Default Description CARRier Discr
319. group Adjustments should be carried out exactly in sequential order The numbers that are associated with each adjustment are identified by a setup number in the title of each of the adjustments in the following procedure Adjustment values have a range of 0 through 255 with a center setting of 128 If you are not able to calibrate within the specified range there is either a problem with the way you are measuring the parameter or a problem with the instrument In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and resolve the problem before proceeding with the calibration Note that in the following procedures although configuration of the 3152B is done automatically configuration details are shown for reference There is no requirement to change the 3152B configuration during the adjustment procedure except where specifically noted After making calibration adjustments it is essential that you lock the calibration factors as described in the section Locking the Calibration Factors at the end of this procedure This stores the calibration factors in flash memory so that the instrument will retain its calibration after power is turned off Note VCO Adjustments Setup 1 7 20 The VCO controls the accuracy and linearity of the sample clock generator Correct operation of the VCO circuit assures the accuracy of the frequency path Use this procedure if you suspect that ther
320. gs and in the hold duty cycle pulse Accuracy mode the ratio between the pulse width and the period remains constant regardless of the period settings Note that each channel can have a unique duty cycle setting To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Astronics Test Systems 6 71 3172 User Manual Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Counter timer Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Pulse Width Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Hold Duty Cycle High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Duty Cycle 10 Output On Period As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform pulse width accuracy tests using Table 6 60 Table 6 60 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests P2 Period Setting Counter Period Reading Limits Counter Reading Pass 100 0000000 ms 10ms 300us lt lt 10 000000 ms 1ms30 s Oooo 100 000us _10ps 300 5ns 10 000ps st ys 30 5ns L 1000ps 100ns 3 5ns Linear Transitions Accuracy 6 72 This tests the accuracy of the transitions when the pulse is set to have linear transitions Linear transitions imply that the slopes of the rise and fall times can be adjusted to have var
321. gt 1 to 4096 Numeric integer 1 Selects the step number which will be deleted only SEQuence DELete ALL Description This command will delete the entire sequence table Before you use this step make sure your sequence number is setup correctly for this operation OUTPut SYNC TYPE LCOMplete BIT M Description This command programs the 3172 SYNC mode Parameters Name Type Default Description LCOMplete Discrete LCOM The sync output will transition high at the beginning of the sequence and will transition low at the end of the sequence less 16 waveform points BIT Discrete The sync output will generate a pulse at the beginning of a specific segment regardless how many times the segment appears in a sequence The width of the sync pulse is 16 waveform points Response The 3172 returns LCOM or BIT depending on the present SYNC type 5 70 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Modulated Waveform Global Control Commands W2 Module Only 3172 User Manual This group is used to set up the instrument in modulated waveforms mode and to select the general parameters that control all of modulation functions Note that the modulation can be turned off to create continuous carrier waveform CW The following modulation schemes can be selected and controlled AM FM Sweep FSK ASK PSK Amplitude and Frequency hops and 3D Table 5 9 summarizes the modulated waveforms global commands Factory defa
322. gt We 5 14 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Modulated Waveforms Commands continued SOURce ASK AMPLitude STARt 0 to 10 5 w2 SHIFted Oto 10 1 W2 BAUD 1 to 2 5e6 10e3 W2 MARKer 1 to 1000 1 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We Pk PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 w2 SHIFted 0 to 360 180 w2 RATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 W2 DATA lt data_array gt We MARKer 1 to 4000 1 W2 FHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX w2 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 w2 FlXed DATA lt data_array gt W2 VAR iable DATA lt data_array gt W2 MARKer 1 to 1000 1 W2 AHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX w2 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 w2 FlXed DATA lt data_array gt W2 VAR iable DATA lt data_array gt W2 MARKer 1 to 5000 1 W2 Astronics Test Systems 5 15 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 2 Model 3172 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Association Pulse Waveforms Commands SOURCce PULSe MODe NORMal DELayed DOUBle HOLDdcycle EWIDth NORM P2 PERiod 20e 9 to 10 1e 3 P2 WIDTh 7e 9 to 10 100e 6
323. h or Cannon DM53740 connect the waveform generator front panel output to the DMM input See Figure 7 4 for front panel pin assignments 2 In the ArbConnection window click the Module button Figure 7 5 to drop down the selection list Then select the waveform generator channel to calibrate Channels are numbered in ascending order starting with the module installed in the upper position of the 3172 enclosure 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H GND _ J1 2 SCLK IN NC DNR enee Ji 4 SYNC Q dts CURSOR RER U7 DIGO EARCH 10MHZ REF IN Ol U9 DIG2 Te DIGE SCL IN asg E DIG7 Deg ARB OUT Q Di Waveform Generator Output Figure 7 4 Front Panel Pin Assignments for Waveform Generator Module Die View System Help Link 7 MB VXIO 3 Slot Link 3172 W2P2 vg ZE Click here for drop down buttons P2 Channel 2 P2 Channel 3 e Modulation e Composers sway Then select module to calibrate Figure 7 5 Selecting the Module to Calibrate 3 Click System Figure 7 6 Then in the drop down list select Calibration The Calibration Panel will then open Figure 7 7 The panel shown in Figure 7 7 is for the W2 module The panel for the W6 module is similar 7 6 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 15 x File View System Help Link faisze YXI_MB wi DI Y Operation
324. hapter lists and describes the set of SCPI compatible Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments remote commands used to operate the 3172 To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt with in a similar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described A complete listing of all commands used for programming the 3172 in 3171 LEGacy emulation mode is given in Table 5 1 and MODern mode in Table 5 2 Commands to program the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993 0 standard The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol It goes one step further than IEEE STD 488 2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument SCPI is an ASCll based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands are based ona hierarchical structure known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system OUTPUT FILTer LPASs NONE 25M 5
325. hat the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3172 will return the present leading edge transition time value in units of seconds PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command will program the interval it will take the trailing edge of the pulse to transition from its high to low level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Transition times are programmed within 6 ranges of which both leading and trailing edges must reside in the same range The leading edge setting determines the range More information on this function is available in Chapter 3 Note that this parameter will affect the instrument only when the pulse transition mode is set to linear Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt trailing_ed5e 9 to 5e 3 Numeric 10e 6 Will set the fall time parameter Note that the sum of all ge gt parameters including the fall time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3172 will return the present trailing edge transition time value in units of seconds Half Cycle Control Use the following commands for programming the half cycle functions and their associated parameters There are three half cycle functions Commands Sine Triangle and Square The specifications and limitations of the W2 Module Only half cycle functions are sp
326. he 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 4 Configure the 3172 as follows Function External AM Output On Adjustment 1 Set CAL SETup 51 2 Adjust RV2 for DMM reading of 0 V 50 mV Offset Adjustments The offset adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue Setup 18 1 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 0 995 V Output On Adjustment 7 28 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 1 Adjust CAL SETup 18 for DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Setup 19 2 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 2 495 V Output On Ad
327. he 3172 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Selects the front panel TRIG IN input as the trigger source INTernal Discrete Activates the built in internal trigger generator BUS and external trigger are ignored The period of the internal trigger is programmable and can be used to replace an external trigger source TTLTrg lt 0 to 7 gt Discrete Selects the backplane trigger lines as the source for the trigger input To avoid hardware conflicts make sure that no more than one instrument is programmed to output trigger signals on any specific TTLT line ECLTrg1 Discrete Selects the backplane ECL trigger line number 1 as the source for the trigger input BUS Discrete Selects the remote controller as the trigger source Only software commands are accepted Backplane and front panel signals are ignored ADJacent Discrete When an active P2 channel is placed in triggered run mode the clock generator of the other P2 channel feeds its trigger input This feature is available in the P2 module only Response The 3172 returns EXT INT TTLT lt n gt BUS or ADJ depending on the selected trigger source advance setting TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Description The trigger slope command selects the sensitive edge of the trigger signal that is applied to the selected trigger source The 3172 can be made sensitive to either the positive or negative trans
328. he Pulse Editor Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems The Pulse Editor has four groups Section Structure Pulse Train Design Format Section Properties and control buttons These groups are described below Pulse Train Design Format There are two methods or formats that can be use for designing the pulse shape DC Intervals and Time Level Points The design format is unique for the current section and cannot be switched in the middle of a pulse section design DC Intervals programs pulse duration using DC levels only Transition times for this format are at the maximum rate that the generator can produce For example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has a OV to 3 3V amplitude a 50 duty cycle and a ims period you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 2 Level 0 Time Interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note that as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Time Level Points programs pulse turning points using level and time markers This format is a bit more complex to use however it allows the design of pulses with linear transition times For example if you want to draw a simple squar
329. he sync output of the P2 channel Response The 3172 returns P1 P2 SYNC1 or SYNC2 depending on the present 3172 P2 trigger source setting OUTPut TTLTrg SOURCe 1 2 3 4 Description The SYNC signal can be placed on one of the backplane TTLTRG lines Use this command to select the Astronics Test Systems 5 29 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H module that will source the trigger lines For example in a 3172 W2P2 configured instrument 1 designates the arbitrary generator module and 2 and 3 designate the two pulse modules Likewise in a 3172P2P2 configured instruments 1 to 4 designate the channels from top to bottom Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 to 4 Integer 1 Designates a specific 3172 module that will output the sync signal onto the backplane trigger outputs The signals that are generated on the trigger lines can come from a number of sources described in the outp trig sour command before Response The 3172 returns 1 2 3 or 4 depending on the currently selected source module OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt lt OFF ON 0 1 gt Description The TTLTRG lines can be used to transmit and receive trigger signals between the 3152A and other VXlbus modules Use this command to transmit signals on the backplane trigger lines Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt n gt 0 7 0 1 Integer 1 Designates a specific backplane trigger line as an output The signals that ar
330. hen click the Exit button in the updater window Resource Name vip e L es Updater information Firmware File CH Figure 7 21 Successful Firmware Update 12 Turn off power to the VXI chassis Wait at least two seconds and then turn it back on 13 Run the Resource Manager Resman 14 Send a IDN command to the 3172 The response will be a text string stating the model number and firmware version as in this example Racal Instruments 3172 0 3 07 r n In this example the firmware version is 3 07 15 Verify that the firmware version is the one you loaded The updated instrument is ready to use Astronics Test Systems 7 69 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 7 70 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Appendix A 3172 Module Specifications 3172 VXI Module Specifications Backplane Multiple Instrument Synchronization Description Initial Skew Synchronized Waveforms Synchronized Run Modes Trigger Delay Trigger Delay Resolution Synchronization Frequency Range Standard Waveforms Arbitrary and Sequenced Waveforms Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Range Resolution and Accuracy VXIbus General Information Module Form Protocol VXlbus Revision Astronics Test Systems Multiple instruments can be daisy chained and synchronized to provide multi channel systems Phase le
331. hen the next downloaded data will overwrite the memory of the deleted segment If you delete segments often large portions of the memory will become inaccessible Therefore it is suggested that you periodically clear the entire memory and reload the waveforms that you intend to use To delete the entire memory partition table use the following command trac del all Removes the entire partition table allowing definition of a new segment table Q Tip The trac del all command deletes the partition table but leaves the data in the arbitrary memory intact Therefore if you made a mistake and want to restore the segments just re load the partition table The waveform memory is overwritten Every time you download new waveform data the waveform memory data for that segment is overwritten The easiest way to download waveforms to the 3172 W2 is with ArbConnection Using this application you may define create and download memory segments to the 3172 W2 For maximum flexibility you may download waveforms to the 3172 W2 from your own program The following example shows how to clear the partition table and set up three memory segments of 4 000 1 000 and 64 sample points Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems First clear the entire memory partition table to eliminate any fragmented segments Use the delete command as follows trac del all Removes the entire partition
332. her ranges an operation that will generate setting conflict errors The normal pulse and the pulse complement are specifically valuable for applications requiring differential signals and hence a dual channel module like the P2 that has this feature can easily be programmed to generate differential signals Simply couple both channels and set one channel to Normal and the second channel to Complemented and both signals will be generated differentially perfectly synchronized and without phase offset or jitter Note that the pulse polarity can be programmed separately for each channel and therefore before you modify this parameter make sure that you program the correct channel Use the following command to program the pulse polarity 3 45 3172 User Manual Applying Linear Transitions Publication Number 980949 Rev H puls pol lt normal complemented inverted gt The default option is normal Most of the applications that use pulse generation require that the transitions from low to high and from high to low be done at the fastest possible speed Such transitions are normally created as a by product of the output amplifier General purpose amplifiers that can drive 50 Q loads with high amplitudes are rare and the products that you can usually buy off the shelf either have poor drive capabilities or uncontrolled aberration capability For a pulse generator that generates pulses with fast transitions only the design problem is s
333. his specifies the sweep stop frequency The 3172 will normally sweep from start to stop frequencies however if the sweep direction is reversed the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform frequency range Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt stop_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sweep stop frequency Sweep stop is 30e6 programmed in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present sweep stop frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep FREQuency RAStTer lt sclk_freq gt Description This programs the sample clock frequency for the swept waveform Program this parameter only if you fully understand the effect on the waveform otherwise let the instrument determine the sample clock setting as required to successfully complete the setting of the sweep Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sclk_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency in units of 200e6 samples per second Response The 3172 returns the present sweep sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep FUNCtion SINusoid TRlangle SQUare Descript
334. his was the most recent interrupted run mode Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Re Triggered Run Mode Gated Run Mode Astronics Test Systems Re triggered mode is a special case of Triggered mode where after a valid trigger event the generator automatically self issues triggers separated by a programmable delay The delay interval is measured from the end point of the waveform to the start point of the next waveform cycle Use the following commands to place the instrument in re triggered mode and to program the delay between events init cont off Turns Continuous mode off changing to an interrupted mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode trig retr 1 Turns on Re triggered mode trig retr del lt value gt Sets the re trigger delay time The re trigger delay is measured from the last point of the waveform cycle to the first point of the next waveform cycle lt trigger event gt Starts the re trigger generator You may select the source of trigger events from a number of inputs such as software trigger front panel input or VXlbus backplane trigger lines The waveform will continue to re trigger unless you change the run mode or turn off power Use the following commands to restore continuous run mode trig retr O This turns off Re triggered mode The generator will revert to
335. iable angles other than the fastest upslope and down slope transitions The transition times are measured from 10 to 90 of the amplitude setting regardless of the high and low amplitude level settings Linear transition control is independent for each channel however one must keep in mind that the leading and trailing edges must remain within the same slope range boundaries and that the leading edge is the governing parameter which means that the leading edge setting defines the transition range and the trailing edge must follow through To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Linear Transitions Equipment Counter timer Accuracy Tests Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Rise Time Measurement function Termination 500 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Hold Duty Cycle Duty Cycle 50 Transitions Symmetrical Period As required by the test High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Output On Leading Edge As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform the leading edge linear transitions accuracy tests using Table 6 61 Table 6 61 Leading Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests Edge Setting Period Limits Counter Reading 1 000ms 10ms 1ms 100us OE 100 0us ims 100us
336. ics Test Systems Vertical Scale 10 V 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 14ms 1 4ms Div 3172 User Manual Now that we are familiar with the Pulse Composer and its operation we are ready to start building the first section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 50 Point and click on the New icon and open the Pulse Editor Type in the level and time intervals as shown Note that the pulse segments are being created on the screen as you type the values a Tips 1 Use the tab key to navigate Section Structure fields 2 Use Append to add an index line at the end of the list 3 Use Insert to add a segment above the selected line Before we proceed with the design of the next section observe some values which are displayed on the Pulse Composer screen In the lower left corner of the composer the Vertical Scale is 10 V 1 25 V Div and the Horizontal Scale is 14 ms 1 4 ms Div These two values are critical for the integrity of the design because they will later be used by the program to set pulse timing These values can change as you add more sections to the pulse train S D r Becton x ZE cut che W Pulse Editor Section 1 lt DC Intervals gt r Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals Time Level Points Hama Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units ms Section Start O ms Repeat D essen Duration x R 1 4 ms Section Structure Time
337. id suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter The suffix may have been misspelled 148 Character data not allowed A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors Execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 221 Setting conflict Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an error Listed below are events causing setting conflicts 1 Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100 percent Corrective action Change parameters to correct the problem 2 jampl 2 offset is more than 22 Vp p SYMM mode 20 Vpk POS or NEG mode Corrective action Reduce offset to 0 then change amplitude offset values to correct the problem 3 Activating filters when the 3172 is set to output the built in sine waveform or activating the built in sine waveform when one of the 3172 filters is turned on Corrective action If in sine select another function and activate the filter s 4 Activating burst mode when the 3172 is set to sequence mode or activating sequence mode when the 3172 is set to burst mode 5 126 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems Corrective action Remove the 3172 from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode 5 Cha
338. idth puls wid lt value gt Pulse width is programmable from 7 ns to 5 seconds The default value is 100 ns High Level The high level parameter defines the top amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is larger than the low level setting does not exceed 20 V and does not fall short of the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting Use the following command to program the pulse high level volt hil lt value gt The high level is range independent and can be programmed from 19 995 V to 20 V The default value is 2 5 V Low Level The low level parameter specifies the lowest amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the high level setting is not below 20 V and exceeds the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting Use the following command to program the pulse high level volt lol lt value gt The high level is range independent and can be programmed from 20 V to 19 995 V The default value is 2 5 V Double Pulse Delay The double pulse delay parameter defines the time that will lapse from the first pulse transition to the paired pulse transition Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the period plus 2 x pulse width setting Use the following command to program the double pulse delay value puls doub del lt value gt The delay can be programmable from 0 to 5 s When single double or delayed pulse modes are selected the programmed pu
339. ign Units W ms Section Start 14 ms Repeat E Koni Duration ht Ims m Section Structure FEA Time Cumulative evel Interval Time 1 0 D 2 Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 23ms 2 3ms Div Figure 4 51 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example 4 74 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Example Section 3 The second pulse section is now complete We are ready now to start building the third section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 52 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there are fast transitions required for this section Therefore select the DC Intervals option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values If you try to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will display a warning box alerting you that the design format can only be changed for an empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in the figure Vertical Scale 10 1 25 V Div Horizontal Scale 38ms 3 8ms Div D Ka on CH2 C t View ka Train DI i r Pulse Train
340. igure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Negative Amplitude 10 mV Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 15 for DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 15 Base Line Offset Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Modulated Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 16 for DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 16 Base Line Offset Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Astronics Test Systems 7 27 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 17 for DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 17 Base Line Offset External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 Ext AM input to 10 VDC Voltage Source 3 Connect t
341. illoscope reading as before except the ramp is down Test Results Pass Fail 4 Change sweep step to logarithmic and verify oscilloscope exponential down waveform with properties as in 3 above 6 46 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Test Results Pass Fail Auxiliary This tests the operation of the auxiliary counter timer function Note i that when you select the counter timer function all other 3172 W2 Counter Timer waveform generation is automatically purged and the instrument Operation operational mode is transformed to a stand alone counter timer Waveform generation is resumed as soon as the counter timer function is turned off Frequency Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the W2 TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the W2 as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Frequency Trigger Level oV Test Procedure 1 Perform Frequency Measurement Accuracy tests using Table 6 34 Table 6 34 Frequency Measurement Accuracy Function 3172 W2 Generator Setting Error Limits Counter EELER 1 000000 MHz 2Hel gt 100 0000 ee 100 Hz Astronics Test Systems 6 47 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949
342. impler because the designer can use a switching amplifier at the output amplifier stage It takes a very different approach to design an output stage that slows the transitions of the leading and trailing edges To this extent the P2 module has a unique output amplifier stage that allows full control over pulse transitions over a very high dynamic range of amplitudes and offsets without degradation of the signal A comparison between pulses with fast and linear transitions is shown in Figure 3 10 As you can see the top train has fast transitions these are normally in the range of lt 8 ns and are expected to be very fast and without aberrations The bottom pulse has linear transitions that are expected to have good linearity and slew rate accuracy Observe that the pulse width on the pulses that have linear transitions is measured at the 50 amplitude level Also note that the leading and the trailing edges can be programmed to have different transition times Fast Transitions l 2 Figure 3 10 Fast and Linear Transitions Compared 3 46 Linear transitions can be used in conjunction with each of the pulse modes including external pulse width and pulse modulation Use the following commands to select one of the transition modes puls tran norm The P2 outputs pulses with the fastest transition times Normal transitions are specified in Appendix A of this manual and are normally measured at less than 8 ns Normal is the default opt
343. in the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem P2 Channel 1 The P2 module is comprised of two identical channels Each is Ane tested separately The following tests check the performance and Characteristics characteristics of the first channel only If channel 1 fails to perform in the specified limits it must be recalibrated using the calibration procedure as outlined in Chapter 7 of this manual wae To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each Initial Instrument test it is required that instrument be reset to factory default values Setting prior to each test This tests the accuracy of the pulse period Pulse period is specified in two run modes continuous and interrupted In continuous mode the accuracy is controlled by a Synthesizer circuit and hence the accuracy is much higher than in the interrupted run mode where the accuracy there is controlled by an analog circuit The accuracy is tested in two modes continuous and gated only because the controlling circuit is the same for all of the interrupted run modes To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Period Accuracy 6 50 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Period Accuracy Equipment Counter timer Continuous Run Preparation Mode Tests 1 Configure the counter timer
344. ination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Function Arbitrary External AM ON Amplitude 50 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 48 for DMM reading of 17 68 mV 0 5 mV Setup 49 15 mV Amplitude External AM Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Function Arbitrary External AM ON Amplitude 15 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 49 for DMM reading of 5 31mV 0 5 mV 7 40 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Response Adjustments Setup 50 Procedure P2 Module Astronics Test Systems The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times as well as the aberrations are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Note that setups 48 and 49 are marked as a factory adjustment and therefore it is not normally required to b
345. interval otherwise reading will not be available and the interface bus will be held until the measurement cycle has been completed and result available to be read Response The 3172 returns the result of the present measurement function reading The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10 MHz would be returned as 10e6 positive numbers are unsigned Power Am plifier Use the following commands for programming the power amplifier Control module The power amplifier module does not generate signals of its own but receives signals from the W2 waveform generator module Commands The specifications and limitations of the power amplifier timer are provided in Appendix A Power amplifier commands are summarized A3 Module Only or e Astronics Test Systems 5 103 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 15 Power Amplifier Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association OUTPut AMPLifier AUTO HIGH LOW AUTO A3 POWer OFF ON 0 1 0 A3 OUTPut AMPLifier AUTO HIGH LOW Description This command selects the internal voltage levels of the power amplifier supply rails Setting the correct levels is important to avoid exceeding the temperature limits of the power amplifier component Parameters Name Type Default Description AUTO Discrete AUTO Selects automatic selection of the supply rail voltages for best power efficiency HIGH Di
346. ion This specifies the swept function There are three functions that could be swept are Sine Triangle and Square The sine sweep is generated by the DDS but the triangle and the square are computed and place in the memory as complete waveforms and replayed by the arbitrary mode as a regular arbitrary waveform Parameters 5 80 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects sine as the swept waveform TRlangle Discrete Selects triangle as the swept waveform SQUare Discrete Selects square as the swept waveform Response The 3172 returns SIN TRI or SQU depending on the selected waveform setting SWEep TIMe lt time gt Description This specifies the time that will take the 3172 to sweep from start to stop frequencies The time does not depend on the sweep boundaries as it is automatically adjusted by the software to the required interval At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform maintains the sweep stop frequency setting except if the 3172 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 1 4e 6 to Numeric 1e 3 Programs the sweep time Sweep time is programmed 40 in units of s Response The 3172 returns the present sweep time The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100ms would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers a
347. ion use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Re program the leading and trailing edge values to be within the same range as shown in Figure 3 11 3 51 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 503 Double Delay Error 503 Double Delay Conflict occurs when attempting to program Conflict leading or trailing edge values that are larger than the programmed double pulse delay This error may occur in double pulse mode only and in conjunction of all run modes under the following conditions WID 0 625 LEE TRE gt DDEL When such an error occurs the resultant output would have looked as illustrated in Figure 3 13 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Decrease the pulse width value 2 Increase the double delay value 3 Decrease the leading edge value 4 Decrease the trailing edge value Figure 3 13 Output Waveform with Error 503 Example 504 Double Delay Error 504 Double Delay and Width Conflict occurs when attempting e tz to program a double delay to a pulse width value that is larger than and Width Conflict the programmed pulse period This error may occur in double pulse mode and in continuous run mode under the following conditions DDEL WID 0 625 LEE TRE 4 ns gt PER When such an error occurs the output
348. ion and the sample clock is programmed from this location To access the required parameter click on the parameter s name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the f Hi keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new setting 4 23 3172 User Manual AM CV Freq 4 24 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The AM panel Figure 4 15 contains parameters for controlling the amplitude modulation function To turn the AM function on and off click on the AM button in the State group The various groups in the AM panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the AM function AM Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the AM function These are CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the carrier waveform Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is
349. ion for this switch Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems puls tran lin The P2 outputs pulses with linear transition times Linear transitions can be programmed separately for the leading and trailing edges within the range of 5 ns to 5 ms The default value is 10 us puls tran symm The P2 outputs pulses with the linear transition times Linear transitions are programmed simultaneously for the leading and trailing edges within the range of 5 ns to 5 ms The default value is 10 us After you select the linear transition option you ll probably want to program the transition times for the leading and trailing edges There are some considerations to observe before you program the transitions First note the limits as specified in Appendix A These tell you that you can set transition times within the range of 5 ns to 5 ms Then you have to make sure that the transition settings do not conflict with the pulse width settings For example if you set the pulse width to 100 ns and the leading edge transition time to 120 ns the instrument will not allow you to do the change A list of settings conflicts is given later in this chapter Finally bear in mind that the transition times are programmed in six ranges and further both the leading and the trailing edges must be programmed within the same range W TIP Setting conflict may occur if the leading and trailing edges are n
350. ion the cursor here Figure 7 13 Making an Adjustment 9 10 11 Use the up arrow and down arrow keys on the computer keyboard to adjust the number up or down as required while observing the reading on the DMM Adjust the number until the DMM reading is as close as possible to the target value given in the calibration table When finished verify that the DMM reading is within the low and high limits given in Table 7 4 If you are not able to calibrate within the specified range there is either a problem with the way you are measuring the parameter or a problem with the 3172 In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarification and support Repeat steps 4 through 9 above for each row in Table 7 4 7 15 3172 User Manual 7 16 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Perform all steps in the order presented in the table 12 Close the calibration panel by clicking the x in the upper right corner Note After making calibration adjustments it is essential that you lock the calibration factors as described in the section titled Locking the Calibration Factors below This will store the calibration factors in flash memory so that the instrument will retain its calibration when power is turned off Table 7 4 Calibration for P2 Module
351. ions from the System command at the top of the ArbConnection window Make your selection and then click Communicate The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box will close and the main window displays Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ArbConnection Features Main Window ArbConnection provides complete control over all features of the 3172 Using ArbConnection you may set up the 3172 to generate waveforms from sources such as the built in library of standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms from user downloaded coordinates modulated waveforms and digital patterns You may also access these features through software utilities such as VX Plug amp Play drivers and soft front panels The main window includes a standard Windows menu bar at the top Figure 4 2 It provides access to operations such as loading and saving files setting viewing options and configuring the 3172 The Link bar is immediately below the menu bar The Link bar provides direct access to instruments that are active on the interface bus ArbConnection can control a number of instruments such as the Model 3172 simultaneously If you connect an instrument while ArbConnection is running AroConnection automatically detects the instrument and adds its name and associated address to the drop down list in the Link bar If you run ArbConnection in offline mode the Link bar will show 3172 Offline Th
352. ircuit The varieties of modulated waveforms available are described below The W2 can sweep the output frequency between minimum and maximum values that you specify You may sweep up or down using linear or logarithmic increments Sweep frequency is programmable from 10 Hz to 30 MHz and sweep times can range from 1 4 us to 40 seconds Sweep mode is compatible with Continuous Triggered and Gated modes Sweep modes with triangle and square waveforms are computed and placed in memory as complete waveforms This adds delay before the initial output is available while the software computes the waveform All sine swaps use the DDS circuit thus no computation time is required The FM function modulates the frequency of the W2 output waveform You can modulate the output using built in standard or arbitrary waveforms FM is available in Continuous Triggered and Gated modes The W2 generates two types of frequency modulation standard and arbitrary For standard modulation the modulation waveform is selected from a built in library of four standard waveforms sine triangle square and ramp For arbitrary modulation complex modulation signals are loaded into modulation waveform memory There are 10 000 points allocated specifically for modulation waveform memory The internal AM function modulates the amplitude of the W2 output waveform Four standard modulating waveforms are available sine triangle square and ramp AM can be used in C
353. is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step continuously and only a valid trigger signal will cause the sequence to advance to the next step Note that the lt adv_mode gt parameter has no effect when the sequence advance mode is set to SING lt sync_bit gt 0 1 Boolean A 1 programs a sync bit to be present at a specific sequence step This feature is useful for applications requiring multiple sync bits in a single sequence Note that normal sync output during sequence mode is LCOM ei NOTE Although trigger signals are used to advance mixed mode the mixed mode operates in continuous mode only The lt mode gt parameter is ignored if you use SING as the advance mode for the sequence table a TIP Every time you use the SEQ DEF command while your 3172 is in sequenced operating mode the instrument attempts to rebuild the sequence table and restart the sequence Therefore sending this command in sequenced mode will slow the programming process and the operation of the generator Using the SEQ DEF Astronics Test Systems 5 69 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H command in FIX or USER mode will greatly speed up programming time SEQuence DELete lt sequence_ gt Description This command will delete a step in a specific sequence table Before you use this step make sure your sequence number is setup correctly for this operation Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sequence
354. is command is grayed out if the right anchor was Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual View Commands He Edit Vi Wave Download About Doh ell lt Ne se itt A fa S i j Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 1 Een v L Anchor 584 E Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 65Pts 6 5Pts Div not moved from its original right position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor becomes the last point of the waveform Unmark The Unmark operation removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point 0 and to the last waveform point Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation The View menu includes operations that let you view various sections of the waveform graph View operations include Zoom In Zoom Out Hide Show Toolbars and Channel selection for dual channel units only Descriptions of the view operations are given below Zoom In The Zoom In operation operates between anchors Anchors are shown as left pointing and right pointing triangles The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform To move an anchor to a new location drag the anchor to the left or right as required If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left the area between the anchors will fill the entire graph when the Zoom In operation is used 5 x R Anchor 648 A
355. is programmed as required Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects the fixed dwell time amplitude hops mode VARiable Discrete Select the variable dwell time amplitude hops mode Response The 3172 returns FIX or VAR depending on the selected dwell setting AHOP DWELI lt dwell_time gt Description This selects the dwell time for amplitude hops when the selected mode is Fixed dwell time hops The dwell time table in this case does not contain the dwell time per step parameters and therefore the value which is programmed with this command remains constant for the entire hop sequence Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dwell_time gt 200e 9 to Numeric 200e 9 Programs dwell time for the fixed dwell time amplitude 20 hop function The same dwell time will be valid for each amplitude hop Dwell time is programmed in units of s Response The 3172 returns the present dwell time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned AHOP FIX DATA lt fix_hop_data gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the amplitude list The dwell time for each amplitude list item is fixed and can be programmed using the HOP DWEL command Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the amplitude hops list B
356. it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3172 will return the present double pulse delay value in units of seconds PULSe POLarity NORMal COMPlemented INVerted 7 Description This command will program the polarity of the pulse in reference to the base line level The polarity options are Normal where the pulse is generated exactly as programmed Inverted where the pulse is inverted about the 0 level base line and Complemented where the pulse is inverted about its mid amplitude axis Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Programs normal pulse output COMPlemeted Discrete Programs complemented pulse output INVerted Discrete Programs an inverted pulse output Response The 3172 will return NORM COMP or INV depending on the present polarity setting PULSe TRANsition STATe FAST LINear SYMMetrical Description This command will program select of the leading edges will transition linearly or in the fastest way The transition options are Fast and Linear Parameters Name Type Default Description FAST Discrete FAST Programs the fast transitions mode In this mode the leading and trailing edges will transition as fast as the instrument allows and as specified in Appendix A LINear Discrete Programs the linear transitions The transitions are allowed within 6 ranges where the leading edge setting sets the operational range and the leading
357. ithin the specified limits Note that clock generator is separate for each channel and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse period is not within range Pulse Period Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Period A Termination 500 2 Connect the P2 output to the counter input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Waveform Square Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 2 for counter reading of 1 ms 1 us The pulse width adjustments assure that the widths of the generated pulses are within the specified limits Note that each channel has its own width adjustments and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse width is not within range 100 us Pulse Width Equipment Counter Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Pulse A Termination 500 2 Connect the P2 output to the counter input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 3 for counter reading of 100 us 0 1 us 2 Note and record the value of setup 3 and calculate KO using the following equation KO will be required the pulse width balance adjustments in Setups 04 05 and 06 KO 1 1 setup 3 reading 128 1000 Calculation example Ast
358. itions Positive going transitions will trigger the generator when the POS option is selected Negative transitions will trigger the generator when the NEG option is selected In Gated mode two transitions in the same direction are required to gate on and off the output The trigger slope command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Set the 3172 to be in an interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Type Default Description POSitive Discrete POS Selects the positive going edge When the level option Astronics Test Systems 5 41 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H is selected for the gate input a positive level above the trigger level setting opens the gate NEGative Discrete Selects the negative going edge When the level option is selected for the gate input a negative level below the trigger level setting opens the gate Response The 3172 returns POS or NEG depending on the selected trigger slope setting RETRigger OFF ON 0 1 Description This parameter turns on and off the re trigger function The re trigger mode causes the 3172 to self trigger at the end of the triggered signal This has a completely different functionality than the internal trigger generator in the sense that once the instrument has been placed in internal trigger mode the output generates continuous waveforms that are triggered by an internal trigger gen
359. itive numbers are unsigned VOLTage LOLevel lt low_level gt Description 5 34 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This command programs the amplitude high level value This value must be programmed in conjunction with the amplitude low level value Use this command to replace the amplitude offset commands The amplitude high level must be followed by the low level command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt low_level gt 20 to Numeric 2 5 Sets the amplitude low level value Simultaneous 19 995 programming of the amplitude high level value is mandatory Response The 3172 returns the present low level value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100 mV would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned VOLTage RANGe SYMMetrical POSitive NEGative Description This command defines the range of the amplitude window The window is selectable from symmetrical where the amplitude is set between 11 V and 11 V positive where the amplitude is set between 0 V and 20 V and negative where the amplitude can be programmed from 0 V to 20 V Note that every time you modify the range the output automatically defaults to the preset value that has been selected for each range Parameters Name Type Default Description SYMMetrical Discrete SYMM Selects the symmetrical window where amplitudes can be programmed between the 11 V to 11 V
360. itrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 3172 returns the present rise time value PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command programs pulse transition from high to low of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse fall time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 3172 returns the present fall time value RAMP DELay lt delay gt Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the ramp delay parameter in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present ramp delay value Ramp TRANsition lt rise gt Description 5 48 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This command programs ramp transition from low to high of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 60 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present rise time value RAMP TRANSsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command programs ramp transition from high to low of the standard ramp wav
361. ive when you click on a control field Vertical Controls 1 0 5 tne Lapsed Tine Faq Figure 4 61 3D Vertical Controls 4 87 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Graphical Screens The 3D Waveform Graphs are shown in Figure 4 62 You can not change anything on the screens However anything that you design in the Vertical Controls fields will automatically be updated and displayed on the graphical screens Yo 5V DEED X ims 0 4mssDiv X ims 0 ims Div Y 360Deq 45Deq Div X ima 0 4ms Div Figure 4 62 3D Waveform Graphs 4 88 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Designing 3D 3D profiles are designed in the Vertical Controls fields Notice that Profiles there are three separate control fields Amplitude Frequency and Phase Always start the design from the Shared Horizontal Controls group In the View group remove profiles that you do not care to change Click on the Parameters tab and set up the duration of the waveform An example of a 3D profile chirp in this example is shown in Figure 4 63 Profiles were designed for amplitude frequency and phase As you can see the duration of the waveform was selected to be 100 ms ZS untitled 3D Composer _ ll File Options Download Design About ID a Wests Shared Horizontal Controls Amplitude CHT X 100ms 1Oms Biv Y 2 B 25ViDiw View Parameters Duration fi oo ms x
362. justment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 19 for DMM reading of 2 5 V 10 mV Setup 20 4 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 3 995 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 20 for DMM reading of 4 V 20 mV Setup 21 5 5 V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 20V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Astronics Test Systems 7 29 3172 User Manual Setup 22 Setup 23 Setup 24 7 30 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Amplitude 10 mV Offset 5 495 V Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 21 for DMM reading of 5 5 V 25 mV 7V Offset Output Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 20 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminat
363. l The PLL operates in standard and arbitrary waveform modes locking to external signals ranging from as low as 100 Hz to over 10 MHz When placed in PLL mode the LED near its input connector blinks until achieving full lock When locked the LED lights constantly as an indication that the signal is locked to an external reference Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the PLL function on and off Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the present PLL function setting Astronics Test Systems 5 107 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PHASe2 LOCK SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg0 Description This command selects the source for the PLL function Source options are External signal applied to the front panel PLL IN connector Trigger signals applied through the backplane trigger lines or trigger signal applied through the ECLTO line While the last two options have fixed logic levels the front panel input may accept various levels including such levels that reside on offsets Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Selects the front panel PLL IN input as the reference signal The input can be programmed for trigger level to adjust the threshold and for slope to define the reference slope TTLTrg lt n gt Discrete Selects one of the backplane trigger lines TTLTrg 0 through 7 as the reference input ECLTrg lt n gt Discrete Selects the backplan
364. l select the calibration item number Astronics Test Systems 7 7 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H indicated in the calibration table If a potentiometer is listed in the right hand column of the calibration table remove the right side panel and adjust the potentiometer to bring the DMM reading as close to the target value as feasible and then skip to step 9 To keep the internal temperature stable leave the side panel in place except when making potentiometer adjustments If no potentiometer is listed in the right column of the calibration table then click the calibration adjustment number Figure 7 8 Using the right arrow key on the computer keyboard position the vertical cursor immediately to the left of the right most digit as shown Click the calibration adjustment number Amplitude Then use the keyboard arrow keys to position the cursor here Figure 7 8 Making an Adjustment 9 10 11 12 Use the up arrow and down arrow keys on the computer keyboard to adjust the number up or down as required while observing the reading on the DMM Adjust the number until the DMM reading is as close as possible to the target value given in the calibration table When finished verify that the DMM reading is within the low and high limits given in the table If you are not able to calibrate within the specified range there is either a problem with the way you are measuring the parameter or a pro
365. le clock cycles 150 ns 0 100 ns to 20s 20 ns 6 sample clock cycles 250 ns 5 of setting 100 ns to 20s 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns 5 of setting 1 sample clock period 1 to 1 000 000 programmable Automatically locks 3172 output to external signal applied to trigger port Same as trigger input Standard Waveforms 500 Hz to 10 MHz Arbitrary Waveforms 500 Hz to 100M points per cycle Coarse 180 Fine 362 with 0 01 2 resolution 10 External signal offsets phase Available in PLL mode when unit is locked to an external signal 100 Hz 10 kHz Standard Waveforms 500 Hz to 10 MHz Arbitrary Waveforms 500 Hz to 100 M pts per cycle Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A2 100 kQ 5 20 V 130 30 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H External AM Characteristics Description External signal amplitude modulates the carrier signal Input Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A1 Impedance 10 KQ Coupling DC Bandwidth 1 MHz Range 0 V to 5 V controls modulation depth from 0 to 100 respectively Function Generator Characteristics Description One may select from a list of a built in library of standard waveforms The waveforms are computed every time a waveform is selected The integrity of the waveform and its upper frequency limit depend on the programmed frequency value and the number of waveform points that are used for computing one cycle interval Standard Functions
366. le contains two channels The procedure in this section must be Calibration performed separately for both channels 1 Using a coaxial cable BNC male to Cinch or Cannon DM53740 connect the pulse generator front panel output to the DMM input See Figure 7 9 for front panel pin assignments 2 Click the Module button Figure 7 10 to drop down the selection list Then select the pulse generator channel to calibrate Channels are numbered in ascending order starting with the module installed in the upper position of the 3172 enclosure The example shown in Figure 7 10 is for a 3172 having one W2 module Channel 1 and one P2 module PG1 is Channel 2 and PG2 is Channel 3 POZ OUT d n Pulse Generator Output PG2 CLOCK OUT J2 A4 TRIG IN J2 A3 GATE IN DAN Pulse Generator Output PG1 OUT J2 41 PG1 Figure 7 9 Front Panel Pin Assignments for Pulse Generator Module Link 3172 W2P2 VXI_MB VXI0 3 INSTR Slot a Click here for drop down buttons W2 Channel 1 P2 Channel 3 Figure 7 10 Selecting the Module to Calibrate Astronics Test Systems 7 13 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3 Click System Figure 7 11 Then in the drop down list select Calibration The Calibration Panel will then open Figure 7 12 Ire ArbConnection i Tabor Electronics gt gt Untitled cad File View System Help Link faisze vi H wem zl De H en General Parame
367. le is placed on the vertical axis with a precision of 1 65536 The 3172 has 1M waveform memory capacity as standard Each horizontal point has a unique address the first being 00000 and the last depends on the memory option In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time from address 0 to the last address The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter Unlike the built in standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument s memory Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs Arbitrary Memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory depends on the option that is installed in your instrument The various options are listed in Chapter 1 of this manual If you purchased the 3172 with its basic configuration you should expect to have 1 Meg words to load waveforms Waveforms are created using small sections of the arbitrary memory The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments up to 16k and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment each havi
368. limits it must be recalibrated using the calibration procedure as outlined in Chapter 7 of this manual wae To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each Initial Instrument test it is required that instrument be reset to factory default values Setting prior to each test This tests the accuracy of the pulse period Pulse period is specified in two run modes continuous and interrupted In continuous mode the accuracy is controlled by a Synthesizer circuit and hence the accuracy is much higher than in the interrupted run mode where the accuracy there is controlled by an analog circuit The accuracy is tested in two modes continuous and gated only because the controlling circuit is the same for all of the interrupted run modes To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Period Accuracy Astronics Test Systems 6 65 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Period Accuracy Equipment Counter timer Continuous Run Preparation Mode Tests 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Period Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 Channel 2 output to the counter timer input Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Single Pulse Output On Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Period As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform period accuracy continuous run mode tests using Table 6 51
369. litude It contains the list of O and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its amplitude shift keying sequence advance as programmed 0 1 Amplitude In ASK the carrier waveform CW has two amplitudes an initial amplitude level which is set by the 0 Amplitude parameter and shifted amplitude which is set by the 1 Amplitude The control data table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the amplitude shifts from base to shifted amplitudes Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the ASK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker setting programs a step index in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the ASK marker output Astronics Test Systems 4 29 3172 User Manual Amp Freq Hop 4 30 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Amp Freq Hop panel Figure 4 18 contains parameters for controlling the hop modulation function To turn one of the functions on and off click on the appropriate button in the State group The output has two hop options Fixed and Variable In Fixed mode the output steps through the pre assigned hop values at a constant rate as programmed using the dwell time parameter In Variable mode the output dwells on each step for a period of time that is programmed in the Dwell Time field in the hop data table tha
370. ll Undo Section Properties Design Untz VM ms Section Start 38 ms Repeat fi Duration x R 48 ms Figure 4 53 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Example The fourth pulse section is complete so we are now ready to start Section 5 building the fifth and final section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 54 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Note that there are fast transitions required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in the figure E ku Train D d onion F CH1 ci Pulse Train Design Format Ot inewas Time Level Points ae Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 42 8 ms Repeat 2 Apply Duration x A 35 2 ms Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 78ms 7 8ms Div Figure 4 54 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example Astronics Test Systems 4 77 3172 User Manual Downloading the Pulse
371. lows Output On Amplitude 1 5 V Astronics Test Systems 7 61 3172 User Manual Setup 47 Setup 48 Setup 49 7 62 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Period ims Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 46 for a DMM reading of 750 mV 5 mV 0 5 V Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 0 5 V Period 1 ms Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 47 for a DMM reading of 250 mV 1 5 mV 150 mV Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude 150 mV Period 1 ms Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 48 for a DMM reading of 75 mV 0 5 mV 50 mV Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Output On Amplitude 50 mV Period 1ms Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 49 for a DMM reading of 25 mV 0 5 mV Setup 50 15 mV Amplitude Equipment DMM Preparation
372. ls Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Pulse Setting Errors Astronics Test Systems Pulse settings errors may involve one or more parameters and there is also a chance that more than one error is embedded in the settings For simplicity the P2 generates an error code but its output shape remains unchanged Each error is indicated by a number and short description that provide clues which of the parameters conflict Detailed description for each of the conflicting settings is given below Settings conflict errors may occur when you program parameters that collide with each other or when programming a certain parameter throws the entire pulse shape out of its legal and specified boundaries The error codes are returned individually when you use the syst err query The error codes returned have three digits and these are described below including the explanation of how to remove the error s by correcting conflicting or out of range parameters ei Note The following abbreviations were used throughout the following settings conflict descriptions PER Period setting HIL High level setting LOL Low level setting WID Pulse width setting DEL Single pulse delay setting DDEL Double pulse delay setting LEE Leading edge setting TRE Trailing edge setting BUR Burst count setting DUTY Duty cycle setting 3 49 3172 User Manual 222 Data out of range
373. lse width does not normally change when you change the period of the pulse On the other hand some applications require that the ratio between the period and the pulse width remain constant regardless of the period setting In a case like this use fixed duty cycle mode Hold Duty Cycle mode is programmed in units of percent defining the ratio between the pulse width to the period x 100 An example is shown in Figure 3 6 If you program the duty cycle parameter to be 10 and the period to be 50 ms after you modify the period to 25 ms the width is adjusted automatically to 2 5 ms so Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual that the duty cycle remains 10 To modify the pulse mode to hold duty cycle mode refer to the the Selecting a Pulse Mode section above Use the following command to program the duty cycle value puls dcyc lt value gt The duty cycle is programmable from 1 to 95 with a resolution of 0 001 The default value is 50 Period 50 ms Width 5 ms Duty Cycle 10 ml adb JIL a Period 25 ms Width 2 5 ms Duty Cycle 10 Figure 3 6 Hold Duty Cycle Mode Example External Pulse Width External pulse width mode shapes the trigger input and uses it to Mode define the width of the pulses at the pulse output connector As shown in Figure 3 7 as long as the signal remains below the trigger threshold the pulse idles at its low level setting When the signal crosse
374. lt Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the built in sine waveform TRlangle Discrete Selects the built in triangular waveform SQUare Discrete Selects the built in square waveform SPULse Discrete Selects the built in pulse waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the built in ramp waveform SINC Discrete Selects the built in sinc waveform EXPonential Discrete Selects the built in exponential waveform GAUSsian Discrete Selects the built in gaussian waveform DC Discrete Selects the built in DC waveform NOISe Discrete Selects the built in noise waveform Response The 3172 returns SIN TRI SQU SPUL RAMP SINC GAUS EXP DC or NOIS depending on the present 3172 setting SINusoid PHASe lt phase gt Description This command programs the start phase for the standard sine waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary or modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees Sine phase resolution is 0 1 limited however at high frequencies above approximately 500 kHz depending on the number of waveform points that are used to create the sine shape Response The 3172 returns the present start phase value Astronics Test Systems 5 45 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H SINusoid POWer lt power gt Description This command programs power for the sine waveform This command has no affect on arbitrar
375. lt phas gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase start of the standard sine waveform in units of percent lt power gt 1to9 Numeric integer 0 Programs the power coefficient of the standard sine only waveform Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset phase and power coefficient settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 0 1 Astronics Test Systems 5 59 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H APPLy TRlangle lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phas gt lt power gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard triangle and programs the frequency amplitude offset start phase and power coefficient simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate FM the 3172 will stop generating FM will revert to the standard triangle waveform and will update the triangle parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard triangle 30e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard triangle 22 waveform in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard triangle waveform in units of volts lt phas gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase start of the standard triangle waveform in units of percent lt power gt 1to
376. m Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz Arbitrary waveform 1 Sa s to 2 5 MSa s 2 to 10 000 Sine wave A 9 3172 User Manual Carrier Frequency Range Envelope Waveform Envelope Frequency Modulation Depth FREQUENCY HOPS Hopped Waveform Hop Frequency Range Resolution Hop Table Size Dwell Time Mode Dwell Time Dwell Time Resolution AMPLITUDE HOPS Hopped Waveform Frequency Range Resolution Hop Amplitude Range Resolution Hop Table Size Dwell Time Mode Dwell Time Dwell Time Resolution FSK Shifted Waveform Carrier Shifted Frequency Range Baud Range FSK Data Bits Length PSK Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Phase Shift Range Baud Range PSK Data Bits Length ASK Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range A 10 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 10 Hz to 30 MHz Sine square triangle Ramp 10 mHz to 100 kHz 0 to 200 Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz 11 digits 2 to 1000 Fixed or Programmable for each step 200 ns to 20s 20 ns Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz 11 digits NEG mode 2 5 to 20 Vp p POS mode 2 5 to 20 Vp p SYMM mode 2 5 V to 22 Vp p FSR of maximum amplitude 4096 2 to 5000 Fixed or Variable for each step 200 ns to 20s 20 ns Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz 1 bit sec to 10 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz 0 to 359 99 1 bits sec to 10 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Sine wave 10 Hz to 30 MHz Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Amplitude
377. m that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 6 Response The 3172 returns the present phase offset value in units of degrees PHASe1 LOCK MASTer SLAVe Description By definition all 3172 units are turned on as masters This does not interfere with normal operation because the electrical circuits are designed to handle shared nodes This means that for synchronization purpose slave units must be programmed to slave state The sequence to synchronize then is first determine who is master and who is slave using this command and then switch synchronization on using the phas lock 1 command Parameters Name Type Default Description MASTer Discrete MAST Selects the master unit in a multi instrument system The master feeds the sample clock and the synchronization signals through the ECLTrg 0 1 lines SLAVe Discrete Selects the slave unit s in a multi instrument system The slave instruments receive the sample clock and the synchronization signals from the ECLTrg 0 1 lines Response The 3172 returns MAST or SLAV depending on the present backplane synchronization setting PHASe2 LOCK OFF ON 0 1 Description This command turns the PLL phase lock loop function on and off The reference signal is applied to a front panel input PLL IN and the 3172 locks onto it automatically using a smart frequency phase sensing sequence After lock the phase of the 3172 can be shifted in reference to the input signa
378. mand will download waveform data to the 3172 memory Waveform data is loaded to the 3172 using high speed binary transfer A special command is defined by IEEE STD 488 2 for this purpose High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data As an example the next command will download to the generator an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe 42048 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data 1024 waveform points into the active memory 5 52 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual segment The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 4 designates the number of digits that follow e 2048 is the even number of bytes to follow The generator accepts binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform For example 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000 points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 2 Oz bee ASCII digit ASCII digit Start of Data Block Number of to Follow 2 Byts Per Byte Count Data Point 2 x Number of low byte binary high byte
379. mber 980949 Rev H This command selects the source path for multi instrument synchronization Parameters Name Type Default Description ADJacent Discrete ADJ Selects the adjacent source path Adjacent path is automatically configured between two instruments in the same carrier in the following configurations only 3172 W2W2 and 3172 W2P2 ECLT Discrete Selects the backplane ECLTrg as the synchronization path In this case the ecl trigger lines are turned on and connect between slots to provide the synchronization signals Note that VXI backplane ECL trigger lines are limited to carry frequencies below 66 MHz LBUS Discrete Selects the backplane LBUS lines as the synchronization path LBUS lines typically support 3152B operation through its entire frequency range To use the LBUS the master and slave instruments must be installed into a contiguous group of VXI chassis slots with the master on the left Also the LBUS jumpers must be installed For details refer to the Local Bus Configuration section in Chapter 2 Response The 3172 returns ADJ ECLT or LBUS depending on the current instrument couple path assignment INSTrument COUPle SLAVe DELete lt LAN_address gt Description This command deletes a designated slave instrument from a synchronized multi instruments system list This command is associated with LAN operation only Parameters Name Type Default Description lt LAN_address gt String Will remove a designated in
380. ment every time a trigger is received Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequence step to the next assigned segment STEP Discrete In step advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next waveform only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 3172 generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next segment If repeats were selected for a segment the loop counter is executed automatically MlXed Discrete Mixed mode is a special mode that combines continuous step advance with single step advance ina sequence There are three conditions for the sequence generator to operate in this mode 1 The 3172 is set to operate in continuous mode 2 Select the MIX sequence advance mode 3 Assign the mixed mode bits for each sequence step in your SEQ DEF command 0 programs normal advance 1 programs trigger advance Step with a 0 bit assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats continuously and only a valid trigger signal will advance this step to the next step Response The 3172 returns the AUTO TRIG STEP or MIX depending on the present sequence advance mode setting SEQuence SELect lt sequence_ gt Description This command selects an active sequence to be generated at the output connector By selecting the active
381. meters Name Range Type Default Description lt n gt Numeric integer 0 Will specify the ECL trigger line that will be affected by only this command Only two lines are available in this case 0 and 1 0 1 Discrete 0 Will specify the state of the designated ECL trigger line either on or off Response For ECLTRGO the 3172 returns 0 1 if the output is on or 0 0 if the output is off For ECLTRG1 the 3172 returns 1 1 if the output is on or 1 0 if the output is off OUTPut FILTer 2M 25MH 60M 120M Description This command selects which filter is connected to the 3172 output Observe the following restrictions when you try to use this command Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform In fact the default waveform shape is sine Therefore filter selection will be available for use only after you select a different waveform or change the output mode to use Parameters Name Type Default Description 2M Discrete Connects a 2MHz Bessel type filter to the output path 25M Discrete Connects a 25MHz Bessel type filter to the output path 60M Discrete Connects a 60MHZ Elliptic type filter to the output path 120M Discrete Connects a 120MHz Elliptic type filter to the output path Response The 3172 returns NONE 2M 25M 60M or 120M depending on the type of filter presently connected to the output OUTPut FiLTer OFF ON 0 1 Description This command toggles
382. mmended Test Equipment Publication Number 980949 Rev H The following performance checks verify proper operation of the instrument and should normally be used 1 As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications 2 As part of the troubleshooting procedure After any repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Specifications are valid within an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Below 20 C and above 30 C the specifications are degraded by 0 1 for every 1 C change Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 3172 W2 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test To reset the Model 3172 W2 to factory defaults use the Factory Rest option in the Utility Panel Recommended test equipment specifications for troubleshooti
383. modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt am_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 100 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in 1e6 units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating waveforms only is affected Response The 3172 returns the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value is in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned AM DEPth lt depth gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Astronics Test Systems 5 75 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt depth gt Oto 100 Numeric 50 Programs the depth of the modulating waveform in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present modulating depth value FM Modulation Use the following commands for programming the FM parameters FM control is internal There are two types of waveforms that can be used as the modulating waveforms Standard and Arbitrary The standard waveforms are built in a library of waveforms and could be used anytime without external control The arbitrary waveforms must be loaded into a special FM arbitrary waveform memory and only then can be used as a modulating waveform Programming FM DEViation lt deviation gt Description This programs the deviation ran
384. moval while the unit is in the VXI chassis remove all except two screws before installing the unit Replace all screws after calibration is complete Calibration is performed with the 3172 installed in a VXlbus chassis Either a register based or message based controller may be used and the procedure is the same for both options The ArbConnection software application must be installed and interfaced to the instrument Periodic Calibration To ensure continued accuracy it is recommended that periodic Calibration calibration be performed at intervals of one year Interval Warm up Install the 3172 in a VXlbus chassis Turn on the chassis power and p allow the 3172 to warm up and stabilize for at least 30 minutes before calibrating If the instrument has been subjected to temperatures outside the range of 25 C 5 C allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before calibrating 1 Start the ArbConnection software The Startup A Calibration Setup Communication Options window will appear as shown in and Initialization Figure 7 1 Astronics Test Systems 7 3 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Select these options Startup amp Communication Options Communications Setup Specify an Address Communicate Only Reset Instrument amp Panels Work Offline Model List aise 0t iaY Store mode and don t show this D WI box at startup Add Addr
385. n Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude As specified in the Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests using Table 6 53 Table 6 53 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output P2 Amplitude DMM Reading Each Range Setting Error Limits 10 00 V 5 00 V 50 mV 3 000 V 1 5 V 25 mV 200 mV 100 mV 15 mV 1 000 V 500 mV 18 mV 100 mV 50 mV 15 mV Astronics Test Systems 6 67 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H The offset accuracy is checked for all three amplitude ranges Symmetrical Positive and Negative Test the accuracy of the offset if you suspect that this is a problem with the output amplifier Offset Accuracy Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect P2 channel 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 20 mV Pulse mode Hold Duty Cycle Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Offset As specified in the test Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 54 Table 6 54 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range P2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 4 000 V 4 000 V 35 mV 2 Modify the amplitude range to Positive and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 55 Table 6 55 Amplitude Accuracy Positive Range 2 000 V 2 000 V 25 mV 5 000 V
386. n Tests SEN Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Level Output TTL Frequency 100 Hz 2 Connect the function generator to the P2 External Trigger input 3 Connect P2 channel 2 outputs and Sync Output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the P2 as follows Pulse Mode Single Pulse Width 100 us Pulse Period 200 us Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify trace on the oscilloscope showing synchronized pulses at 200 us intervals Pulse and Sync Outputs 2 Change the P2 run mode setting to Trigger Verify that the P2 generates pulses with the following properties Period 200 us Pulse width 100 us Also verify that the output and sync pulses are synchronized to the trigger signal at the Trigger Input Test Results Pass Fail 3 Toggle P2 trigger slope from positive to negative and back 4 Verify on the oscilloscope that the P2 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 75 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 5 Change the P2 run mode setting to Burst and change the Burst Count setting to 5 Observe that 5 pulses are visible at every cycle of 1 ms Test Results Pass Fail 6 Verify that Sync Output shows synchronization pulse having 5 ms pulse width Verify that the SYNC is high for the duration of the burst Test Results Pa
387. n in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator returns its serial number in a format similar to the following 000000451 10 characters maximum SMEMory WRITe READ Description This command programs read and write switches for the 3172 shared memory block Shared memory transfer is the fastest way to get waveforms into the 3172 In shared memory mode the 3172 s CPU disconnects from the waveform memory and passes access to the VXlbus The internal data bus is connected directly to the VXlbus and data is downloaded into the memory in binary blocks using A32 or optionally A24 memory space Byte and bit order are the same as with the Arbitrary Block transfers as described in the Arbitrary Waveform Commands section After the data is loaded into the instrument control is returned to the CPU In shared memory mode the 3172 s memory acts similar to Direct Memory Access Astronics Test Systems 5 115 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H DMA The instrument has to be told when to receive data send data surrender or gain control The 3172 has an auto increment address counter and therefore the slot 0 controller must define the base address for both write and read cycles Parameters Name Type Default Description WRITe Discrete EXT Will prepare the shared memory to accept data from the backplane data bus Data will not be shared before this function is turned on using smem 1 READ
388. n mode options are described separately for each of the panels below 4 21 3172 User Manual FM 4 22 Publication Number 980949 Rev H gt Operation d e Modulation ASK FSKIPSK gt Auxiliary l Ampi Freq Hop E f i i i Figure 4 13 Modulation Panels The FM panel Figure 4 14 contains parameters for controlling the amplitude modulation function To turn the FM function on and off click on the FM button in the State group The various groups in the FM panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the FM function FM Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the FM function These are CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform In case the modulating waveform is one of the built in standard waveforms the modulation will be symmetrical about the CW frequency setting Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of
389. n this section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION Always perform disassembly repair and cleaning at a CAUTION static safe work station SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES O NO STORE NEAR TATIC ROMAGNETIC MAGNETIC OR ROMAGNETIC MA RADIOACTIVE FIELDS Scope The calibration sections in this chapter address the W2 and W6 waveform generator modules and the P2 pulse generator module These designations refer to the module types indicated in the 3172 model number For example Model 3172 W6P2 contains one W6 type waveform generator module and one P2 type pulse generator module Model 3172 W2W2 contains two W2 type waveform generators Several other 3172 models exist with various combinations of internal modules Astronics Test Systems 7 1 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Calibration Calibration Types There are two types of calibration for Model 3172 e Factory Calibration Performed only on new instruments as part of the manufacturing process or after repair at an authorized service center e Periodic Calibration Performed at recommended intervals to ensure that the instrument remains accurate over time Instructions for both calibration types are provided in this chapter Recomm
390. nce determine the actual amplitude from the resistance ratio of the internal output impedance to the load impedance The external pulse width input is using the external signal to shape and define the width of the output pulses The input is a TTL level signal and is pulled up to 5 V through a 4 7 kQ resistor As long as the input remains low the output idles on its low level setting When the input goes high the output generates the high level and the width is proportional to the time that the input remains high level Output Waveforms The W2 module can generate five types of waveforms Astronics Test Systems e Standard Fixed 3172 User Manual W2 Standard FIXED Waveforms W2 Arbitrary 1 18 Publication Number 980949 Rev H e Arbitrary e Sequenced e Modulated e Half cycle The P2 module can generate a variety of pulses through two independent outputs e Single e Double e Delayed The W2 must pre load its memory before it can generate standard waveforms On power up the waveform memory contains no specific data The sine waveform which is the default is computed and loaded into the waveform memory as part of the reset procedure Later if you select another standard waveform the 3172 W2 computes the waveform points and loads them into the waveform memory Every time the user selects a new waveform there is some delay for the processor to compute the data and download it to memory The delay inte
391. nchronization Commands W2 Modules Only 5 104 LAN System Configuration Commande uk 5 110 System COMIMANGS ee sale ts Mace cl Ronee ee eege tiated ie ee ae Ee 5 114 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries cc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaes 5 117 The SCPI Status Registers aaa eect aie catalan Be aie ae AR Ne net 5 120 The Status Byte Register STB EE 5 121 Reading the Status EE 5 121 Clearing KEE 5 122 Service Request Enable Register SRE ooo ceeececseesessesssesesteeseesteseserteeneeneass 5 122 Standard Event Status Register ESR tee Os 5 124 Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE sssssssssernrersseernrrrrrrsssrrrnerrrrrrnrerset 5 125 Error IMGSS AG OG 5 a ects cach dak chart da a e a a aE baat ta ana da urea dak aged a i 5 125 Astronics Test Systems vii 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Chapter ee eee 6 1 Performance GHOCKS viseiiciccctacteccsidasciasstecadacncusdiucsdernarsndusnaacdcuseansetuanantuduccesscdesuansnansuendudeas 6 1 VIE ERNEIEREN e 6 1 Perf rmance ENEE 6 2 Environmental Conditions 2s eigene deg steed EBEN EAR EEN eege Eege 6 2 Warm up EEN oot nes dee ees 6 2 Initial Instrument Setting DEE 6 2 Recommended Test FOUND g et cates r eege Eegen 6 2 Test Procedures W2 Module seiiiciiecceattacs tege eee deta eed Hada Deh NEE SEENEN deere 6 3 Initial Instrument Setting 22a cna Wace eee ae ee ene ade ie Ae Ta Ae ed ede cae ts 6 3 ETIKETT 6 3 Frequency Acc
392. nctions for both versions 3172 W2 3172 W2W2 3172 P2 3172 P2P2 3172 W2P2 Figure 1 1 3172 Configurations W2 Module e Single width C size VXlbus Module e e e Provision to generate five types of waveforms standard Feature Highlights arbitrary sequenced modulated and half cycle e 200 MS s sample clock frequency for generating arbitrary and 1 4 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual sequenced waveforms e Sine and square waveforms to 30 MHz and other waveforms to over 1 MHz e Frequency hopping and sweeping e Modulated waveforms AM ASK FM FSK and PSK e 14 digit sample clock frequency setting limited by 1 uS s e Extremely low phase noise Clock stability of 1ppm e PLL function that automatically locks to external signals e 16 bit vertical resolution 5 mVp p to 20 Vp p into 50 Q e Three voltage windows 0 V to 20 V 11 V to 11 V and 0 V to 20 V e Choice of three matching load impedance lt 2 50 Q and 93 Q e 1 M point memory depth e Ultra fast waveform downloading e Trigger delay and period controlled auto re trigger e Built in counter timer Figure 1 2 Racal Instruments 3172 W2P2 Configuration Shown P2 Module Feature Fits within a single width C size VXlbus Module Highlights e Two channels operating independently or synchronously e 50 MHz clock frequency for generating pulse waveforms e Independent and fine control of pulse parameters such as Astr
393. nd The same command sets the position of the trigger output and the position of the SYNC output LCOMplete Discrete Generates a single trigger signal in sequence mode only once when the active segment appears for the first time INTernal Discrete This type selects the internal generator as the source EXTernal Discrete This type selects the external trigger input as the trigger source An external signal must be connected to the TRIG IN connector for this mode to operate correctly Response The 3172 returns BIT LCOM INT or EXT depending on the present 3172 trigger source setting OUTPut TRIGger SOURce P1 P2 SYNC1 SYNC2 Description The TTLTRG signals when enabled and placed on the backplane can be asserted with signals coming from a number of sources Use this command to assign the source for the active TTLTRG line Use this command with p2 modules only Parameters Name Type Default Description P1 Discrete P1 Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the waveform The source of the trigger signal is the P1 channel P2 Discrete Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the waveform The source of the trigger signal is the P2 channel SYNC1 Discrete Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the waveform The source of the trigger signal is the sync output of the P1 channel SYNC2 Discrete Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the waveform The source of the trigger signal is t
394. nd download 10 step ASK list with alternating 0 and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify ASK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sinewave Period 0 1 ms Amplitude Every 0 1 ms alternates between 2 V and 4 V Test Results Pass Fail 6 42 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Variable Dwell Time Equipment Oscilloscope Frequency Hops Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Hop Hop Mode Variable Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare open the Hop Table composer and download the following table both channels AON Frequency Dwell Time 1 0e6 50e 6 1 2e6 100e 6 1 4e6 150e 6 1 6e6 200e 6 1 8e6 250e 6 2 0e6 300e 6 2 2e6 350e 6 2 4e6 400e 6 2 6e6 450e 6 2 8e6 500e 6 Test Procedure 1 Verify Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Frequency steps increasing dwell time from 50 us to 500 us Max A 2 8 MHz Min A 1 0 MHz Period 2750 us Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 43 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev
395. nd modify segment loops and links Also use these commands Commands to add or delete sequences from your instrument W2 Modules Only Tabie 5 8 summarizes the sequenced waveforms control commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Generating Sequenced Waveforms Sequenced waveforms are made of a number of arbitrary waveforms which can be linked and looped in user programmable order Sequenced waveforms are generated from waveforms stored in the 3172 as memory segments Therefore before a sequence can be used download waveform segments to the arbitrary memory using TRAC or DMA methods Information on how to partition the memory and how to download waveforms is given in Chapter 3 in the section titled Generating Arbitrary Waveforms An example of how sequenced waveforms work is demonstrated in Figures 1 7 through 1 9 The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in user defined order Figure 1 10 shows a sequence of waveforms that were stored in three different memory segments There are a number of tools that you can use to build a sequence table The easiest way is of course to use the ArbConnection program Information how to use the ArbConnection program is given in a later chapter In other cases SCPI programming allows low level programming of sequence tables In general sequences can be build one step at a time using the SEQ
396. ndard waveform frequency is gt 200 kHz The reduced number of points available at higher frequencies decreases timing resolution for the standard waveforms For example for a 20 MHz square wave only ten points per period are available Therefore duty cycle resolution is decreased to 10 increments 3 17 3172 User Manual Standard Waveform Parameters Using the Apply Command 3 18 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The built in library of standard waveforms provides basic waveform shapes First select the basic shape and then specify the waveform parameters to create the finished waveform to fit your requirements For each standard waveform shape you may adjust the frequency amplitude and offset Some wave shapes have additional parameters available For example you may set the starting phase for a sine wave or the rise and fall time for a ramp waveform The following example demonstrates how to select a standard pulse waveform and set its parameters rst Restores factory defaults func mode fix Sets the output function to the standard built in library of waveforms This is also the default function mode so if you are using the reset command there is no need to re select this function func shap puls Selects the pulse waveform puls del 0 Sets the delay value to 0 s puls wid 20 Sets the pulse width to 10 expressed as a percentage of the waveform period puls tran 3 Sets the rise time leading edge to 3
397. nded Parameters Options Dialog Bos 4 86 Figure 4 61 3D Vertical TEE eege deser EesegtZieag erh id reetenin meh eitcnaedter dee tumentinsa aaa eatnamekee 4 87 Figure 4 62 3D Waveform Grapns eege 4 88 Figure 4 63 Eupen degt 4 89 Figure 4 64 Command Re 4 90 Figure 4 65 Log File Example scccsjscsctiedicie hes eedessucaraecheneehenuane E SEENEN EE Nee EEN 4 91 Figure 5 1 3172 Instrument Channel 5 20 Figure 5 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format ccccececeeeeeeee rete ee eeeeteneeeeeeeeeeteeea 5 53 Figure 5 3 3172 W2 16 bit Waveform Data Point Hepnresentaton 5 54 Figure 5 4 Segment Address and Size Evample ANEN 5 57 xvi Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Figure 5 5 64 bit Sequence Table Download Fomat 5 67 Figure 5 6 SCPI Status Registers EE 5 123 Figure 7 1 Startup amp Communication Options VWimdow 7 4 Figure 7 2 AroConnection Main lee EE 7 4 Figure 7 3 VXI Instrument SElOCtONissiisyieeescieeueteietae hl cated keto ee elec ee 7 5 Figure 7 4 Front Panel Pin Assignments for Waveform Generator Module 7 6 Figure 7 5 Selecting the Module to Calibrate un 7 6 Figure 7 6 Selecting the Calibration Funchon AEN 7 7 Figure 7 7 Calibration Panels EE 7 7 Figure 7 8 Making an AG JUSTIA te chute Ee ieeeg deg ae nome cea goal etaieeer 7 8 Figure 7 9 Front Panel Pin Assignments for Pulse Generator Module 7 13 Figure 7 10 Selecting the Module to CGaibrate AANEREN 7 13 Figure
398. nes and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 32 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 3172 as segment table data Figure 5 4 shows how to prepare the 32 bit work for the segment start address and size There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 56 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual sz x J tone TRUNCATE Figure 5 4 Segment Address and Size Example 1 Each channel has its own segment table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download segment table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of segments is 1 maximum number of segments is 16k 3 Maximum segment size depends on your installed option With the basic 3172 you can program maximum 1M in one segment 4 Segment table data has 32 bit values of which are used for segment size Therefore Data for each segment must have 4 bytes 5 The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 6 The 3172 has no control over data sent to its segment table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partition Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the segment table The Apply Control The apply commands combine popular
399. ng calibration and performance checking is listed in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment Specifications Equipment Specification Oscilloscope 500 MHz 2 channels jitter 500 MHz 2 channels jitter package package Distortion Analyzer 1 MHz BW 1 MHz BW Automatic distortion Automatic distortion measurement lt 0 02 distortion measurement lt 0 02 distortion 6 5 Digits ACV DCV Digital Multimeter 6 5 Digits ACV DCV 200 MHz Universal counter timer 2 6 2 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual channels 1 ns single shot resolution Spectrum Analyzer 1 5 GHz 0 4 dB accuracy Pulse Generator with manual trigger 50 MHz manual or software trigger Test Procedures W2 Module Initial Instrument Setting Frequency Accuracy Astronics Test Systems The W2 module is a single channel arbitrary waveform generator Use the following procedures to check the W2 module against its specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what acceptable limits for the test are If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem To avoid confusion as to what initial se
400. ng Each Range W2 Amplitude Setting Error Limits Sym Pos Neg 10 00V 3 534v 853mV T T J T 3 000 V 1 060 V 60 6my J T T 1 000 V 353 4 mV 23 5mv T T T 200 mV 70 71 mV 20 7 my J TI TI TI 1oomV aam 5 3my d 2 Modify the amplitude range to Symmetrical and the output function to External AM Perform amplitude accuracy checks using Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy External AM DAC Output W2 Amplitude Setting Error Limits DMM Reading pT 10 00V 8 584V 485 3mv J Oooo a 1 060 V 60 6 mV Astronics Test Systems 6 5 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 100v 353 4mVv 423 5mV J P2000 mV 7071mv 207mv J p00 mV 35 34mv 5 8mv Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect W2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude Range As specified in the test Amplitude As specified in the test Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests using Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DDS Output DMM Reading Each Range W2 Amplitude Setting Error Limits 10 00V 3 534v 85 3mV T TI 3 000 V 1 060 V 60 6mvy TI TI TI 1 000 V 353 4 mV 23 5mV o T T 200 mV 70 71 mV 20 7 my J II TI 100mvV
401. ng a unique length Minimum segment size is 16 points Information on how to partition the memory define segment length and download waveform data to the 3172 is given in the following paragraphs 5 51 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 5 6 Arbitrary Waveform Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped NORM W2 TRACe DATA lt data_array gt w2 DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 w2 DELete NAME 1 to 10k W2 ALL DIGital 1 W2 DATA RATE 10e 6 to 200e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 w2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 W2 SELect 1 to 10k 1 W2 SEGMent DATA lt data_array gt W2 FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped Description Binary data is sent to the instrument in byte high byte low order For convenience programmers can write their code in reverse order but have to let the instrument know that the data is reversed In case the code stores the data in byte low byte high order use this form bord swap command to reverse the byte order Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Binary data will be sent in byte high byte low order AWAPped Discrete Binary data will be sent in byte low byte high order Response The 3172 returns NORM or SWAP depending on the present format setting TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This com
402. ng sequences that use a large number of segment and sequence steps As an example the next command will generate three step sequence with 16 bytes of data that contains segment number repeats loops and mixed mode flag option SEQuence 216 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 16 bytes of data 2 step sequence to the sequence table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 16 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 8 The generator accepts binary data as 64 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always eight times the number of sequence steps For example 16 bytes are required to download 2 sequence steps to the sequence table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 2 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data Figure 5 5 shows how to prepare the 64 bit word for the sequence step repeat mixed mode and sync bit The sequence table data is made of 64 bit words however the data has to be prepared as 64 bit words and rearranged as six
403. ng to the use of this product A CAUTION A caution contains instructions to avoid damage to the instrument or the equipment connected to it A A WARNING A warning alerts you to a potential hazard Failure to adhere to the instructions in a warning could result in personal injury The basic configuration of the 3172 series is the 3172 W2P2 VXIbus Single Channel Arbitrary Waveform Generator plus Dual Channel Pulse Generator It communicates using the VXI message based protocol This high performance generator combines five powerful instruments in a single C size card The W2 module can be used to generate standard arbitrary and modulated waveforms and can also be sued as a stand alone counter timer The P2 module has two independent channels that can be used to generate analog oriented pulse waveforms The front panel has connectors and indicator lights but no controls To control the 3172 use instrument drivers or a soft front panel from your computer Supplied with the 3172 is ArbConnection part number 922336 001 a software application that controls the 3172 AroConnection allows you to specify design or edit waveforms and download them from your computer to the 3172 The 3172 can be configured to power up in Modern or Legacy mode but is easily programmed between Modern and Legacy modes See Chapters 3 and 5 for more information 3172 configuration specifies how the instrument is mechanically constructed and the model
404. nging operating mode from triggered to continuous when the 3172 is set to single sequence advance or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 3172 is set to automatic sequence advance mode Corrective action Observe the 3172 advance mode while setting sequence advance There are other settings conflict errors which are exclusively dedicated for the pulse function These errors are listed and described in Chapter 3 under the pulse function description 222 Data out of range Parameter data which followed a specific header could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator 224 lllegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command An invalid parameter choice may have been used 300 Device specific error This is the generic device dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors A device specific error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 311 Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument s memory 350 Queue Overflow The error queue is full because more than 30 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed 410 Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the outp
405. ngth minus 8 waveform points The position of the pulse is programmed using the outp sync pos command and its width is programmed using the outp sync wid command ZEROcross Discrete Programs the zero crossing validation This type is a special mode where the sync signal remains low as long as the output waveform level is negative below 0 V but changes to high when the output level becomes positive Response The 3172 returns BIT LCOM SSYN PULS or ZERO depending on the selected SYNC validation option OUTPut SYNC WIDTh lt width gt Description This command programs the 3172 SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER mode only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt width gt 4 to 60 Numeric 4 Sets the SYNC width in waveform points The sync Integer only width can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum Response The 3172 returns the present SYNC width value OUTPut TRIGger SOURce BIT LCOMplete INTernal EXTernal Description The TTLTRG signals when enabled and placed on the backplane can be asserted with signals coming from a number of sources Use this command to assign the source for the active TTLTRG line Parameters Name Type Default Description BIT Discrete BIT Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the 5 28 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual waveform The trigger position is programmed using the outp sync pos comma
406. nload all button The File field is an edit field that lets you browse and select file names to be applied to a specific memory segment To change or add file name point and click on the File name field and either type your path or browse to the file location and let Windows find the right path The Length field displays the length of the selected memory segment Memory segments size may be programmed from 16 to the maximum size of your installed memory Note that the length field is not accessible and shown for reference purpose only m Segment table Seg State _File name Gen Loops Adv Sync Lengt Mapped Hil IR Mapped Ch Mal Bbtkpulse wav 1024 Mapped 5 Wav TBbit sin3 way 1024 C Vd avl Bbit sinc wav 1024 MAN al bbit Complex way 1 2 50 0 0 2 3 1 0 0 1 1200 0 0 Export Import Save Close Active Sequence H ae Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 10 Waveform Studio 4 17 3172 User Manual 4 18 Publication Number 980949 Rev H W TIP Point and click on one of the segments to show its shape in the Waveform Shape window Description of the various buttons in the Segment Table is given below Append adds segment number at the end of the table Insert adds a segment above a highlighted segment line Delete removes a highlighted segment Download Selection downloads a highlighted se
407. ns the IEEE STD 488 2 Common document specifies a common set of commands and queries that all Commands and compatible devices must use This avoids situations where devices Q from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable uerles functions and report status The IEEE STD 488 2 treats common commands and queries as device dependent commands For example TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument Some common commands and queries are optional but most of them are mandatory Table 5 17 Common Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association CLS 3172 ESE 1 to 255 1 3172 OPC 3172 RST 3172 SRE 1 to 255 1 3172 TRG 3172 ESE 3172 ESR 3172 IDN 3172 OPC 3172 OPT 3172 STB 3172 TST 3172 CLS Description Use this command to clear the Status Byte summary register error register and all event registers This command has no effect on parameter settings ESE lt enable_bits gt Description Use this command to enable bits in the Standard Event enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte Information on the standard event register is given in the following Parameters Name Range Default Description lt enable_bits gt 0 255 0 Programs the event that will cause the register to report a problem Setting of 0 disables this feature Astronics Test Systems 5 117 3172 User Manual
408. ntended application Buyer shall indemnify and hold Astronics Test Systems its officers employees subsidiaries affiliates and distributors harmless against all claims arising out of a claim for personal injury or death associated with such unintended use FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting maintenance or exploratory procedure read carefully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices This equipment contains voltage hazardous to T human life and safety and is capable of A inflicting personal injury CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT OPEN If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line mains through an autotransformer ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral earth pole of the power supply Before operating the unit ensure the conductor green wire is connected to the ground earth conductor of the power outlet Do not use a two conductor extension cord or a three prong two prong adapter This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the power cord Maintenance and calibration procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed Read the procedures and heed warnings to avoid live circuit points SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES x Before operating this instrument 1 Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate 2 Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to thi
409. nter Timer Operation 6 47 STEIER senie e ee EE 6 47 tee Period Averaged EE 6 48 PLAS le EE 6 49 Reie Gath hee Bie ata hee a a Ree ind ean uae aa ee 6 49 Test Procedures EU 6 50 P2 Channel 1 Characteristics eege ee ageergeg ege eege ene 6 50 Initial Jett ee e ack ales hen ee i lec 6 50 Ge 6 50 Period Accuracy Continuous Run Mode Tests 6 51 Period Accuracy Gated Run Mode Tests 6 51 Amplitude ACCU CY eege deele ANEN e Ee SERA EENEG needed eta 6 52 Amplitude ACCURACY cc kale iN cad nek Cap leegen Gata kee ees 6 52 LEE HESE ee eg 6 53 OTISCEACCULAGCY 5 cautd EE 6 53 Source Impedance Characteristics kee 6 54 Source tee e 6 54 Astronics Test Systems ix 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Width Accuracy EE 6 55 Pulse Width Acc racy Jegen de EE ees 6 55 Pulse Delay Double Pulse Delay Accuracy NEEN 6 55 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests ENNEN 6 56 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode ACcuracy ENNEN 6 56 Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests 6 57 Linear Transitions ACCUAGCY ieren iandien adeo e etna eee eee eee 6 57 Linear Transitions Accuracy Tests sccccsccniestsidatie EENG 6 58 External Pulse Width Mode Operation ccccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteesenaeeeeeeees 6 59 External Pulse Width Operation Tests 6 59 Pulse Run Modes Kleren circisctnreas eege deh eae 6 60 Pulse Run Modes Operation Tests EEN 6 60 Delayed Trigger Characteristics Ak 6 62 DR dle e Ee Delay TOUS EE 6 62
410. ntinuous e e 1 24 dee 1 24 Gated OG EE 1 24 Burst TE 1 25 IRIGG er DOUIGCS i eegen eeh Alecia Made maura ees 1 25 Modulation Run Modes W2 only eebe deed 1 25 Synchronization of Multiple 3172 W2 Modules kee 1 25 PLL Synchronization W2 only iciedcieiie ie neni ei leds Melee eee 1 26 Phase Modulation W2 on 1 26 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ELEI ect one e PoE DAE PS er POTD OEE PERE ROE E re eed AAS tn PONE nen Se PERE SEI E 1 27 lut EEN 1 27 Pr gramming We St EG 1 27 Chapter Genee 2 1 Installationen aa a a aa A aA Aaaa eea Eee Ee eae Na Ee aR aea SEA ADERS 2 1 Preparation for EE 2 1 Logical Address Selection E 2 1 ee 2 2 HAS teal AO EE 2 4 Controlling the Instrument from a Remote Device AEN 2 4 Installing Software Utilities EE 2 4 Connecting 10 c LANINGINONKK eene reet aki lee eats 2 5 LAN Ree Te ee GE 2 5 Choosing a Static IP ele EEN 2 6 Connecting to the USB POMtisssiicausieenisintie ceed EE E ee EE N 2 7 CHa Der E 3 1 Operat OM MN 3 1 OVErVISW siesti e fc aE E a a E a EA de AEE Aa aE Uo eaten 3 1 EELER ERUN ilala Pe EEE E E EE EE E ee e 3 1 put Output ProtectiOM roesai ee eege E 3 2 Power Om R set NEE E 3 2 Turning the Output E 3 2 Turning the SYNC Output On ih ce ace dE EENS 3 2 Selecting the SYNC Source W2 Modules On EEN 3 3 Changing the SYNC Position and Width W2 Modules Only 3 4 Example Generating a Simple Waveform ANEN 3 4 Programming Amplitude and COtteet
411. nu The Tools menu lets you download pulse trains You can also clear the entire pulse waveform memory using the Clear memory command B Note The Clear Memory command affects the entire waveform memory of the 3172 Be careful not to erase memory segments that you need to use and that haven t already been backed up The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer toolbar Figure 4 45 contains icons for editing Toolbar the waveform graph icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and more The Toolbar is shown in the figure below The icons from left to right operate the following functions New waveform Open an existing waveform file Save pulse train Save pulse train As Print the screen and open the Pulse Editor dialog box Other icons select the current view on the screen clear the memory and download the displayed pulse train to the active channel D Ge NM m ki Fui Train D Figure 4 45 Pulse Composer Toolbar 4 66 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Creating Pulses As was mentioned above creating pulses with the Pulse Composer is simple intuitive and can save you time when non trivial pulses are needed The Pulse Composer takes your design and processes the information determines the appropriate instrument settings and converts the pulse into a waveform for download to the instrument There are a number of terms that will be used throughou
412. nual DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY Revision Date Description of Change A 10 22 2010 7 14 2011 Document Control Release Updated per EO 30562 P2 information and configurations added Existing information updated as necessary 9 13 2012 Updated per ECN00895 In Chapter 7 removed requirement for calibration steps 1 through 11 during routine periodic calibration 11 19 2012 10 16 2013 Updated per ECN01917 In Appendix A added offset accuracy specifications for 93 ohm and high impedance modes Updated per ECN03713 Added instructions for installing local bus jumpers Added reference to these instructions in each place where local bus features are mentioned In Chapter 5 rewrote introduction to clarify the methods of synchronization 3 6 2014 Updated per ECN04225 Added details and clarification to calibration and firmware update procedures Added calibration parameters for W6 type waveform generator module Corrected the descriptions of EXT SCLK to indicate that it is compatible with PECL and NECL amplitude levels Specified the periodic calibration interval in Chapter 7 5 7 2014 Updated per ECN04838 Revised calibration procedure in Chapter 7 PLL Adjustments for cleaner signals and improved accuracy Revised Chapter 6 PLL Checks Phase Offset for correct length of arbitrary waveform Added A3 amplifier documentation including description commands performance che
413. number of the final instrument Figure 1 6 shows the front panels of the various configurations 3172R not shown in this manual specifies a register based interface Registered based versions are highly recommended for new users Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual that seek higher speed of command parsing and execution The 3172 specifies Message based interface including LAN and USB This version is recommended for users that seek flexibility in communication with the 3172 You may communicate with the instrument through the normal VXI controller but take control via the LAN port to completely bypass the backplane interface and control instrument functions and parameters from a web page The USB port is used for memory stick I O where waveform data can be loaded directly to arbitrary waveform memory This feature was specifically designed for security reasons where breach of secret waveform data can endanger national security if it falls to the wrong hands This way the data is erased immediately as soon as the instrument is turned off but can be restored by a person holding a memory stick with data Three types of cards can be installed inside a 3172 module e W2 Single channel arbitrary waveform generator e P2 Dual channel pulse generator e A3 122Vp p power amplifier Multiple combinations of these cards can be factory configured for different applications The following 3172 configurations a
414. numeric value gt lt numeric value gt No default value x y REPeat lt numeric value gt lt numeric value gt No default value x y TIMing x v CLOCk lt numeric value gt 6 87983e43 D v COUNt lt numeric value gt 0 D y 5 8 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table 5 1 3172 SCPI Command Summary for 3171 Emulation continued Astronics Test Systems PG1 PG2 ARB Keyword Parameter Form Default n 1 n 2 n 3 3172 SYSTem x D D v ERROr 0 No Error D D D y VERSion 1992 0 D D D y PRESet lt n gt No default value D D D y STATus x OPERation x EVENt 0 x x x CONDition Not implemented x x x ENABle lt nrf gt 0 x x x ENABIe 0 D x x QUEStionable D EVENt 0 x x x CONDition Not implemented D x x ENABle lt nrf gt 0 x x x ENABle 0 x x x PRESet No default value D D D 3172R 3172 As explained in Chapter 1 there are different 3172 configurations For example the 3172 W2P2 has an arbitrary waveform generator on top Commands and a dual channel pulse generator on the bottom Similarly the 3172 W2 has only one arbitrary channel installed in the top slot Regardless of the instrument configuration the 3172 can be ordered as a register based or as a message based module If you are not sure what you have read the label on the side panel if it says 3172R you have a registered based product 31
415. o the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Period 1ms Amplitude 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 30 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Offset Adjustments The offset adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue Setup 31 1 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q Astronics Test Systems 7 55 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 31 for a DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Setup 32 2 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 2 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 32 for a DMM reading of 2 5 V 10 mV Setup 33 4 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termina
416. odes description applies to all waveform types and functions except where noted otherwise Continuously free run output of a waveform Waveform generation can be enabled and disabled from a remote interface only Upon trigger outputs one or more waveform cycles Burst counter controls the number of waveform cycles Last cycle always completed Trigger can be internal or external Transition or level enables or disables generator output Last cycle always completed Internal External VXI backplane CLK10 gt 0 0001 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance from 19 C to 29 C 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1 ppm year aging rate Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A4 10 KQ 5 TTL 50 2 duty cycle or 50 Q 5 0 dBm manually selectable using internal jumpers External ECLTRGO Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A8 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Frequency From DC to 200 MHz external DC to 66MHz ECLTRGO Impedance and Level 50 Q 5 PECL or NECL Output Characteristics Main Output Channels 1 Connector Front panel Combo D sub 24W7 A7 Impedance Selectable lt 2 Q 50 Q or 93 Q nominal Protection Short Circuit to Case Ground 400 mA current limit Standby Output ON or OFF Output Disconnected Amplitude Window Zout lt 2 Q NEG mode 0 to 20 V POS mode 0 to 20 V SYMM mode 11 V to 11 V Window Zout 50 Q NEG mode 0 to 10 V POS mode 0 to 10 V SYMM mode
417. of DC to 10 kHz but the time to lock depends on the lock frequency and the number of waveform samples The W2 has two elliptic filters 60 MHz and 120 MHz and two Bessel filters 2 MHz and 20 MHz You may switch these filters in to reduce harmonics or high frequency spurs Access to the elliptic filters is disabled while the W2 is generating standard sine waveforms because these filters are used automatically to construct optimal sine waveforms For safety reasons the 3172 powers up with its output turned off In fact the output circuit is disconnected from the output connector using a mechanical relay which eliminates erroneous and uncontrolled transitions that may occur during power up This protects equipment that remains connected to the output when the mains power fails or the system is powered down Mechanical relays have a settling time of about 2 ms Therefore when writing software allow enough time for the relay to close before using the signal at the output connector The 3172 has no front panel control therefore you must use a computer to communicate with the instrument There are a number of ways to do this including the use of an appropriate software driver on the host computer The specifics of communication are discussed in later chapters An alternative to a driver is to use the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language Chapter 5 explains the details of SCPI programming The ArbConnection
418. of a full utilization of the Apply command including the frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle parameters for a standard square wave You may use the Apply command in a similar manner for other standard or arbitrary waveforms You may use the Apply command on a partial set of the available parameters of a waveform To leave out a parameter place no characters between the corresponding comma separators For example you may specify the frequency and duty cycle of a square wave while leaving the amplitude and offset at the default values as follows rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 12 7e6 45 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously sets the frequency to 12 7 MHz leaves the amplitude at the default value leaves offset at the default value and sets the duty cycle to 45 outp 1 Turns on the output In a similar manner you may use the Apply command with other standard waveforms to set some parameters while leaving others at their default values Before the 3172 W2 can generate arbitrary waveforms you must first download them to its waveform memory This section describes the arbitrary waveform function and explains how to download waveforms 3 19 3172 User Manual What are Arbitrary Waveforms Managing Arbitrary Waveform Memory 3 20 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in memory Each data
419. of the LAN interfacing Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 1 Toggles the keep alive mode on and off When on the 2572 constantly checks for smooth LAN connection at intervals programmed by the syst keep time command The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3172 reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the present keep alive setting SYSTem KEEPalive TIMEout lt time_out gt 7 Description This command programs the keep alive time out The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time_out gt 2to300 Numeric 45 Programs the keep alive time out in units of seconds The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3172 reverts automatically to local front panel operation 5 112 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response The 3172 returns the present keep alive time out value SYSTem KEEPalive PROBes lt probes gt Description This comm
420. old The hold parameter determines how long each step of amplitude dwells on this setting before it will step to the next amplitude setting By selecting Fixed Hold the hold time remains constant throughout the entire hop table Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 18 Amp Freq Hop Panel Variable Hold The Variable Hold parameter determines how long each step of amplitude dwells before stepping to the next amplitude setting By selecting Variable Hold the hold time changes automatically from one step to the next depending on the hold time value that is affixed to the hop step The values can be programmed in the HOP Data table Dwell Time The Dwell Time parameter programs the period of time that must elapse before the output amplitude hops to the next amplitude setting Dwell Time is associated with the Fixed Dwell option only Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the hop data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the hop marker output Frequency Hop The Frequency Hop group contains parameters that control the frequency hop function These are hop data dwell control dwell time and marker position Hop Data The hop data button in the frequency hop group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of frequency hops The hop data table contains
421. oltage range Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Function Standard Waveform Sine Voltage Range Symmetrical Amplitude 10 mV Output On Adjustment 1 Set CAL SETup 13 2 Adjust RV10 for DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Amplifier Offset Positive voltage range Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Voltage Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 14 for DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 14 Amplifier Offset Negative voltage range Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Conf
422. ombination of digital and analog instruments can provide The W2 module has two separate internal clock sources e Sample clock generator The sample clock generator clocks the standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms e Direct digital synthesis DDS circuit The DDS circuit generates amplitude and frequency related modulation throughout the entire amplitude and frequency ranges of the 3172 W2 This mode is useful for wideband FM sweep FSK PSK ASK AM and frequency hopping as well as simultaneous frequency amplitude and phase modulation 3D modulation The output level for both the W2 and P2 modules is programmable from 5 mVp p to 20 Vp p into a matched impedance while a programmable offset generator can be programmed to shift the output in either a positive or negative direction or to leave the signal symmetrical about its vertical centerline The output span is programmable in three ranges Positive from 0 V to 20 V Symmetrical from 11 V to 11 V and Negative from 0 V to 20 V When range is changed the peak to peak amplitude and offset values automatically default to the factory preset values 3172 User Manual Load Impedance Remote Control Safety Considerations Specifications Options Publication Number 980949 Rev H When programming an amplitude level it is important that the load impedance matches the source impedance This is important for a number of reasons for example the output calibration is
423. ommand uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary data TRAC DATA 564000 lt binary_block gt Binary Block Parameters Binary block parameters are used for loading segment and sequence tables into the generator s memory Information on the binary block parameters is given later in this manual 5 4 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual SCPI Syntax and Styles Legacy vs Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI group of the IVI foundation The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the Keyword the Parameter Form Default and HS command equivalent The Keyword column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCP commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 3172 will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form upper case and the long form upper and lower case The Parameter Form column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets lt gt If parameter form is enclo
424. on 3171 Emulation Vertical Resolution Waveform Segmentation Number of Memory Segments Waveform Segments size and resolution Custom Waveform Creation Software Arbitrary Waveforms are created on a remote computer and downloaded to the instrument through one of the available remote interfaces The frequency of the waveform is calculated from its programmed sample clock value and the number of waveform points that were used for creating the waveform 100 mSa s to 200 MSa s 11 digits Same as reference 16 bits 65 536 amplitude increments 12 bits automatically shifts legacy data to 16 bit format Permits division of the waveform memory into smaller segments 1 to 16k 2 point size increments from 10 to 1M points ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom waveforms Sequenced Waveforms Generator Characteristics Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual Description Sample Clock Range Resolution Accuracy and Stability Advance Modes Automatic Sequence Advance Stepped Sequence Advance Single Sequence Advance Mixed Sequence Advance Sequencer Steps Segment Loops Minimum Segment Duration Minimum Segment Size in a Sequence Custom Sequence Creation Software Publication Number 980949 Rev H Segments may be linked and repeated in a user selectable order Segments are advanced using either a command or a trigger 100 mSa s to 200 MSa s 11 digits Same as reference
425. on EE 4 77 Downloading the Pulse Tram seen ckeeessgaeeveuensste aves va tersesadsa tees ea SEENEN ee 4 78 Interpreting the Download Summary ENNEN 4 78 The IM GOMpPOSOF eebe Eeer ee 4 79 The ET 4 80 Eelere ee mcm mek aren ch atone mek Mageen e 4 81 Wave Commands EE 4 82 The RR EE 4 83 Shared Horizontal Controls eat hoes heave entities eeepc elias 4 85 Vertical ONO Se foarte ice Ae eR eek ae ci at et de ae Ae ae teed da eae hed dae 4 87 ITER 4 88 Designing SD Ge 4 89 TR Command Editor sser enge eda tenssiaheresdece ties cua uued stan tues EEA EEE EEEE uae EREE 4 90 Eogging SCPLCommangs EE 4 90 Klee ege ute E E r 5 1 Programming e Ee 5 1 What s in this Chapter c27za 88 ae e 5 1 I troduction OSC EE 5 1 Command FF OMIT A GE 5 2 Command SOP ET ET 5 2 The MIN and MAX Parameters beige ter 5 2 Querying Parameter ue ME 5 3 Q ery SE eler 5 3 SCPI Command Kell ET 5 3 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commande 5 3 vi Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual SCPI Parameter Ee Mee Me eh E Maes ede Eh gr 5 4 N meric ParametelS tee Zeg EE seen tee 5 4 Discrete FP ArAIM Glen Sessa e ee EE 5 4 Boolean Paramete S iee i dee tilde eeeacd shiva ia aA we a Eaa A deeg dee EAEE EEA EEEE Ta 5 4 Arbitrary Block Parameters e alte G te Gn Aaa rae eier nea oa 5 4 Binary Block Parameters acy acgaisicweriut set eeachennt a ate sea deastene gout set tengiancs vaauts deenepaty sea nensieet oper tades 5 4 SCPI Syntax ANG Styl
426. on Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Two Channel Synchronization AEN EEN 6 80 SVNCHTONIZALION Tee gege Ee eect 6 80 Test Procedures EE 6 81 Initial Instrument Zaettpg ek dees cece ea cee dtek tea ca ENDRES cece ale ae hee lee cee dee 6 81 Crain ACCURACY UE eege ee eebe ee a tees 6 81 ee le EE EE 6 82 FRIS alll time E 6 82 Overshoot Tests E 6 83 CRA DIOR A A A A A 7 1 Calibration and Firmware Update ccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 7 1 What s I this Chapter ioeie p e da sted cca tak ec E te vs ete eden aE 7 1 OOS aes eege ee ee et eae ete 7 1 Galibratio EE 7 2 Calibration TYPE Syin een Masato hansen ane Snead argae aAA eset ee eal ee 7 2 Recommended Test Equipment cicccccticnceneeneedecealele EEN EEN SEENEN EEN 7 2 EDERT E Ee 7 2 Contig ratiom EE 7 3 Periodi ee EE 7 3 Calibration Interval sugue ee ee deg ENEE enee 7 3 MV ARENSON lt a 20s ec acto ee e e e Ee 7 3 Calibration Setup and Initialization un 7 3 Waveform Generator CallDratlony EE 7 5 Pulse Generator Calibration cce5 icicccer hei astit eege Zeie gedet eed ee ade 7 13 Locking the Calibration Factors c cccc cceccenceteccecceescunzcectcceceertennsessbccnceerscuentesbacuascecnsbeanseentaads 7 17 Factory Calibration EE 7 19 Warm E 7 19 Procedure W2 MO d le ett Steet gege Eet 7 19 VCO AGiUSIMEINGS e Bile a a ene aa Geen Seen kee a aus aes 7 20 BEIER eessen eier enee ee 7 23 Reference Oscillators DEIER e site ces
427. on manuals When you use ArbConnection every time you click on a button or change parameter the command is logged in the same format as should be used in external applications Figure 4 65 shows an example of a log file and a set of SCPI commands as resulted from some changes made on ArbConnection panels You can set up the 3172 from ArbConnection to the desired configuration log the commands in the log file and then copy and paste to your application without any modifications Of course this is true for simple commands that do not involve file download but on the other hand this is a great tool to get you started with SCPI programming Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Mi Communication Log file Show Full Log Save As Commands amp Responses Jnst Gel 1 0UTP ON Jnst Gel 2OUTP ON OUTP SYNC ON Inst Sel 1 VOLT 1 000e0 Inst Sel 2 VOLT 8 000e0 Inst Sel 1 FUNC SHAP SQU SQU DCYC 15 00 FREQ 5 180000000e6 INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR BUS TRIG LE 1 000 TRIG RETR ON TRIG RETR TIME 2 000000000e 4 Figure 4 65 Log File Example Astronics Test Systems 4 91 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 4 92 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 5 Programming Reference What s in this Chapter Introduction to SCPI Astronics Test Systems This C
428. on you may print the active Pulse Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit menu item ends the current Pulse Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your pulse since it was last saved the Pulse Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes The Edit menu isused for adding or removing pulse train sections Use these commands to Append Delete Insert or Undo last operation The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Append Section The Append Section menu command lets you append a new section at the end of the pulse train Only one new section can be appended at the end of the train If an empty section already exists the append command will give an error New sections are always appended at the end of the pulse train Insert Section The insert Section menu command lets you insert a new section in between sections that were already designed Only one new section can be inserted at the middle of the train If an empty section already exists the insert command will give an error Delete Section The Delete Section menu command lets you remove sections from the pulse train without affecting the rest of the train If you use this command from the Edit menu make sure that the section you want to remove is currently the active section Remove all Sections The Remove
429. onics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Pulse width 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Program CAL SETup 10 2 Adjust C37 C15 in channel 2 for the same DLYB reading as in step 08 0 4 ns Where DLYB DLYA 20xK1 0 2 ns Note use K1 from Setup 07 Pulse Leading Edge The pulse leading edge adjustments assure that the leading edge l Adjustments transition times of the generated pulses are within the specified limits Note that each channel has its own leading edge adjustments and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the leading edge timing is not within range Setup 11 50 ns Leading Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 10 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 11 f
430. onics Test Systems 1 5 3172 User Manual A3 Module Feature Highlights Publication Number 980949 Rev H period pulse width and transition times Generates single double and delayed pulses Provides normal inverted and complemented outputs Extremely low jitter Clock stability of 1ppm Three voltage windows Positive 0 V to 20 V Symmetrical 11 V to 11 V and negative 0 V to 20 V Choice of three matching load impedance lt 2 50 Q and 93 O Trigger delay and period controlled auto re trigger Fits within a single width C size VXlbus module 50 Q DC coupled input 122 Vp p output 100 kHz output bandwidth W2 or W6 signals feed through the A3 output ArbConnection The ArbConnection software provided with the 3172 has the Feature Highlights following features Virtual control panels Arbitrary waveform composer Complex pulse composer Serial data and FM composers Detailed virtual control panels for all functions and modes Waveform modulation and pulse composers for designing editing and downloading complex waveforms Automatic detection of active instruments Equation editor to generate waveforms from equations SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation Translation of waveform coordinates from ASCII and other file formats Simplified generation of complex waveform sequences Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual I ArbConnection lt lt
431. ontinuous Triggered and Gated modes Modulation depth is programmable from 0 to 100 and up to 200 in some cases 1 21 3172 User Manual Frequency Hopping Amplitude Hopping FSK PSK ASK W2 Half Cycle Waveforms 1 22 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The Frequency Hopping function causes the output frequency to hop through a sequence of frequencies The amount of time the W2 dwells on each frequency is programmable You may opt to set the dwell time uniformly over the entire hop list The frequency hop table can contain up to 1 000 frequency values ranging from 10 Hz to 30 MHz The amplitude hopping function causes the output amplitude to hop through an amplitude list The amount of time the 3172 W2 dwells on an amplitude level is programmable for each hop You may also set the dwell time uniformly over the entire hop list The amplitude hop table contains up to 5 000 different amplitude values ranging from 0 V to 11 V FSK frequency shift keying shifts the output between two frequencies The logic level of the TRIG PLL input determines the instantaneous frequency value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the output is at the base frequency When TRIG PLL is true the output frequency is shifted by an offset To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope PSK phase shift keying shifts the phase of the output between 0 and 180 The logic level of
432. or a rise time reading of 50 ns 2 ns Setup 12 200 ns Leading Edge Astronics Test Systems 7 47 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 50 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 12 for a rise time reading of 200 ns 10 ns Setup 13 2 us Leading Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 500 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 13 for a rise time reading of 2 us 50 ns Setup 14 20 us Leading Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 us div Termination 50 Q Measure Rise time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On 7 48 Astronics
433. or appears on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the f Hi keys to adjust the SCLK setting After you modify the setting click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new reading Parameters The Parameters group contains three parameters Amplitude Offset and Segment The amplitude and offset values displayed in this group are the same as in the Main Panel Whenever you change amplitude or offset in the Parameters group the Main panel is updated automatically The Segment parameter provides access to the active segment for each channel To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The indicator next to the required parameter is then highlighted The digital display shows the value associated with the highlighted indicator You may use the dial keyboard or the HI keys to adjust the setting After you modify the setting click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3172 with the new setting Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 8 Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel 4 13 3172 User Manual 4 14 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 10 MHz Ref The 10 MHz group contains buttons that select the source of the 10 MHz reference for standard waveform The 10 MHz clock is the reference that feeds the sample clock and the DDS clock and therefore determines accuracy and stability The internal 10 MHz source has 1 PPM stability over the operating temperature range and time stability
434. or instructions how to set up LAN parameters L There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish AN Configuration Astronics Test Systems network communications with a LAN interface Primarily you ll need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface To change LAN configuration you ll need to use some LAN commands that are listed in the programming reference The programmed parameters will be updated with the new setting only after you turn the VXI chassis off and on once Note there are some LAN parameters cannot be accessed or modified These are Physical Address and Host Name These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for this product The only parameters that can be modified are the IP Address the Subnet mask and the Default gateway Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN network Description of the LAN settings is given in the following Information how to modify the LAN setting is given in the programming section of this manual 2 5 3172 User Manual Choosing a Static IP Address Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3 Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface There are three LAN parameters that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting These are described
435. orm shape however if you zoom in on a waveform line you ll see that the points are connected like a staircase In reality the 3172 generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but if the waveform has many horizontal points the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical Amplitude axis therefore the left side of your equation will always look as Amplitude p where p is the equation variables in units of waveform points You can write equations with up to 256 characters If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends 4 53 3172 User Manual Equation Conventions 4 54 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation You may only enter the right part of the equation The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting Case is not important and spaces are ignored Numbers are entered in scientific notation All calculations are done with double precision For trigonometric functions all angles are expressed in radians A number of constants are provided e which is the base of the natural logarithm pi which is the circumference of a unit diameter circle per which equals the programmed horizontal range f which equals 1 per omg which equals 2
436. orm in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 10 10 10 APPLy SINC lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt cycles gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard sinc and programs the frequency amplitude offset and 0 crossing cycles simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate modulated waveforms the 3172 will stop generating these waveforms will revert to the standard square waveform and will update the sinc parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard sinc waveform 30e6 in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard sinc waveform 22 in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard sinc waveform in units of volts lt cycles gt 4to 100 Integer 10 Programs the 0 crossing number of cycles of the standard sinc waveform in units of percent Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude offset and number of 0 crossing cycles settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 10 5 62 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual A
437. ot be compatible anymore A CAUTION Due to some differences in waveform resolution and size waveforms cannot be shared across the legacy and modern options Therefore as a general rule of thumb using the form inst leg mod command is not 5 5 3172 User Manual 3172 Legacy Commands 5 6 Publication Number 980949 Rev H recommended before you read and fully understand the consequences that may result in your application In general the legacy 3172 mode modifies modern 3172 performance in the following major areas e Maximum sample clock frequency is reduced to 100 MS s e Waveform interlace is set to 2 e Minimum waveform length is set to 10 and e Vertical resolution of arbitrary waveforms is reduced to 12 bits The 3172 can be pre configured to emulate the 3171 legacy code and therefore the instrument defaults to the legacy 3171 compatible mode with the above limitations built into the code The non emulation versions default to a different set of values to allow full performance of the generator These commands are summarized in Table 5 1 The 3172 is a modern and updated version of the Model 3171 employing the latest technology and component improvements Although 100 backwards compatibility was the basis for the new 3172 design some of the 3171 functionality is not supported Table 5 1 lists all of the original 3171 SCPI commands and provides a check mark in the 3172 column in cases where the 3172 emulates
438. ot programmed within the same range To avoid such an error the leading edge value ALWAYS sets the range for the trailing edge and therefore always program the leading edge first and then program the trailing edge Use the following command to program the transition time for the leading edge puls tran lt value gt and use the following command to program the transition time for the trailing edge puls tran tra lt value gt The available transition time rages are shown in Figure 3 11 Note that there are six overlapping ranges that you may use In range ratio between minimum to maximum values is 20 1 except the first range that has a 10 1 ratio only Both values for the leading and trailing edges must be placed inside one range only For example 3 47 3172 User Manual 5ns Range 1 Ei R R Range 3 l Range 4 H Range 5 Range 6 L Pulse Design Limitations 3 48 Publication Number 980949 Rev H you may program 37 ns for the leading edge and 480 ns for the trailing edge because both are values within range 2 but if you program 37 ns for the leading edge and 501 ns for the trailing edge the instrument will issue a setting conflict message and will ignore the setting of the trailing edge The trailing and leading edges parameters affect the pulse output only after you select the linear transitions mode 50ns 250ns 500ns 2 5us bus 25us 50us 250us 500us ZZA
439. ou can program the time interval and the cumulative time will be adjusted accordingly Cumulative Time Specifies the time that will lapse from the start of the current pulse section You can program the cumulative time and the time interval will be adjusted accordingly Section Properties The Section Properties contains a summary of properties that are unique for the current section Design Units Provides information on the units that are used when you draw the pulse segments These units can be changed in the Pulse Editor options Section Start Provides timing information for the start of the current section If this is the first pulse section the value will always be 0 Subsequent sections will show the start mark equal to the end mark of the previous section Repeat Allows multiplication of pulse segments without the need to re design repetitive parts After you enter a repeat value press the Apply button to lock in the repeat multiplier Duration Displays the time that will lapse from the start of the pulse section to the end The duration shows the total time lapse including the repeated sections Control Buttons The control buttons allow you to append insert or delete one or all index lines The Undo button is useful in cases where an error was made and restoration of the last operation is critical Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Example Section 1 Astron
440. ou choose values may not exceed the window maximum Always watch your combined amplitude and offset settings because if you exceed the window maximum the combined values will cause a settings conflict Amplitude and offset may be programmed freely as long as the following relationships are observed POS or NEG range E _ Offset lt 20Vp p SYMM range Amplitude 2 Amplitude offset combinations outside the above limits will generate settings conflict errors Offset lt 22Vp p Use the following sequence of commands to select an amplitude range and then program the amplitude and offset values rst Restore factory defaults Table 5 1 provides a complete listing of defaults outp 1 Enable output relay to turn output on volt rang lt value gt Set up an amplitude range pos neg or 3 5 3172 User Manual Programming the Output Impedance 3 6 Publication Number 980949 Rev H symm volt lt value gt Set up the amplitude level volt offs lt value gt Set up the offset level Note that when an amplitude range is changed the peak to peak amplitude and offset values automatically default to the factory preset values The 3172 has three output impedance options to match industry standard load impedances lt 2 Q 50 Q and 93 Q The output is calibrated on a matching load impedance and therefore the appropriate output impedance for the actual load should be selected for specification compliance
441. ough the ECLTrig bus are limited in frequency to 60 MHz maximum this method is included for backward compatibility with the legacy 3152A When synchronizing through the ECLTrig bus or TTLTrig bus phase offset is programmable from 0 to 360 Phase offset resolution depends on the number of waveform samples For instance if there are 1 000 waveform samples the phase offset is adjustable in 0 36 increments since 360 1 000 samples 0 36 per sample As another example if there are only ten waveform samples the smallest phase offset increment is 360 10 samples or 36 The phase offset discussed above is known as the coarse phase offset To improve the resolution for waveforms having fewer samples a separate fine phase adjustment takes the resolution down to 0 01 The fine phase adjustment and can be used in conjunction with any valid coarse phase offset setting Synchronization commands are summarized in Table 5 14 5 105 3172 User Manual Table 5 14 Synchronization Command Summary Publication Number 980949 Rev H Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURCce PHASe1 LOCK W2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 ADJust 0 to 360 0 W2 SOURce MASTer SLAVe MAST W2 PHASe2 PLL W2 LOCK STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 W2 SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg 0 EXT W2 ADJust 180 to 180 0 W2 FINe 36 to 36 0 W2 PHASe1 LOCK OFF ON 0 1
442. output W2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 1 000 V 1 000 V 25 mV 2 500 V 2 500 V 40 mV 5 000 V 5 000 V 65 mV Astronics Test Systems 6 7 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 5 Modify the amplitude range to Negative and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range DAC output 3172 W2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 1000V my TI 2200 I 20 u0m TL 5000ov 2000 465mV IC Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect W2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the W2 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 6V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 6 11 Table 6 11 Offset Accuracy DDS Output W2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 000V o6mv S 6 8 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual This tests the characteristics of the square waveform It includes Square Wave transition times ringing and overshoot The characteristics are Characteristics being tested on all three amplitude ranges symmetrical positive and negative Square Wave Checks Equipment Oscilloscope 50 Q 20 dB attenuator feed through Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination
443. pe on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 19 for a rise time reading of 2 us 50 ns Setup 20 20 us Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 us div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 20 for a rise time reading of 20 us 0 5 us Setup 21 200 us Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 50 us div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment Astronics Test Systems 7 51 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H 1 Adjust CAL SETup 21 for a rise time reading of 200 us 5 us Setup 22 2 ms Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 5 ms div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope S
444. per LK16 LK15 T Jumper LK13 sY3dWNr sna Figure 2 2 Local Bus LBUS Jumper Installation Astronics Test Systems 2 3 3172 User Manual Installation Controlling the Publication Number 980949 Rev H If the 3172 is not configured to use the Local Bus you may install it into any empty slot in the VXlbus chassis except slot 0 If the 3172 is configured for Local Bus operation then take care to comply with the configuration rules from the previous section When inserting the instrument into the mainframe gently rock it back and forth to seat the connectors into the backplane receptacle The ejectors will be at right angles to the front panel when the instrument is properly seated into the backplane Use the captive screws above and below the card ejector handles to secure the instrument into the chassis In general the 3172 is controlled from a remote device using the VXIbus slot 0 controller In addition when configured in a 3100M Instrument from a carrier there is an additional front panel LAN connector that allows Remote Device Installing Softwar Utilities 2 4 communication with a web page LXI specification and USB port This allows you to transfer data directly to the waveform memory To communicate with the 3172 you may either write your own software or use one of the soft front panel programs that allow access to all instrument modes functions and parameters If you wish to use ArbConnection in
445. ph should be saved before using the New Waveform menu command because this function is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform Ctrl O menu item lets you choose a previously saved waveform file and load it to the waveform graph This function can also import waveform files of various types to the Wave Composer The Open Waveform menu function can import ASCII CSV comma delimited text PRN space delimited text 0 LeCroy binary format and others The Open dialog box in Figure 4 31 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment The file that is opened is automatically converted to the binary wav format Save Waveform The Save Waveform Ctrl S menu item lets you store the active waveform as a binary file with a wav extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select the name location and format for the waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As menu item the first time you save your waveform It will let you select a name location and format for your waveform file Print Lets you print the active waveform graph The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you setup the printer and print the waveform graph Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Half Gaus inverted Gaus Mixed sincs Mixed
446. pi f and numbers in the range of 1E 20 to 1E 20 There are three classes of precedence raise to power has the highest precedence multiply and divide come second and have the lowest precedence Parentheses may be used to change the order of precedence The following table summarizes the mathematical expressions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with Equation Editor Equation Editor Operands A Raise to the power Multiply Divide Add Subtract Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm pi 7 Circumference of unit diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points f I per omg a 2 n f amp Amplitude in units of points or Hertz sin x The sine of x cos x The cosine of x tan x The tangent of x ctn x The cotangent of x log x The base IO logarithm of x In x The natural base e logarithm of x abs x The absolute value of x 1E 20 lt gt 1E 20 Numerals equation constants Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Typing Equations Astronics Test Systems substitute your mathematical expression for x After you get familiar with the operands and conventions you can try a few simple equations and see how they create waveforms Recall that a straight line is defined by Y as a function of X as in the equation Y mX b You can use this to generate a straight line using Equation Editor Assuming first that p 0 try
447. ple below shows a list of 10 frequencies and their associated dwell times The 3172 will hop through this list outputting the next frequency each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the frequency step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Frequency Hops Data Array 1e 6 100 2e 6 2000 3e 3 3e4 4e 6 40 5e 5 5e3 6e 2 6000 7e 1 0 7 8e 8e2 6 9e 3 90 10e 51000 5 90 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual In the above example the first number is the frequency value and the second number is its dwell time Therefore only even number of sets can be located in this table Parameters Name Type Description lt var_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of frequency hop values and their respective dwell time FHOP MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the frequency list the 3172 will generate a pulse designated as Hop marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 5000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index frequency hop integer only position Response The 3172 returns the present marker posi
448. plitudes and offsets can be controlled individually for each slave unit Parameters Name Type Default Description MASTer Discrete MAST Programs a specific 3172 in a multi instrument system as master instrument Note that only one instrument can be designated as master while all other instruments may be programmed as slaves SLAVe Discrete Programs a 3172 in a multi instrument system as a slave instrument Note that multiple instruments can be designated as slaves but only one instrument can be designated as master Response The 3172 returns MAST or SLAV depending on the current instrument coupled mode assignment INSTrument COUPle DELay lt delay gt Description This command programs the delay time between the master and slave instruments The waveform start on the slave units is delayed in reference to the master start point Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to 20 Numeric 0 Sets the waveform start delay between instruments in units of seconds Instrument 1 is always the master and reference channel Instruments 2 to n are delayed in reference to instrument 1 Note that this parameter is operating in conjunction with the continuous run mode and only when multiple instruments are synchronized Response The 3172 returns the present delay value in units of seconds INSTrument COUPle PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS Description Astronics Test Systems 5 21 3172 User Manual Publication Nu
449. power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed The RST command does not clear the error queue Use the following command to read the error queue SYSTem ERRor Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 80 5 125 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H characters 102 Syntax error A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below 100 Command error When the generator cannot detect more specific errors this is the generic syntax error used 101 Invalid Character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax found in the command string 103 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator it may return error 100 instead of this error 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than allowed 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters were received for the command One or more parameters that were required for the command were omitted 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the instrument does not accept one in this position 131 Inval
450. quency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 150 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 35 for DMM reading of 53 1mV 0 5mV Setup 36 50 mV Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 36 for DMM reading of 17 68 mV 0 5 mV Setup 37 15 mV Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 15 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 37 for DMM reading of 5 31mV 0 5mV Astronics Test Systems 7 35 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Amplitude The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the Adjustments specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude accuracy is an issue Modulation 4 Setup 38 5 V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC ca
451. r Commands that set values can be queried for their current value Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode IEEE STD 488 2 common queries generate responses which are common to all IEEE STD 488 2 compatible instruments A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with SCPI Command a chew jine gt character The IEEE STD 488 EOI message is a lt new Terminator line gt character Command string termination always resets the current SCPI command path to the root level The IEEE STD 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands IEEE STD 488 2 that perform functions like reset trigger and status operations Common Common commands begin with an asterisk are four to five characters in length and may include one or more parameters The Commands command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below RST STB IDN Astronics Test Systems 5 3 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in SCPI Parameter program messages and response messages numeric discrete Type Boolean and arbitrary block Numeric Parameters Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric par
452. r illuminated LEDs LEDs indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the digital display A red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is selected Only one LED can be on at a time W HINT To turn on an LED click on the LED or on the text next to it The selected parameter is then indicated by a darker LED shade Radio Buttons Radio buttons are used for changing operating modes or selecting between mode options One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center to indicate its state These are referred to as radio buttons because only one can be on at a time as with a radio that has preset buttons Dial The dial is a tool for adjusting a number in the display area To use the dial point to it with the mouse and then press and hold the left mouse button While holding the mouse button down move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the displayed number or counterclockwise to decrease the number The dial modifies digits at the cursor position and allows modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter Once you have reached the end of the range further dial movement has no effect on the display You may also change the display reading without the dial by using the 1 or Hl keys or by simply typing the desired number using the computer keyboard Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual ei NOTE After you
453. racy External Width Description Input Level and Slope A3 Specifications Input Characteristics General Connector Impedance Amplifier Mode Damage Level Frequency Range Bypass Mode Signal source Output Characteristics General Connector Impedance Protection Gain Polarity Amplitude Output Current Square Wave Characteristics Transition Time Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual 10 of setting 2 ns Output duty cycle remains constant regardless of period setting 1 to 99 0 001 3 of setting 500 ps The pulse shape can be recovered whilst the period and width of an external input signal are maintained Front panel EXT WID SMB connector Trigger parameters apply BNC 500 DC coupled 50Vp p DC to 100KHz Input connected directly to Output BNC 0 1 O DC coupled Short circuit 10 seconds x12 fixed Normal 0 to 122 Vp p 61V 500 mA Max lt 1 5us typical A 15 3172 User Manual Aberrations Sine Wave Characteristics Bandwidth 3dB Accuracy at Sine wave 1 KHz THD General Power Requirements Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature A 16 Publication Number 980949 Rev H lt 15 typical 100 KHz at 122 Vpp 3 of full scale lt 0 1 10 Hz to 10 KHz lt 1 2 10 KHz to 100 KHz 3 3 V 5 V 24 V 12 V all from VXIbus interface 0 C 50 C RH 80 non condensing 30 C 80 C Astronics Test Systems
454. rails POSitive Discrete Selects the positive window where amplitudes can be programmed between the 0 V to 20 V rails NEGative Discrete Selects the negative window where amplitudes can be programmed between the 0 V to 20 V rails Response The 3172 returns SYMM POS or NEG depending on the present 3172 output range setting PHASe OFFSet lt phase_offs gt 7 Description This command affects a slave instrument only when synchronized to another module in the chassis It programs the start phase offset in reference to an adjacent master module Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase_offs gt Oto 1e6 1 Numeric 0 Sets the phase offset in reference to a master Astronics Test Systems 5 35 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Integer instrument Slave instruments trail the master only instrument edge Response The 3172 returns the present phase offset value FUNCtion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence MODulation HALFcycle COUNter Description This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector It also selects one of the auxiliary functions from counter timer digital pulse generator and half cycle waveform generator Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects the standard waveform shapes There is an array of waveforms that is built into the program You can find these
455. re available e 3172 W2P2 This model number specifies a single channel arbitrary waveform generator and dual channel pulse generator In modern mode this model expands to include all of the features functions and operating modes as specified in Appendix A In legacy mode message based version only this configuration responds to dn with 3171 in the instrument field and is fully compatible with 3171 legacy behavior e 3172 W2 This model number specifies a single channel arbitrary waveform generator e 3172 W2W2 This model number specifies a dual channel arbitrary waveform generator having two instruments that can be used either independently or synchronized in a master slave configuration e 3172 P2 This model number specifies a dual channel pulse generator e 3172 P2P2 This model number specifies two independent dual channel pulse generators e 3172 W2A3 This model number specifies a single channel arbitrary waveform generator and a_ high voltage power amplifier This manual addresses the 3172 W2 3172 P2 and 3172 A3 separately The configuration chosen can have a significant impact on the way one programs the instrument Register based commands are parsed Astronics Test Systems 1 3 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H and executed using an external dll 8172R but message based commands are parsed and executed by the internal CPU 3172 The supplied drivers provide access to all fu
456. re is an array of standard waveforms that could be used without the need to download waveform coordinates to Control the instrument You can also modify the parameters for each Commands waveform to a shape suitable for your application Table 5 5 summarizes the standard waveforms control commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 5 Standard Waveform Control Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURce SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN w2 GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 we2 POWer 1to9 1 w2 TRIangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 we2 POWer 1to9 1 w2 SQUare DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 we2 PULSe D I aw 0 to 99 999 10 W2 WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 we2 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 we2 TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 we2 DAMP DELay 0 to 99 99 10 W2 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 99 10 we2 TRAiling 0 to 99 99 10 we2 SINC NCYCle 4 to 100 10 we2 GAUSsian EXPonent 1 to 200 10 W2 EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 10 W2 DC VOLTage 100 to 100 100 w2 5 44 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC GAUSsian EXPonential DC NOISe Description This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector Parameters Name Type Defau
457. re it can be used by the 3172 as FM modulating waveform data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 78 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 1 The number of bytes in a complete FM modulating waveform data must divide by 4 The 3172 has no control over data sent to its FM waveform during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause errors 2 The Isb on the last byte sets marker position 0 sets no marker and 1 sets marker You can set as many markers as you want 3 The SYNC output serves as marker output when you have the 3172 set to operate in FM mode Normal SYNC level is TTL low The SYNC output is set to TTL high at the position of the marker This way you can use the SYNC output to mark frequency occurrences during FM operation 4 Data download is terminated with the MSBit of the last byte set to 1 The following sequence should be used for downloading arbitrary FM Waveforms 1 Prepare your FM waveform data points using the following relationship N Frequency Hz x 14 31655765 2 Use an I O routine such as ViMoveAsync from the VISA I O library to transfer binary blocks of data to the generator Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the arbitrary modulating waveform Sweep Modulation Us the following commands for
458. re the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 5 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 6 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 4 V Adjustment 2 Adjust CAL SETup 33 for a DMM reading of 4 V 20 mV Setup 41 5 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Astronics Test Systems 7 59 3172 User Manual Setup 42 Setup 43 Setup 44 7 60 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Offset 5 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 5 5 V 25 mV 7 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 7 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV 8 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DM
459. re unsigned SWEep DIRection UP DOWN Description This specifies if the 3172 output will sweep from start to stop UP or from stop to start DOWN frequencies Sweep time does not affect the sweep direction and frequency limits At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform normally maintains the sweep stop frequency setting but will maintain the start frequency if the DOWN option is selected except if the 3172 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Type Default Description UP Discrete UP Selects the sweep up direction DOWN Discrete Select the sweep down direction Response The 3172 returns UP or DOWN depending on the selected direction setting Astronics Test Systems 5 81 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Description This specifies the sweep step type Two options are available logarithmic or linear In linear the incremental steps between the frequencies are uniform throughout the sweep range Logarithmic type defines logarithmic spacing throughout the sweep start and stop settings Parameters Name Type Default Description LINear Discrete LIN Selects the linear sweep spacing LOGarithmic Discrete Select the logarithmic sweep spacing Response The 3172 returns LIN or LOG depending on the selected spacing setting SWEep STEP lt _steps gt Description This programs the number of steps for the swept
460. red single pulse mode one pulse is initiated per trigger The parameters associated with the basic configuration of single pulse mode are Period Width High and low Levels These are discussed below With more complex settings you can modify pulse polarity select linear transitions and define fixed duty cycles Figure 3 3 shows a typical real life single pulse shape and highlights all of its relevant parameters While most of the 3 37 3172 User Manual 3 38 Publication Number 980949 Rev H parameters shown in Figure 3 3 can be programmed and adjusted for a specific application some characteristics of the pulse are derived from the quality of the generator and its output stage These are discussed in the specifications which can be found in Appendix A Pk Pk Aberrations m Settling Time Overshoot Power Bandwidth Limitation Undershoot EN 4 Reflections Ringing Power Dissipation High Level 90 50 Pulse Width 10 Low Level Rise Time H Fall Time Slew Rate V s Figure 3 3 Single Pulse Parameters Summary Period The period parameter specifies the repetition rate of the pulse in continuous run mode The period parameter has no meaning if the 3172 P2 is set up to operate in triggered or counted burst run modes Use the following command to program the period puls per lt value gt The period is programmable from 20 ns to 10 seconds The default valu
461. repeatedly with each external trigger signal Note that you need to press the Single mode on the oscilloscope for each trigger advance Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output Operation SYNC Output Bit 6 24 This tests the operation of the SYNC output There are two synchronous output are being tested Bit and LCOM Bit normally operates with standard and arbitrary waveforms and LCOM is always associated with sequenced and burst outputs The sync output has fixed TTL level amplitude into an open circuit Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv 2 Connect W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure model W2 as follows Waveform Sine Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulses at 1 us intervals Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output LCOM Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model W2 channel as follows Waveform Sine Run Mode Burst Burst Count 10 Re trigger On Re tri
462. requency shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes FSK FREQuency SHIFted lt shift_freq gt Description This programs the shifted frequency The frequency shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 100e3 Programs the shifted frequency value in units of Hz 30e6 Response The 3172 returns the present shifted frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FSK FREQuency BAUD lt baud gt Description This allows the user to select FSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the FSK data array are clocked causing the output frequency to hop from carrier to shifted frequency values and vice versa Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the frequency shifts from carrier to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present baud value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FSK FREQuency MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 3172 will generate a pulse designated as F
463. riggers only External Enables the front panel trigger input and disables all other sources Internal Enables an internal non synchronized trigger generator 4 9 3172 User Manual 4 10 Publication Number 980949 Rev H but will not allow triggers from any other sources TTLTO 7 Enables one or more backplane trigger lines Note that the 3172 can receive triggers from more than one TTLTrg line but will not accept triggers from bus external or internal trigger sources ECLT1 Enables the ECLTrg1 input and will allow trigger events from this backplane line Trigger Parameters Gated Mode There are two modes that define how the 3172 will gate The standard mode is Level in which a trigger signal below the threshold level disables the output and a trigger signal above the threshold level enables the output The other mode is Transition in which each transition toggles the gate on or off The transition direction is programmable using the Slope options Slope If you click on Pos the instrument triggers on the positive going rising edge of the trigger signal Similarly if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the negative going falling edge of the trigger signal Note that this affects only the signals that are accepted from the front panel trigger input Burst Programs the burst counter for burst mode Once triggered the 3172 outputs a series of output waveforms that ends when
464. rm After you select a waveform shape you may specify the waveform parameters Chapter5 explains the commands available for specifying parameters of standard waveforms SB note The number of points used for defining a standard waveform depends upon the programmed frequency Therefore some parameter changes may not have any effect on the waveform because the number of points do not provide enough resolution to show the difference The number of waveform points varies depending upon the output frequency The reason for this variation is that even standard waveforms are in a manner similar to that of arbitrary waveforms except that the 3172 W2 stores standard waveforms in a 3 16 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Astronics Test Systems permanent internal library for immediate use At low frequencies the number of points for each standard waveform is 1 000 Therefore waveform modifications are possible in increments of 1 1 000 of the total waveform For example if you want to modify the duty cycle of a square waveform the resolution for the duty cycle is 0 1 At higher frequencies the number of points used for generating waveforms decreases according to the following relationship Output Frequency Sample Clock Frequency Waveform Points Since the maximum sample clock frequency is 200 MS s the only way to increase frequency is by reducing the number of waveform points when the sta
465. rm memory You do not have to use the entire memory when you download a waveform Model 3172 allows memory segmentation so that up to 16 k smaller waveforms may be stored in this memory There are two ways to divide the waveform memory into segments Define a segment and load it with waveform data define the next segment and load with data etc In ArbConnection make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments download it to the instrument in one operation and then download a memory partition table that splits the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes To use ArbConnection to download one long waveform and then segment it into smaller sections follow this procedure Click Memory Partition The dialog box shown in Figure 4 9 appears Memory Partition Table x Segm No Segment Size Append 1 1000 TEET 2 2000 3 436 4 64 Clear All r Data Save Download Close Figure 4 9 Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segm No segment number and Segment Size Segm No is an index field that can have values from 1 to 16 k The segment size is always associated with the segment number You may program any segment size from 16 10 in legacy mode to the capacity of the memory Click on the Append button to add a segment at the end of the 4 15 3172 User Manual Using Waveform Studio 4 16 Publication Number
466. rms DC to 3 MHz A 13 3172 User Manual Slope Minimum Pulse Width BUS VXI Backplane System Delay Trigger input to waveform output Trigger Delay Trigger input to waveform output Resolution Trigger Jitter Burst Counter Gate Input Connector Level Controlled Pulse Parameters Period Range Resolution Accuracy Jitter Pulse Width Double Pulse Range Delay Resolution Accuracy Jitter Linear Transitions Description Range In range Span Resolution Linearity A 14 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Positive Negative transitions selectable 210ns Trigger commands from a remote controller only TTLTRGO 7 inputs or outputs programmable 100 ns 0 100nsto7s 20 ns 1 sample clock period 1 to 65 536 programmable Front panel Combo D sub 5W5 A2 TTLTRGO 7 TTL pulled up to 5 V through a 4 7 KQ resistor 20nsto5s 4 digits continuous 3 digits gated and burst 0 01 100 ppm continuous 3 all other run modes lt 10 ppm 20 ps rms Continuous lt 100 ppm 20 ps rms Gate Burst 8 ns to 2 5 s Oto2 5s 5 digits limited by 10 ps 3 of setting 500 ps lt 100 ppm 15 ps rms Adjustable rising or falling edge measured from 10 to 90 of amplitude 5 ns to 5 ms in 6 overlapping ranges 20 1 4 digits 3 of setting above 100 ns Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Accuracy Hold Duty Cycle Mode Description Range Resolution Accu
467. rmware Details File Browse 1 Click here and then select logical address of NW instrument to update 2 Click Browse button Exit Figure 7 19 Updater Window Click the Browse button A file selection window will open Navigate to the folder where you placed the 3152B object file in step 3 Select the file for example ri3172 v3 07 bin and then click Open 8 The updater window will then include the Update button as shown in Figure 7 20 updater M Resource Name YIO 2 INSTR DI Update M Firmware Details File C Documents and Cattinactiuilhs naarnanalbMaclbant Civa zen Figure 7 20 Updater Window with Update Button CAUTION Before clicking on the Update button in the next step below be ready to observe the Fail LED on the 3172 and follow the instructions carefully 7 68 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 9 Click the Update button and then immediately watch the Fail LED on the 3172 front panel Wait for the LED to come on before proceeding This will typically take between 5 and 20 seconds If the Fail LED does not come on within two minutes turn off power to the VXlbus chassis and contact the factory for further instructions 10 After the Fail LED comes on wait until it turns off or until at least one minute elapses 11 By this time a download success message will have appeared Figure 7 21 Click the OK button T
468. rn Accept Reject These buttons are the final checks before you download the pulse train to the instrument If you are unhappy with the instrument setting and want to change some of the options there is still time click on the Reject button and do more changes Click on the Accept button to complete the download process The FM Composer looks and feels almost like the waveform composer except there is a major difference in what it does If you look at the opening screen as shown in Figure 4 56 you ll see that the vertical axis is marked with frequencies You ll see later that as you draw waveforms on the FM composer screen these waveforms represent frequency changes and not amplitude changes as are generated by the waveform composer The FM composer is a great tool for controlling frequency agility by generating the agility curve as an arbitrary waveform For example if you create a sine waveform the 3172 will generate frequency modulated signal that will follow the sine pattern The resolution and accuracy of the modulated waveform is unsurpassed and can only be duplicated by mathematical simulation The FM composer is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create and download modulating waveforms to the 3172 using the FM Composer Invoke the FM Composer from Panels bar The Wave Composer has three sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 56 throughout the d
469. rol the counter timer features are described below State The State Group has controls to enable or disable the counter And to reset the counter and arm it for the next measurement cycle Note that when the counter function is turned on all other waveform generation features of the 3172 are purged Measurement Function The measurement function group has control to select the measurement function for the counter timer operation The 3172 can measure the following function Frequency Period Period Averaged Pulse Width and Totalize The totalize function has two options If Totalize Infinite function is selected the input will count every legal pulse at the counter input for an indefinite period of time and displays the total number of pulses until the counter has been reset If Totalize Gated function is selected the input will count every legal pulse at the trigger input for a period of time that is defined with the Gate Time parameter Display Figure 4 20 Counter Timer Panel Astronics Test Systems 4 33 3172 User Manual 4 34 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Display The Display Group has controls to select the display mode and to select if the display shows measurement or gate time readings In normal mode the counter is armed to receive signal at the trigger input When signal is sensed the gate to the counter opens for duration as programmed with the Gate Time parameter processes the result displays the re
470. ronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setups 04 amp 05 Setup 06 Astronics Test Systems For a setup 3 reading 15 KO 1 1 15 128 1000 0 89847 3 Connect an oscilloscope probe on U473 pin 3 U415 pin 3 in channel 2 4 Adjust RV6 RV3 in channel 2 for vertical symmetry about the 0 V line Pulse Width Balance Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 ns div Termination 50 O Measure Pulse width 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Program CAL SETup A and note and record the reading in units of ns Note as PWA 2 Program CAL SETup 5 and note and record the reading in units of ns Note as PWB 3 Select the best value for R116 R47 in channel 2 for the following relationship PWB PWA 10xKO 0 4 ns Note use KO from Setup 03 Low Range Pulse Width Balance Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 ns div Termination 50 0 Measure Pulse width 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 6 for pulse width reading of 10xKO 0 4 ns Note use KO from Setup 03 7 45 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Pulse Delay The pulse delay adjustments ass
471. rs and configure various operating modes Two software applications are available to control the instrument VXlplug amp play soft front panels SFPs and ArbConnection For the experienced programmer VXlp ug amp play drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available NOTE The Model 3172 can be fitted with W2 P2 and A3 modules Throughout the following discussion where the model number 3172 is cited the description is common to both W2 and P2 modules When operation differs between W2 and P2 the operation of the individual modules is described in a separate section All operations of the A3 amplifier are described in one section Output signals must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to an impedance mismatch Proper termination is also required for an accurate amplitude level at the main output connector Use 50 Q cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors Use a 50 Q termination at the far end of the cable if needed to improve impedance matching The accuracy of the amplitude setting depends upon the load impedance The amplitude of the output signal will not match the amplitude setting for loads that differ from 50 Q To correct for this error program the actual load impedance and let the 3172 automatically correct its signal amplitude Use the following command outp load lt value gt where lt value gt is the load impedance in ohms 3172 User Manual Inp
472. rs need to be changed omit the commas The other parameters are set to the power up default values appl squ 4e6 2 Queries can also be made on all parameters associated with a standard function using the appl lt function_shape gt query For example if the instrument was programmed using the above appl squ command query the square wave parameters using the following query appl squ Table 5 7 lists the complete set of apply commands followed by a description of each command separately Table 5 7 Apply Control Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURCce APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS W2 SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW W2 TRIangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW W2 SQUare FREQ AMPL OFFS DCY W2 PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WID LEE TRE W2 RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEE TRE W2 SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS CYC W2 GAUssian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP W2 EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP W2 DC DC_AMPL W2 USER SEG lt n gt SCLK AMPL OFFS W2 APPLy lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard and programs the frequency amplitude and offset 5 58 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual for the selected standard waveform This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate FM the 3172 will stop generating FM will revert
473. rtant because it may appear at the middle of the sequence and not with the first segment Use the following command to select an active segment trac sel lt n gt Selects the active segment lt n gt Waveform data is downloaded only to this active segment If you plan to partition the entire table with the segm lt array gt command _ select segment 1 as the active segment The next step transfers waveform data to the active segment Use 3 23 3172 User Manual Changing the Sample Clock Frequency Using the External Sample Clock Input 3 24 Publication Number 980949 Rev H the following command trac lt data_array gt Downloads waveform sample data to the active segment If you condensed all waveforms to a single waveform then you may use the segm lt array gt command to partition the memory into segments in one operation See Chapter 5 for information on preparing and downloading waveform sample data Users should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency For the 3172 W2 the term waveform frequency is valid for standard waveforms only and controls the waveform frequency at the output connector Waveform frequency is measured in units of Hertz Hz On the other hand the term sample clock frequency is associated with arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only and defines the frequency at which the clock generator accesses the waveform sample points
474. rval depends on the complexity of the waveform and the number of points the processor has to calculate It is good practice to add sufficient delay to a test program to allow for this delay The delay could range from a few milliseconds to a few seconds and there are no special rules beside trial and error to determine the necessary delay time Nine standard waveform shapes are available e Sine e Triangle e Square e Pulse Ramp e Sine x x e Pulse e Gaussian Pulse e Rising decaying Exponential Pulse e Noise e DC Each waveform has parameters for modifying it to suit your requirements The waveform memory can store one or more arbitrary or user defined waveforms The regular W2 configuration is supplied with Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual User Waveforms W2 Sequenced Waveforms Astronics Test Systems 1 megasample You may allocate the entire memory for a single waveform or you may divide the memory into smaller segments and load each segment with a different waveform By dividing the memory into multiple segments you may program the instrument to output the waveform one segment at a time using a simple command each time you want to select a different memory segment There are no limitations on the shape of the arbitrary waveform as long as it meets certain criteria such as minimum and maximum lengths and does not exceed the dynamic range of the DAC
475. s 24000 sin omg p 4500 sin 2 omg p OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 38 Using Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion In Figure 4 40 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e p 250 Increasing the value of the divisor 200 in this case will slow down the rate of decay Use the following equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p 10 e p 250 Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 39 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual xi ad About Cat Anchor gt r Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster SCH Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles Manual Scale End pts 1023 Min 32768 1 TANG Default pEquatin Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cancel 12000 sinfomg p 1 O e p 250 X OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 39 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as shown in Figure 4 39 is the most complex to be discussed here Here 100 cycles of a sine wave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation depth of 20 To achieve this the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the
476. s 300 5ns Cid 1 000 us _ 30 5ns L 10ns 2 ml Pulse Delay Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Astronics Test Systems This tests the accuracy of the pulse delay circuit To eliminate counter threshold hysteresis problems the tests are performed with the fastest transitions only and at ranges that will not be effected by counter errors For your information the pulse delay and the double pulse delay share the same circuits Also the measurement of delayed pulse is more complicated because it involves manual subtraction of the the SYNC to start delay and therefore only double pulse delay is performed in this test and the results will verify the accuracy of the delayed pulse as well To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only 6 55 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Double Pulse Delay Equipment Counter timer Accuracy Tests Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Period Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channel 1 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Double Pulse Run Mode Triggered High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Period 100 ms Pulse Width 10 ns Output On Dbl Pulse Delay As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Manually trigger the P2 for each test 2 Perform double pulse delay accuracy tests using Table 6 45 Reset coun
477. s Pulse Run Modes Internal Trigger and Internal Burst Although all run modes Operation characteristics are shared across the entire functionality of the P2 these two modes are specific for the pulse output Operation of other run modes was tested under separate headings in this chapter To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Pulse Run Modes Equipment Oscilloscope Function Generator 50 Q feedthrough Operation Tests terminanon Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Level Output TTL Frequency 100 Hz 2 Connect the function generator to the P2 External Trigger input 3 Connect P2 channel 1 output and Sync Output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the P2 as follows Pulse Mode Single Pulse Width 100 us Pulse Period 200 us Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify trace on the oscilloscope showing synchronized pulses at 200 us intervals Pulse and Sync Outputs 2 Change the P2 run mode setting to Trigger Verify that the P2 generates pulses with the following properties Period 200 us Pulse width 100 us Also verify that the output and sync pulses are synchronized to the trigger signal at the Trigger Input Test Results Pass Fail 3 Toggle P2 trigger slope from positive to negative and back 4 Verify on the oscilloscope that the P2 transitions
478. s applications The 3172 W2 is comprised of a single arb the 3172 W2 W2 has two arbitrary waveform generators embedded in the same module The 3172 W2 P2 is the standard single slot instrument that has the ability to replace a 3171 module in legacy systems Information on the various 3172 configurations is given in Chapter 1 ei Note The X Instruments utility does not allow mixing of registered based instruments such as the 3172R W2 with message based instruments such 3172 W2 Therefore if you want to synchronize modules make sure that they all of the same kind Information how to set up synchronization groups along with a description of the various buttons that control the multi instrtuments synchronization function is given below Clear All Assignments Apply sl Activate 2 Close Figure 4 21 X Instrument Synchronization Pool List Astronics Test Systems 4 35 3172 User Manual 4 36 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Group is an edit field which is used for grouping one or more instruments into a set of instruments that share synchronization properties State identifies the master or servant property of an instrument Note that the first instrument in the group list is always set automatically as the master If you want it as servant you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the module higher or lower in the synchronization hierarchy Model shows all instruments from the
479. s instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third wire earth ground If the instrument fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do not operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Table of Contents Chapter DEE Iptrodrte HOP eng E ug degt eg Aen NE E ET TE T budget e de gege gege eEee Reg b een Whar MEET DE EE EE E Whats inthis EE Seege deeg Eege Conventions Used in this Manual lee et EEN 3172 Configuration Different Model Numbers AAA W2 Module Feature Highlights eck ckecceteesoeaeseceepestgaeusiasetnaeeettaeteeaed iuantees eadervessiecueeneedeneess P2 Module Ee e le LEE AS Module Feature Tele lei AroGonnection Feature AIghliG lu CET General Description a e Ee eege OI EEN erte Eed sx vecsca te steed tales cepa Sle cat lalate E cele Slt ot dE adele a AS Output Waveforms eege eet Eegen Run Modessa SNE Eeer EE EEN e ae eaaa A A ah Maer teas Frequency Control and Accuracy EE Ph ase ock koop PLL iriaren iaaa ie geed ee Signal Integrity maaa ene aei aa a candies bas cased ais e a a aS Frequency e le EE AMplit de E PETER e hoi aadi eana rore r E SE aE RE Load Impedance ai E EEN tte EE E A Ge ET Mt e E KE EEEEEEEEEE OPTIONS tee ege AER bl Sat canna a a a R cd eden Gad eed ed ete ell viele Re W2 Front Panel ein te EE RE EE EE EE EE EE
480. s selects LBUS as the coupling path for phase locking sets up the module as a slave to be phase locked to the master turns coupling on enables phase locking and then turns on the output After the above steps have been performed channel 2 on the oscilloscope will show that the slave module is generating the default waveform a 5Vp p sine wave By comparing the displays of channels 1 and 2 on the oscilloscope it is verified that the two 3152B units are in phase 3 35 3172 User Manual Controlling P2 Pulse Modes and Parameters Generating Pulse Waveforms 3 36 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Description from this point pertains to the P2 module only General operation of the 3172 regardless of whether W2 or P2 modules are installed in it is given at the beginning of this chapter and separate sections in this chapter describe the operation of either module Note that the P2 module consists of two independent pulse generators and therefore make sure that the proper channel is selected for programming before commands are sent to the module Channel is selected using the inst se command This command is described in detail in the programming section Upon reset the default waveform type is set to normal pulse The pulse waveforms and parameters are generated in an analog fashion but are digitally controlled to achieve maximum resolution accuracy and stability The pulse generator command interface provides a means of
481. s the trigger level threshold the output generates the high level with the width of the pulse determined by the time that the signal remains above the trigger level threshold To select external pulse width mode refer to the Selecting a Pulse Mode section above Note that both the period and width settings are ignored in this mode because both are being set by the external signal Period and width can be impacted by the trigger threshold and trigger slope settings as shown in Figures 3 7 and 3 8 The trigger slope determines if the external pulse width signal s level is above or below the threshold to generate the pulse width When the trigger slope is set to positive default the output will behave as shown in Figure 3 7 Using the same input signal but a negative trigger slope results in an inverted pulse sequence as shown in Figure 3 8 Astronics Test Systems 3 43 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Figure 3 8 External Pulse Width Mode Negative Slope Example Q TIPS 1 While using external pulse width mode bear in mind that the period and the width are controlled by a signal that is applied to the trigger input The trigger input is limited to a width of 10 ns and a frequency of 5 MHz 2 The external pulse width mode does not impose any restrictions on linear transitions the high and low level settings or the polarity of the output The external pulse width parameters affect the output only after
482. s written permission of Astronics Test Systems be used in whole or in part to solicit quotations from a competitive source or used for manufacture by anyone other than Astronics Test Systems The information herein has been developed at private expense and may only be used for operation and maintenance reference purposes or for purposes of engineering evaluation and incorporation into technical specifications and other documents which specify procurement of products from Astronics Test Systems TRADEMARKS AND SERVICE MARKS All trademarks and service marks used in this document are the property of their respective owners e Racal Instruments Talon Instruments Trig Tek ActivATE Adapt A Switch N GEN and PAWS are trademarks of Astronics Test Systems in the United States DISCLAIMER Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is responsible for the operation of the goods purchased and should ensure that they are used properly and in accordance with this document and any other instructions provided by Seller Astronics Test Systems products are not specifically designed manufactured or intended to be used as parts assemblies or components in planning construction maintenance or operation of a nuclear facility or in life support or safety critical applications in which the failure of the Astronics Test Systems product could create a situation where personal injury or death could occur Should Buyer purchase Astronics Test Systems product for such uni
483. screte 0 Toggles BOOTp mode on and off When on the IP address is administrated automatically by the system Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the present BOOTp setting SYSTem IP GATeway lt gate_adrs gt Description This command programs the gateway address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt gate_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the gateway address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current gateway address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3172 returns the present IP address value similar to the following 0 0 0 0 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H SYSTem IP HOSTname lt name gt Description This command programs the host name address for LAN operation The programming is performed in the factory and it is highly suggested that users do not change the host name without first consulting a Tabor customer service person Parameters Name Type Description lt name gt String Programs the host name for LAN operation Response The 3172 returns a string containing the host name String length is 16 characters SYSTem KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to toggle the keep alive mode on and off The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration
484. screte Use this option for maximum output levels at the output connector This option is recommended for an output range of 61 Vp p to 122 Vp p LOW Discrete Use this option for low output levels at the output connector This option is recommended for an output range of 20 Vp p to 61 Vp p Response The 3172 returns AUTO HIGH or LOW depending on the present voltage setting OUTPut AMPLifier POWer OFF ON 0 1 Description This parameter sets the power amplifier circuit to the ON amplifier enabled or OFF bypassed condition Note that in order to have an output signal at the output connector requires that both this command be turned on and the protection switch set at its on position Parameters Name Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the output amplifier circuits on and off Response The 3172 returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option Synchronization Synchronization commands control phase locking to an external 5 104 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Commands W2 Modules Only Astronics Test Systems source The source is applied via the front panel TRIG PLL IN connector or from another module in the same VXI chassis through the Local Bus TTL Trigger Bus or ECL Trigger bus Note that synchronization through the VXI Local Bus LBUSO 7 is available only in Modern Mode and does not use the legacy commands discussed in this section To set up and control Loc
485. se with each valid trigger event Selects a delayed pulse mode Normal pulses are delayed Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual from the SYNC output DOUBle Discrete Selects a double pulse mode which generates a pair of single pulses that are displaced by the double delay period value HOLDdcycle Discrete Programs a pulse mode which generates a normal pulse that has a fixed duty cycle regardless of the period setting EWIDth Discrete Programs a pulse mode that reconstructs the pulse shape from an external input TRIG IN Response The 3172 will return SING DEL DOUB HOLD or EWID depending on the present pulse mode setting PULSe PERiod lt period gt Description This command will program the pulse repetition rate period Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse width rise and fall times cannot exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first before all other pulse parameters Note that by selecting the double pulse mode the pulse period remains unchanged Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt period gt 20e 9 to 10 Numeric 1e 3 Will program the period of the pulse waveform in units of seconds Response The 3172 will return the present pulse period value in units of seconds PULSe WIDth lt width gt Description This command will program the pulse width value Note that the only
486. sed by square brackets these are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options The installed base of the legacy 3171 Arbitary Waveform Generator amp Dual Pulse Generator is large although ultimately it had to be Modern Command discontinued because of parts obsolescence While replacing such a Set Astronics Test Systems popular instrument with modern technology presented minimal challenges supporting the installed base with existing code and tested procedures created some compatibility challenges The real challenge was to design a state of the art product that has modern features but allows use of the 3172 at a level fully compatible with the legacy 3171 The front panel of the 3172 looks similar to that of the 3171 So if the 3172 is intended as a replacement in a legacy system the 3171 legacy code is useful and therefore the instrument defaults to the legacy 3171 compatible mode The SCPI commands that are shown in Tables 5 1 and 5 2 list the legacy 3171 commands set and marks the areas where the 3172 could not be made identical Notice however that you may still use the form inst mod to be able to use the additional functionality that was built into the new 3172 design but expect that is you do just that some of the legacy commands will n
487. sel type filter that has a 20 MHz cutoff frequency 25MHz a Bessel type filter that has a 25 MHz cutoff frequency 60MHz an Elliptic type filter that has a 60 MHz cutoff frequency 120MHz an Elliptic type filter that has a 120 MHz cutoff frequency The Calibration panel Figure 4 27 provides access to remote calibration To access the remote calibration panel you will need to have a valid User Name and Password Proper training is required to perform calibration Information on how to access the calibration panel and how to perform the calibration is provided in Chapter 7 The picture below is just for reference Figure 4 27 Calibration Panel The Composers tab provides access to a group of composers that allow the generation and modification of arbitrary waveforms pulse shapes arbitrary frequency modulation and 3D profiling There are four waveform composers built into AroConnection Wave for generating arbitrary waveforms Arbitrary waveforms can be generated from standard libraries from an equation editor or imported into the composer from external utilities such as MatLAB The waveforms can be edited and stored to disk for 4 41 3172 User Manual The Wave Composer 4 42 Publication Number 980949 Rev H future use Pulse for generating complex pulse trains Unlike a standard pulse generator you can design and edit multiple pulse trains with linear transitions and variable amplitudes
488. sert the supplied CD and follow the instructions on the screen to install the program You may also use the soft panels that are supplied with the VXlplug amp play drivers on the same CD 3172 users that intend to control the instrument from a web page must program the LAN parameters before it can be used on the network Information on how to program the LAN parameters is given below Note that as long as the instrument is powered on the LAN parameters will not change For a new LAN setting to take effect turn the power off and then back on e The 3172 is supplied with a CD containing ArbConnection and the VXlplug amp play driver and possibly an IVI compatible driver for use with the Ethernet interface It also includes the user manual You should store the CD in a safe place in case you need to restore damaged files or load the software onto different computers The latest drivers and firmware are available for download from the Astronics Test Systems at http www astronicstestsystems com downloads ArbConnection lets you control instrument functions and features from a remote computer It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms sequence tables and modulated signals and then download these to the 3172 You may use ArbConnection to control the 3172 without writing software However for maximum flexibility you may control the 3172 at a low level using SCPI commands in your own software Note that for register based models SC
489. side of the T to the P2 TRIG IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel A input of the counter 3 Connect the P2 channel 2 output to channel B input of the counter 4 Configure the counter to TI A to B measurements 5 Configure the P2 channel 2 only as follows Trigger Delay On Delay As required for the test Amplitude 5V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 63 Table 6 63 Trailing Edge Transitions Accuracy Tests P2 Delay Setting Counter Reading Pass Fail Sinse2 5ns S 105ns 5ns ts tpst230ns So o CC Ims tmse50ps CT o pt iss50oms d Astronics Test Systems 6 77 3172 User Manual Backplane Trigger Source 6 78 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary 3172 in an adjacent slot Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode Triggered Run Mode Src As specified in Table 6 64 Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Configure the auxiliary 3172 as follows Frequency 100 KHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Continuous Trigger Output As specified in Table 6 64 Output On Test Procedure 1 Set up the trigger output and trigger source as specified in Table 6 6
490. similar to standard waveforms but a programmed delay interval separates the half cycles e Phase Lock Loop PLL mode This special function allows phase locking to an external signal regardless of the wave shape and frequency of that signal While locked to the external signal the W2 can generate any of the above functions with the added control that is attributed to the external signal e Counter timer The W2 also performs counter timer measurements P2 Output The P2 module is a dual channel pulse generator that generates p pulses in an analog manner It has the capability to generate pulses Waveforms just as a stand alone pulse generator does When using this module one could program pulse timing parameters in units of time All pulse parameters are programmable including period pulse width rise and fall times delay polarity and more As a dual channel instrument you may program different pulse settings for each channel and select if you want the channels to run Astronics Test Systems 1 9 3172 User Manual A3 Output Waveforms Run Modes Frequency Control and Accuracy Publication Number 980949 Rev H independently or synchronously Depending upon your application you may be able to change pulse parameters on the fly and without disturbing the downloaded data The P2 module can generate the following pulse shapes e Single pulse e Double pulse e Delayed pulse e Normal inverted or pulse complement
491. sinewave Deviation 0 5 MHz Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Frequency 2 5 kHz Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Astronics Test Systems 6 37 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H AM Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 20 us Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation AM Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 1 kHz Mod Depth 50 Mod Wave Sine Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude modulated sine Mod depth 50 5 Test Results Pass Fail 6 38 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual External AM Equipment Oscilloscope Function generator T connector Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 KHz Trigger Mode Continues Wave Sinewave 3 Place the T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one side of the T to th
492. software application is supplied with the 3172 ArbConnection provides a user interface that allows you to control the 3172 interactively Chapter 4 provides detailed instructions for using ArbConnection 1 27 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 1 28 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 2 Installation Preparation for Use Logical Address Selection Astronics Test Systems Preparation for use includes selecting the required logical address configuring the Local Bus if required and installing the module ma VXlbus chassis The VXlbus Chassis Resource Manager identifies a module in the system by the module s address VXlbus logical addresses can range from 0 to 255 However logical address 0 is reserved for the Resource Manager Addresses 1 to 254 are reserved for VXlbus modules Logical address 255 permits the Resource Manager to dynamically configure the module logical address To change the 3172 logical address use the 8 segment DIP switch S1 accessible from the side of the module near the rear of the case Figure 2 1 shows the logical address switch The switch segments are marked with numbers 1 to 8 Each switch segment represents a binary digit of the 8 bit binary logical address The segment marked 1 represents the least significant digit A switch is active equal to 1 when it is moved downward to the
493. source impedance checks using Table 6 23 Table 6 23 Source Impedance Accuracy Test W2 Source Impedance Low Limit High Limit DMM Reading 500 6 14 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Trigger Operation This tests the operation of the trigger circuit It includes tests for the ans triggered gated and counted bursts run modes It also tests the Characteristics operation of the trigger advance options the delayed trigger and re trigger functions as well as the trigger input level and slope sensitivity Trigger Gate and Equipment Oscilloscope function generator counter Burst Characteristics Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20d B feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Configure the counter as follows Function TOT B Trigger Level 100 mV 3 Connect W2 output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode As required by the test Wave 2 V Square 5 Connect the function generator output to the W2 TRIG IN connector 6 Configure the W2 as follows Frequency 25 MHz Waveform Sinewave Burst Count 1e6 counts Amplitude 1V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure Table 6 24 Trigger Gate and Burst Characteristics External Trigger Pulse 1 Perform trigger and gate tests using Table 6 24 Oscilloscope Counter Re
494. specifying pulse parameters in units of time exactly as would be specified with a bench top analog pulse generator Use the instructions below to access and program the pulse parameters After a power on reset the pulse generator will have the following default settings Pulse Mode Normal Period 1 ms Pulse Width 100 ns Amplitude 10 Vp p Offset 0 V Polarity Normal Transitions Fast The pulse generator commands provide access to all pulse parameters just as they would be programmed on an analog pulse generator Adjusting the pulse shape to the required characteristics requires adjustment of one or more time and amplitude parameters The 3172 P2 command interface provides all the necessary controls for making the adjustments Some setting conflicts can occur in situations where parameter ranges are dependent on the settings of other parameters These setting conflicts will be discussed later in this chapter Below is a list of all pulse parameters that are accessible using the pulse command interface 3 Note Please be mindful of the possibility of settings conflicts which can affect your ability to get the desired output For example the specification of a pulse width that is Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Selecting a Pulse Mode Single Pulse Mode Astronics Test Systems longer than the pulse period will cause a settings conflict Therefore always program the perio
495. ss Fail 7 Remove the P2 output from the oscilloscope input and connect to the counter input 8 Change the counter function to Totalize 9 Change the P2 burst count to 1 000 and internal timer to 1 second 10 Reset counter and observe that the counter reading increments 1 000 counts every second Test Results Pass Fail 11 Move function generator output to the P2 gate input 12 Change the P2 run mode setting to Gated and observe that the pulse waveforms appear during the gate time only Test Results Pass Fail 6 76 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual e This tests the operation of the delayed trigger Note that only one Delayed Trigger delay can be utilized at the time so if you are using the double Characteristics pulse mode the delay is automatically associated with the double pulse delay and cannot be utilized for the trigger delay To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only Trigger Delay Tests Equipment Function generator 50 Q T connector Counter ArbConnection Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Amplitude 1V Frequency 1 MHz Trigger Mode Triggered Wave Square Wave 2 Place the T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one
496. st Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 40 Table 6 40 Offset Accuracy Symmetrical Range P2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 4 000 V 4 000 V 35 mV 000 V eech 1500V _ 1 500V 20mVy TI 0 000V oul TI 1 500V 1 500V 20mV TI rE Ee O 2 Modify the amplitude range to Positive and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 41 Table 6 41 Amplitude Accuracy Positive Range P2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 2 000 V 2 000 V 25 mV 5 000 V 5 000 V 45 mV 9 000 V 9 000 V 60 mV 3 Modify the amplitude range to Negative and perform offset accuracy checks using Table 42 Astronics Test Systems 6 53 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Table 6 42 Amplitude Accuracy Negative Range P2 Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 2000V 2 000V 235my II 5 000V 5 000V 245mV II 9000v 2000 x60mV II This tests the accuracy of the source impedance The P2 has three Source Impedance source impedances that can be used lt 2 50 Q and 93 Q The Characteristics usage of the source impedance depends on the characteristics of the load impedance Test the accuracy of the source impedance if you suspect that this is a problem with the output levels at different source impedance settings Source Impedance Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the D
497. st Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Frequency 10 kHz Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify W2 modulating waveform to triangle then square and ramp and verify FM waveforms as selected Test Results Pass Fail 3 Move W2 marker position to 1 25MHz and verify marker position 6 32 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Test Results Pass Fail Triggered FM Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Standard Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the W2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the W2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 2V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the W2 TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model W2 controls as follows Waveform Modulation Mod Run Mode Trigger Level Carrier Freq Mod Frequency Deviation Sync Output Test Procedure Modulated FM Triggered OV 1 MHz 10 kHz 500 kHz On On 1 Verify trigger
498. st first generate these and store them in files If you have stored files named Sine wav and Noise wav in the Wav12bit folder you can enter them into your equation as shown Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 10 Noise wav 1000 The above equation generates an amplitude modulated waveform with added noise Note You can also browse for wav files stored in any folder using the Insert Wave button in the Equation Editor dialog box The following steps demonstrate how to create store and combine waveforms using this example Step 1 Create and store Sine wav Invoke the Wave command and generate a sine waveform Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As from the File command Save this file into the default folder using the name Sine wav in the default folder Step 2 Create and store Noise wav From the Wave command Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual select Noise Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw a noise signal From the File menu select Save Waveform As and save this waveform into the default folder using the name Noise wav Step 3 Write and compute the original equation Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 5 Noise wav 10 Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 41 ile Edit View Wave Download About r Anchor r Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster D Ge RM lt RM k Start pts p Max 32767 Cycles I Auto S
499. stalling the unit Replace all screws after calibration is complete Some calibration steps require removal of the right side panel cover To keep the internal temperature stable leave the cover on during warm up and calibration except while making adjustments that require its removal To facilitate removal while the unit is in the VXI chassis remove all except two screws before installing the unit Replace all screws after calibration is complete Install the 3152B in a VXlbus chassis Turn on chassis power and allow the 3152B to warm up and stabilize for at least 30 minutes before calibrating If the instrument has been subjected to temperatures outside the range of 25 C 5 C allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before calibrating Invoke ArobConnection Click the Module button in the Panels bar Select the channel to calibrate 3 Click the System button in the Panels bar Then click Calibration The Calibration Panel Figure 7 16 will appear Astronics Test Systems Figure 7 16 Calibration Panel 7 19 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Note Parameters that are adjusted only during Factory Calibration are enclosed in parentheses All other parameters are calibrated during Factory Calibration or Periodic Calibration In the panel each parameter to be calibrated is labeled with a number from 1 to 57 except the 50MHz and TCXO adjustments in the PLL
500. stems you intend to use it again The Browse button provides access to waveform pre stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation While you type and store equations they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field Control Buttons There are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box Use the Preview button to preview an image of your equation or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you previewed with your Equation Editor The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates As you probably already know waveforms are made of vertical samples The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the wavelength parameter For example if you have 1024 horizontal points your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous wavef
501. stronics Test Systems Figure 4 31 Zooming In on Waveform Segments Looking at the Waveform Map in Figure 4 31 note that the white portion is the zoomed in area Drag the white area with your cursor to peruse a zoomed in view of any portion of the waveform 4 47 3172 User Manual Wave Menu 4 48 Publication Number 980949 Rev H While zoomed in you can invoke Autoline or Sketch mode Zoom Out The zoom out operation restores the graph to display the complete waveform The Wave menu let you draw standard waveform functions on the graph The Wave command has a library of 8 standard waveforms Sine Triangle Square Sinc Gaussian Exponent Pulse Noise and DC It lets you specify a cardiac ECG waveform or a Pulse Width Modulated PWM waveform It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor Information on how to create waveforms using the Wave menu is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave menu by clicking on one of the standard wave options to open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 32 This dialog box is similar to the rest of the waveforms so the other waveform dialog boxes will not be described here Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine and the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 32
502. stronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Test Procedures The A3 module is a high voltage power amplifier that installs in the 3172 waveform generator module The A3 operates in conjunction A3 Module with the W2 arbitrary waveform generator module Use the following procedures to check the A3 module against its specifications that are listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test the specifications for the tested function and the acceptable test limits If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem wae To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each Initial Instrument test it is required that instrument be reset to factory default values Setting prior to each test Gain Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation Test 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV 2 Connect the 3172 W2 output to DMM input 3 Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Wave Shape SIN Frequency 10 kHz Amplitude As required for the test Output On Verifying DMM reading of 3172 W2 amplitude Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 input Connect the A3 output to the DMM input oo Test Procedure 7 Perform Gain Accuracy tests using Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Gain Accuracy Tests AMPLITUDE ERROR LIMIT DMM READING FAIL SETTING Astronics Test Systems 6 81
503. strument which is specified through its IP address from a synchronized multi instruments system list Contact your computer administrator if you are not sure how to specify a LAN address INSTrument COUPle SLAVe INSert lt 3172 gt lt LAN address gt Description This command will add a designated slave instrument to a synchronized multi instruments system list This command is associated with LAN operation only Parameters 5 22 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Name Type Default Description lt 3172 gt lt LAN_address gt String Specifying the correct model number is crucial for correct assignment of the instrument designators for selecting the correct instrument number for the INST SEL command INSTrument COUPle STATe OFF ON 0 1 Description This command turns the 3172 coupling state on and off Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the coupling mode to on or off Note that this command must be applied to the master instrument only To select the master instrument use the INST SEL 1 command Response The 3172 returns 1 if the coupled state is on or 0 if the coupled state is off INSTrument FORMat MODern LEGacy Description This command selects operation of the 3172 as a legacy replacement of the 3171 or operation as a modern instrument with all of the features that are described in the 3172 W2 specifications Note that every time
504. synchronization requires sharing of the reference and sample clocks as well as signals that control the starting phase of the waveform The 3172 can use the VXlbus Local Bus LBUSO 7 to synchronize adjacent modules The Local Bus lines are short and can tolerate high frequency signals but modules must be placed in the VXlbus chassis in a fixed master slave configuration and local bus jumpers must be installed Details are provided in Chapter 2 in the Local Bus Configuration section In either case the slave instrument s are locked to the frequency and starting phase of the master module After lock has been achieved the starting phase of the slave modules may be shifted with respect to the master module to create a multi phase system The starting phase is programmable from 0 to 360 PLL synchronization is another technique for synchronizing multiple waveform generators In this case synchronization is not between pairs of 3172 W2 modules but between the 3172 W2 and any external device that generates signals stable enough to satisfy the PLL input requirements When placed in this mode the 3172 W2 measures the frequency stability of the input signal and determines whether or not it is valid Then the built in counter timer circuit measures the frequency of the signal and centers its lock in range on this frequency The 3172 W2 thus locks automatically onto the frequency of the external signal Note that there is no need for manual ini
505. t The dwell time for each frequency list item is fixed and can be programmed using the HOP DWEL command Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the frequency hops list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 frequencies The 3172 will hop through this list outputting the next frequency each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the frequency step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is ims Sample Frequency Hops Data Array 1e 6 2e 6 3e 3 4e 6 5e 5 6e 2 7e 1 8e 6 9e 3 10e 5 Parameters Name Type Description lt fix_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of frequency values FHOP FIX DATA lt var_hop_data gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the frequency list The dwell time for each frequency list item is variable and is supplied in the variable hop table data array Note that the HOP DWEL command has no effect on this sequence Also note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the frequency hops list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sam
506. t CAL SETup 32 for DMM reading of 1 768 V 15 mV 1 5 V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 33 for DMM reading of 530mV 5 mV 1 V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 0 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for DMM reading of 176 8 mV 1 5mV 150 mV Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3172 output to the DMM input Terminate the 3172 output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feed through termination 3 Configure the 3172 as follows Fre
507. t Table section and a Sequence Table section as described below Segment Table Using the segment table you may list and download waveform files that are stored on the host computer For each waveform the table shows the segment number associated file name length and download status You may also download waveforms to memory segments using Wave Composer or individual function calls but Waveform Studio makes the process easy by combining multiple and complex commands into one simple dialog box To access the segment table click anywhere in the Segment Table area It will then turn white The Segment Table area is divided into three parts the table area the waveform shape area and control buttons When you click one of the waveforms the Waveform Shape window displays it Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Waveform Studio The Segment Table has four fields The Seg field contains numbers from 1 through 2 048 designating the programmed memory segment Note that memory segments are numbered from 1 to 16 k The State field shows the current status of the memory segment It can be Free if no file has yet been assigned to this segment number or Mapped if file name has been assigned to the segment but the Download button has not been used yet to move the file to the 3172 memory or Loaded if the process has been completed by pressing either the Download button or the All dow
508. t Waveform with Error 503 Example ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee errr eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 3 52 Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options Dialog Box 4 2 Figure 4 2 ArbConnection Menu and Link Bat cccccccesseneeeeesseeceeeeeseneeeeeeseeseeeeneeneeeeeeeneenes 4 3 Figure 43 Main Panels Toolbar onc test ca aloe eae tai er ah te coe cece eae oe aN a Ne 4 3 Figure 4 4 Operation Panel lee posse sorted geesde EENS 4 5 Figure 4 5 e en EE 4 7 Figure 4 6 Run Mode Control Eenelter sees autepder argh hadiplarscannd haraneeh ater nanna 4 9 Figure 4 7 Standard Waveforms Panel 4 11 Figure 4 8 Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel ENEE ENNEN 4 13 Figure 4 9 Memory Partition Tablet eu geg ugeeEesteedESedge Eege Ee Eet EES 4 15 Figure 4 10 Waveform Studio EE 4 17 Figure 4 11 Sequence Table Example AAA 4 19 Figure 4 12 Half Cycle Panel es ccccts ctecteceetastveacschignsvadecuedsechivasent stun viaieed ted equeauacdaeeiearebeceeavedetons 4 21 Figure 4 13 Modulation Panels vx csc sissies tea ceesien ee cereale G ieee eee ened 4 22 Fig re 4 14 ERIC 4 23 Fig re 4 15 AM Panel WEEN 4 24 Figure 4 16 Sweep Modulation Eglise treetbenctee tice ices ge cee 4 26 Figure 4 17 FSK PSK ASK Modulation Panel EEN 4 28 Figure 4 18 Amp Freq Hop Patel c ncs nie ocean nn Raeren 4 31 Figure 4 19 Auxiliary Panels 00 22 0022 ceeeeeeseceecceeeceeeeeeeneenneeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeneeeeeeeeesegegsseeseeaeceaeeeeenennees 4 32 Astronics Test
509. t a time is generated only after a valid trigger event is received There are three half cycle waveforms that can be generated Sine Triangle and Square Use the commands below to select the half cycle function and program the parameters func mod half Selects the half cycle function If you have not changed parameters then the output will generate half cycle sine waveforms where the halves are separated by 1 us delay intervals From this point you can change one or more of the half cycle parameters just as they would be programmed for the standard waveform generator Use the following commands to select one of the half cycle waveforms half shap sin Selects the sine waveform to be generated using the half cycle function half shap tri Selects the triangular waveform to be generated using the half cycle function half shap squ Selects the square waveform to be generated using the half cycle function After you select the function and waveform you may program other parameters to adjust the waveform specifically for your application You may adjust the start phase for the sine and triangular waveforms or the duty cycle for the square waveform and you may program the amount of delay between the half cycles Chapter 5 contains programming references that will allow you to program all of the half cycle parameters You may use the 3172 W2 as a counter timer instrument When using this function you may select the measurement function
510. t bit in the Standard Event Status Register ESR Reading the response to the OPC query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument However both the system bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold off state while the controller is waiting to read the OPC query response 5 118 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Response Returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed OPT Description Use this command to query the options that are installed in this specific module Response Returns 0 if no option is installed or 2 for the 4 Meg memory option RST Description Use this command to reset the instrument to its default setting Factory defaults are listed in the Default column in Table 5 1 SRE lt enable_bits gt Description Use this command to enable bits in the Service Request Enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte Information on the service request register is given in the following Parameters Name Range Default Description lt enable_bits gt 0 63 128 191 0 Programs the event that will cause the register to request service Setting of 0 disables this feature SRE Description Use this command to query the programmed bits in the Service Request Enable register Response The generator returns
511. t is programmed when using the Variable Hold option The various groups in this panel are described below State The State buttons enable or disable the hop functions General The General group contains parameters that are common to all of the hop functions These are CW frequency and baseline CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Amplitude Hop The Amplitude Hop group contains parameters that control the amplitude hop function These are hop data dwell control dwell time and marker position Hop Data The Hop Data button in the Ampl Hop group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of amplitude hops The hop data table contains a list of amplitude levels that the output steps through the amplitude levels of as programmed in the hop data table Fixed H
512. t the following description Make yourself familiar with these terms before attempting to use the Pulse Composer Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor is the prime tool for creating pulses To invoke the Pulse Editor point and click on the Pulse Editor icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar You can also invoke the editor by clicking on the Section Number icon as will be shown later in this description The Pulse Editor dialog box is shown in Figure 4 43 Pulse Train The Pulse Train view exposes the entire pulse design When downloading the waveform to the instrument the entire pulse train is downloaded regardless of the display mode Pulse Section A pulse train is constructed of 1 or more sections If the pulse is simple it can be created using one section only For more complex pulse trains the full train can be divided to smaller sections with each section designed separately Figure 4 46 shows a complex pulse train which was made from five simpler sections and Figure 4 47 shows the design of the fifth section only of the pulse train F Pulse Composer gt Untitled Chi E loj x File Edit view Tools Help D Ge RM amp ne Ful Train D I NA E om GH2 Astronics Test Systems Vertical Scale 10y 1 25YDiv Horizontal Scale 80ms Bms Div Figure 4 46 Complete Pulse Train Design 4 67 3172 User Manual 4 68 Publication Number 980949 Rev H E Pulse Composer gt Untitled Chi Ze ioj x File Edit Yie
513. table and allows you to define new segments Next define the waveform memory segments by specifying each segment number and its length trac def 1 4000 Defines the length of segment 1 to be 4 000 sample points Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 4 000 sample points trac def 2 1000 Defines the length of segment 2 to be 1 000 Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 1 000 sample points trac def 3 64 Defines the length of segment 3 to be 64 Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 1 000 sample points This completes the setup for the three memory segments Alternatively you may use the following command to create the entire partition table at once segm lt array gt Downloads the entire memory partition table to the instrument in one operation Once you have defined the waveform memory segments the next step is to specify the active segment This sets up the following conditions 1 The next time you download data to the 3172 W2 it will go to the active segment the 3172 W2 will accept downloaded data only if a segment is designated as active 2 The waveform contained in the active segment will appear at the output the next time you turn on the output 3 The SYNC output is associated with the active segment This is not important in arbitrary mode but in sequenced mode the segments may be arranged in any order Therefore the location of the sync signal is impo
514. tate The State button turns on and off the half cycle waveforms function The half cycle function can also be selected from the Output panel Shape The Shape group has controls that select the shape of the half cycle function Parameters The Parameters group has controls for programming the amplitude offset start phase and duty cycle Each channel can have an independent set of these parameters The Modulation functions were designed over seven separate panels as shown in Figures 4 13 through 4 18 The panels are invoked by pressing the Modulation header and then one of the modulation panels that appear below it These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective parameters The modulation functions that are available on these panels are FM frequency modulation AM amplitude modulation Sweep ASK amplitude shift keying FSK frequency shift keying and PSK phase shift keying and Amplitude and Frequency Hopping When modulation run modes other than continuous are selected there are two options that control the idle state between triggers 1 Carrier baseline and 2 DC baseline When the first option is selected the instrument generates the unmodulated carrier frequency CW until a valid signal is applied When the second option is selected the instrument generates a DC level signal until stimulated to generate a modulation cycle The modulation options their associated parameters and the various ru
515. tely reported through the Message Available bit bit 4 Bits in the summary register are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following Bit 0 Decimal value 1 Not used always set to 0 Bit 1 Decimal value 2 Not used always set to 0 Bit 2 Decimal value 4 Not used always set to 0 Bit 3 Decimal value 8 Not used always set to 0 Bit 4 Decimal value 16 Message Available Queue Summary Message MAV The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller The controller can for example send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV all system bus activity is held up until the device responds Bit 5 Decimal value 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message This bit indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register Bit 6 Decimal value 64 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS Bit This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service
516. tem control These are Reset generates a soft reset to the instrument controls and dialog boxes and modifies all parameters to factory default A list of factory defaults is given in Chapter 5 Query Error queries the 3172 for programming errors This command is normally not necessary because ArbConnection won t generate settings conflicts or syntax erorrs But when sending SCPI commands to the instrument using the Command Editor errors can be generated An error query allows these errors to be monitored Clear Queue clears the error queue The error queue can buffer up to 35 errors and then generate a queue overflow message while ignoring new errors This command clears the error queue and allows fresh errors to be captured General Information This general information group of buttons is used for displaying or monitoring parameters stored in flash memory These are Instrument serial number Last calibration data 3172 installed 4 40 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Calibration The Composers Panels Astronics Test Systems options and the installed firmware revision Filters The Filters group has a set of selectors that select the filter characteristics Filters can be turned on and off freely as long as you are not generating a standard sine waveform The following filter options are available All Off no filter is applied to the output path 2MHz a Bes
517. ter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Astronics Test Systems 4 19 3172 User Manual Half Cycle 4 20 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Adv This parameter flags the advance mode for the a givensegment This flag is active when the advance mode is Stepped When set to 0 the sequence will advance through the list automatically until a segment that is flagged 1 is encountered When 1 is encountered the generator will idle on this segment until an external trigger is applied Learn more about the sequence advance modes in Chapter 3 Figure 4 11 shows an example of a 4 step sequence of which the first waveform is made of segment 2 which will loop 50 times segment 3 looping once segment 1 looping 1200 times and segment 4 looping once The Adv bits on links 2 and 4 are set to 1 and therefore external triggers are required for the sequencer to step through these links Sync This parameter flags if a bit marker will occur on the selected segment Normal sync output is LCOM for the sequence mode however if you want to use shortened and or multiple sync pulses change the sync output selection in the Arbitrary Sequence Panel to BIT and the output will generate a pulse every time the sequence steps through a segment that has been flagged The control buttons on the left of
518. ter reading after each test Table 6 45 Double Pulse Delay Accuracy Tests P2 Double Pulse Delay Setting Error Limits Counter Reading Pass 10 00000 me 300s 1 000000 ms 80 0ns Y 100 000us 3 00us O 10 000us 300 5ns 1 000 us 30 5ns y O Dm 2 ml This tests the accuracy of the hold duty cycle pulse mode Actually Hold Duty Cycle the hold duty cycle mode is a special case of the single pulse mode Pulse Mode except in single pulse mode the pulse width remains constant regardless of the period settings and in the hold duty cycle pulse Accuracy mode the ratio between the pulse width and the period remains constant regardless of the period settings Note that each channel can have a unique duty cycle setting To perform the tests without error conditions reset the instrument and modify parameters that are specified in the tests only 6 56 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Hold Duty Cycle Pulse Mode Accuracy Tests Equipment Counter timer Preparation 1 Configure the counter timer as follows Function Pulse Width Averaged Trigger Level OV Termination 50 Q 2 Connect P2 channels 1 output to the counter timer input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Waveform Hold Duty Cycle High Level 2V Low Level 2 V Duty Cycle 10 Output On Period As required by the tests Test Procedure 1 Perform pulse width accuracy tests using Table 6 46
519. ters w Modulation w Auxiliary gt System GeneraliFilters L Output Calibration wY Composers W t Each item to be calibrated has a numbered selection button Pulse parameters Offset amp Amplitude Figure 7 12 Calibration Panel 4 In the Calibration Panel note that each calibration item has a numbered selection button For Periodic Calibration only items 27 through 50 should be adjusted For each row in Table 7 4 below do the following 5 Verify that the DMM is set to the function VDC or VAC 7 14 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Astronics Test Systems 3172 User Manual indicated in Table 7 4 In the Calibration Panel select the calibration item number indicated in Table 7 4 If a potentiometer is listed in the right hand column of Table 7 4 remove the right side panel and adjust the potentiometer to bring the DMM reading as close to the target value as feasible and then skip to step 9 To keep the internal temperature stable leave the side panel in place except when making potentiometer adjustments If no potentiometer is listed in the right column of the Table 7 4 then click the calibration adjustment number Figure 7 13 Using the right arrow key on the computer keyboard position the vertical cursor immediately to the left of the right most digit as shown Click the calibration adjustment number Amplitude Then use the keyboard arrow keys to posit
520. the burst counter reaches the specified count Timer The Timer button lets you set the trigger period of the free running internal trigger generator The internal trigger timer is programmed in units of seconds Note that the internal trigger generator function is available in Pulse mode only Other output functions use the re trigger generator which has a meaning different from that of the internal trigger period Information on the Re trigger mode is given in Chapter 3 Trigger Level Programs the trigger level parameter Depending on the slope setting the 3172 will be triggered to output waveforms when the trigger level threshold has been crossed Manual Trigger The TRIG button operates only in conjunction with the BUS mode Press the TRIG button to trigger the instrument as if an external trigger has been applied Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Standard Astronics Test Systems The Standard Waveforms Panel Figure 4 7 is accessible after you click on the Standard button in the Panels bar The Standard Waveform Panel groups allow adjustment of channel control parameters 10 MHz reference and waveforms The functional groups in the Standard Waveforms panel are described below General Parameters The General Parameters group has controls for Amplitude and Offset The values you set in this panel may be duplicated on other panels so whenever you change amplitude and offset in the
521. the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the trailing edge timing is not within range Setup 17 50 ns Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 10 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 17 for a rise time reading of 50 ns 2 ns Setup 18 200 ns Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 50 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 18 for a rise time reading of 200 ns 10 ns Setup 19 2 us Trailing Edge Equipment oscilloscope 7 50 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 500 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Fall time 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscillosco
522. the A3 input You can then command the A3 module to either amplify the W2 signal or simply pass it through to its output connector bypassing the amplifier When the A3 module is set to bypass the W2 output signal the signal still retains its full bandwidth However when the output amplifier is engaged the amplifier limits the bandwidth to 100 kHz Upon reset the A3 defaults to the OFF condition in which it bypasses the amplifier and routes the W2 signal routed directly to the output connector The amplifier is the ON condition using the following command outp ampl 1 This activates the amplifier circuits However the toggle switch on the A3 front panel must be set to the ON position to apply the amplified signal to the output connector For safety purposes a protective cover prevents inadvertent activation of the toggle switch The A3 has two operating modes e High The output swing can reach 122Vp p e Low The output is limited to 61Vp p A built in mechanism limits the voltage of the power supply rails on the amplifier circuit when low amplitude signals are generated This prevents the amplifier from overheating If your output swings from low to very high voltages you may allow the A3 to select the rail voltages automatically However if you are operating in a specific range it is recommended that you set up the supply voltages correctly Use the following command to generate signal swings up to 122Vp p outp ampl pow hi
523. the Model A3 module The Adjustment following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration Procedure A3 and what the acceptable calibration limits are Module Am plifier Gain The gain adjustments ensure that amplifier gain within the specified e range Use this procedure if you suspect that the gain is an issue Adjustments Equipment DMM Gain Adjustments Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV 2 Connect the 3172 W2 output to DMM input 3 Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Wave Shape Sin Frequency 10 kHz Amplitude 10Vpp Output On 4 Adjust 3172 W2 amplitude to DMM reading is 3 535V 5 Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 input 6 Connect the A3 output to the DMM input Adjustment 1 Adjust RV1 till DMM reading is within 42 42V 500mV Pulse Response The pulse response adjustments ensure that rise and fall times as well as aberrations are within the specified range Use this procedure Adjustments if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Equipment Oscilloscope Pulse E S reparation Adjustments 1 Configure the 3172 W2 as follows Function Standard Waveform Square Frequency 1MHz Amplitude 8Vpp Output On 2 Connect the 3172 W2 output to the A3 Input 3 Connect the A3 output to the oscilloscope via 20dB feed through attenuator Adjustment 3 Adjust C3 for best pulse response rise fall time of lt 1 5us 15 aberrations 7 64 Astronics Test Systems
524. the SYNC position to the first pulse transition Note that this delay does not include the system delay error that is specified in Appendix A Also note that the only case where the delay can exceed the value of the period setting is in triggered mode where external trigger events determine the period of the pulse Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to 10 Numeric 0 Will set the delay time interval in units of seconds Delay is measured from the SYNC to the first pulse transition System delay error is not included in the delay value and must be taken into consideration Response The 3172 will return the pulse delay value in units of seconds PULSe DOUBle DELay lt d_delay gt Description This command will program the delay between two adjacent pulses when the double mode is selected Otherwise the double pulse delay has no effect on the pulse structure Note that the only case where the delay can exceed the value of the period setting is in triggered mode where external trigger events determine the period of the pulse Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt d_delay gt Oto10 Numeric 200e 6 Will set the delay between two adjacent pulses for the double pulse mode in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and 5 96 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual therefore
525. the Sequence Table have the same functionality as for the Segment Table Use the Append key to add a step at the end of the sequence list Use the Insert key to insert a step at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a step at the cursor position Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the sequence Table from the screen but click on the Save key if you want just to save your work before you close the dialog box The Download key has double action it will download the sequence table to the instrument and will save the contents of your table so the next time you open this table it will have the same contents as you saved in your previous session The Half Cycle panel contains controls that select the half cycle functions and adjust the half cycle parameters The half cycle functions are generated with variable and controllable delay between the halves If triggered mode one half at a time is generated as a result of a trigger signal regardless of the programmed delay value The half cycle functions have different limitations compared to the standard functions these are listed in Appendix A The half cycle panel and the various parameters that control these functions are described below Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual The Modulation Panels Astronics Test Systems Figure 4 12 Half Cycle Panel S
526. the TRIG PLL determines the phase value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the phase shift is 0 When TRIG PLL is true the phase shift is 180 To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope ASK amplitude shift keying shifts the output between two amplitudes The logic level of the TRIG PLL input determines the instantaneous amplitude value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the output is at the base amplitude When TRIG PLL is true the output amplitude is shifted by an offset To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope The W2 generates three types of half cycle waveforms sine triangle and square The frequency range is 10 mHz to 1 MHz and the delay between half cycles is programmable from 100 ns to 20 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual W2 Counter Timer P2 Pulse Waveforms General Run Modes Astronics Test Systems seconds in increments of 20 ns You may also program the starting phase of the waveforms from 0 1 to 359 9 The W2 can operate as a counter timer to measure frequency period averaged period and pulse width and to count events As a counter timer it measures frequency to over 100 MHz with gate times of 100 us to 1 s When using a gate period of one second it provides seven digits of resolution with an initial accuracy of 1 ppm The P2 has
527. the W2 can use the CLK10 VXIbus signal or the front panel 10MHz REF IN signal which is available only ona 3172 that has at least one W2 module i e 3172 W2 or 3172 W2P2 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Phase Lock Loop PLL Signal Integrity Frequency Agility Amplitude Amplitude Span Ranges Astronics Test Systems By activating the Phase Locked Loop PLL function you may generate any standard or arbitrary waveform while synchronizing with an external signal or even while tracking it as its frequency changes This feature is not available on the P2 modules As technology evolves and new devices are developed each day faster and more complex signals are needed to simulate and stimulate these new devices Using the latest technology the W2 has a bandwidth of 30 MHz enabling it to accurately duplicate and simulate high frequency test signals With its outstanding sample clock generator range 16 bit vertical resolution and its high output voltage amplifier that has a high output bandwidth one can create mathematical profiles download sampled waveforms to the instrument and be assured that the waveforms are generated without compromising signal fidelity or system integrity Regardless of whether the W2 module the P2 module or both are used you can count on the fact that the 3172 ustilizes the latest technology to give you the purest and most reliable signals that only a c
528. tiation or operator intervention for the PLL function to find and lock onto an external reference The PLL range is 500 Hz to 10 MHz After phase locking has been established the start phase of the 3172 W2 waveform can be shifted with respect to the start phase of the external reference within the range of 180 to 180 with phase increments as low as 0 01 fine phase control The reference signal is applied to the front panel TRIG IN connector In this way the same reference can be applied to multiple modules to generate multi phase signal patterns The TRIG IN input has a programmable trigger level and programmable slope When the 3172 W2 is placed in PLL mode there are two ways to control the phase offset The first way is to modify the phase offset setting using SCPI commands This method is quite accurate and allows phase offset adjustments in increments of 0 01 The second way is to apply a voltage to the PM IN port of the 3172 W2 This changes the start phase of the synthesizer proportional Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Filters Output State Programming the 3172 W2 Astronics Test Systems to the voltage level at the phase modulation input An input voltage of 1 V modifies the phase by 20 The phase changes between 130 and 130 as the applied voltage goes from 10 V to 10 V The instrument responds to AC changes on the PM IN port throughout the frequency range
529. tion Am plitude Use the following commands for programming the amplitude hop e parameters Hop control is internal The amplitude will hop from Hopping amplitude level to amplitude level at a rate determined by the dwell Modulation time value and controlled by a sequence of amplitudes in the HOP i data table Programming There are two hop modes Fixed Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from amplitude level to amplitude level is constant and Variable Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from amplitude level to amplitude level is programmable for each hop The commands for programming the amplitude hopping function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes AHOP DWELI MODe FIXed VARiable Description This selects between fixed or variable dwell time for the amplitude hops Select the fixed option if you want each amplitude level to dwell equally on each step The variable option lets you program different dwell times for each amplitude hop The 3172 output hops from one amplitude level to the next according to a sequence given in a hop table The variable dwell time table contains dwell time data for each step however the fixed dwell time table does not contain any dwell time information and therefore if you select the fixed option make Astronics Test Systems 5 91 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H sure your dwell time
530. tion at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 4V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 33 for a DMM reading of 4 V 20 mV 7 56 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setup 34 5 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Period 1 us Amplitude 10 mV Offset 5 5 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 5 5 V 25 mV Setup 35 7 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Amplitude 10 mV Offset 7V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 34 for a DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV Setup 36 8 5 V Offset Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the P2 output to the DMM input Use a 50 Q feedthrough termination at the DMM input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Amplitude Range Positive Astronics Test Systems 7 57 3172 User Manual Setup 37 Setup 38 Setup 39 7 58
531. tion options listed Corrective Actions 1 Increase the pulse width value 2 Decrease the leading edge value 3 Decrease the trailing edge value Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Figure 3 12 Output Waveform with Error 500 Example 501 PW Plus Transitions Exceed Width 502 Transitions Outside of Range Astronics Test Systems Error 500 PW plus Transitions Exceed Width occurs when attempting to program a pulse width value that is larger than the programmed pulse period This error may occur in single pulse mode only and in continuous run mode and under the following conditions WID 0 625 LEE TRE gt PER When such an error occurs the resultant output would have looked as shown in Figure 3 12 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Decrease the pulse width value 2 Increase the pulse period value or 3 Decrease the leading edge value 4 Decrease the trailing edge value Error 502 Transitions Outside of Range occurs when attempting to program the trailing edge value outside of the leading edge range This error may occur in all pulse modes except external pulse width and in all run modes under the following conditions LEE amp TRE In Range To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operat
532. to a standard waveform and will update the values of the frequency amplitude and offset as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard waveform in 30e6 units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard waveform in 20 units of volts lt offs gt 11to11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard waveform in units of volts Response The 3172 returns the present frequency amplitude and offset setting similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 APPLy SINusoid lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phas gt lt power gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard sine and programs the frequency amplitude offset start phase and power coefficient simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate FM the 3172 will stop generating FM will revert to the standard sine waveform and will update the sine parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard sine waveform 30e6 in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard sine waveform 22 in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard sine waveform in units of volts
533. tor accuracy does not meet the published specification limits or after a repair has been executed on this same circuit Setup 10 MHz 10 MHz TCXO Frequency Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Termination 500 2 Connect the P2 output to the counter input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 10 MHz Output On Amplitude 2V Waveform Square Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 1 for counter reading of 10 MHz 2 Hz Setup 50MHz2 50 MHz Gated Oscillator Adjustment Equipment Counter Function Generator BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 Q DC Function TIA gt B Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square wave Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude 1V Offset 1V 3 Place a T connector on the function generator output and connect one end to the P2 TRIG input and the other end to the A channel on the counter 4 Connect the P2 output to the B channel of the counter 5 Configure the P2 as follows N Period 1 us Run Mode Triggered Trigger Delay On Delay 10 us Output On Adjustment 1 Program CAL SET 0 Astronics Test Systems 7 43 3172 User Manual Pulse Period Adjustments Setup 02 Pulse Width Adjustments Setup 03 7 44 Publication Number 980949 Rev H 2 Adjust C351 for a period of 10 us 5 The pulse period adjustments assure that the period of the pulse generator is w
534. transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for large number of segment As an example the next command will generate three segments with 12 bytes of data that contains segment size information SEGment 212 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 3 segments into the segment table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 4 The generator accepts binary data as 32 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always 4 times the number of segments For example 36 bytes are required to download 9 segments to the segment table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 2 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data The segment table data is made of 32 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas li
535. transition must be programmed within the same range Additional information on the range settings is provided in Chapter 3 of this manual SYMMertical Discrete Programs a special mode where the transitions are symmetrical for both the leading and trailing edges regardless if you program the leading or the trailing edge parameter the other parameter will automaticall be adjusted to have the same value Response The 3172 will return FAST LIN or SYMM depending on the present transition setting Astronics Test Systems 5 97 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H PULSe TRANSsition lt leading_edge gt Description This command will program the interval it will take the leading edge of the pulse to transition from its low to high level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Transition times are programmed within 6 ranges of which both leading and trailing edges must reside in the same range The leading edge setting determines the range More information on this function is available in Chapter 3 Note that this parameter will affect the instrument only when the pulse transition mode is set to linear Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt leading_e 5e 9 to 5e 3 Numeric 10e 6 Will set the leading edge transition time parameter in dge gt units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including transition times must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended t
536. ts are pre loaded into waveform memory before a sequence table is used To create a waveform sequence you will create a sequence table that provides instructions to the sequencer for assembling the waveform from the segments in the waveform memory Figure 3 2 shows an example of a sequence table created using ArbConnection The sequence table has five fields for each step Link This defines the step number The sequence will advance through the links in the same order in which they are entered There are no pauses or transitions between links Seg This defines the waveform segment number that will be linked to form the next part of the sequence The order of waveform segments in waveform memory is irrelevent You may link them in 3 25 3172 User Manual 3 26 Segment Publication Number 980949 Rev H any order Loops This defines the number of times the segment will repeat itself before advancing to the next link or step The number of loops may range from 1 through 1 048 576 Adv Defines the advance bit which tells the generator whether to move to the next link immediately or to hold and wait for a trigger event before moving to the next link The various advance modes are discussed in more detail in another section Sync This specifies the link on which you want to place a synchronization bit The SYNC output must be switched to the Bit source option to enable the use of this feature The Normal SYNC o
537. tting is to be used for each test it is required that instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test Frequency accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the internal oscillator The internal oscillator determines the accuracy and stability of the entire generator The accuracy of the frequency depends on the 10 MHz reference oscillator The W2 defaults to the internal TCXO that provides an accuracy of 1 ppm The accuracy of the output frequency tests the internal TCXO because its accuracy is much higher than the backplane CLK10 If both the internal TCXO and the backplane CLK10 are insufficient for accuracy purposes an external 10 MHz reference clock can be applied to the W2 The 10 MHz external reference input is not available for the legacy 3171 mode 6 3 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Frequency Accuracy Equipment Counter Internal Reference Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 Q DC coupled 2 Connect the W2 output to the counter input channel A 3 Configure the W2 as follows Waveform Square wave 10 MHz Source Internal TCXO Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 2 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Frequency Accuracy W2 Setting Error Limits_ Counter Reading Pass Fal Tee E e EE E EE EES 10 0000000kHz 10mHz Jo S E T eg po rs ees ae Frequency Accuracy Equipment
538. turns the present frequency value If no signal is applied to the trigger input the response will be 0 The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FREQuency SOURce INTernal ADJacent Description This command is used for selecting the source of the clock generator for the P2 channels If left with its default option each of the pulse channels is fed from a separate and independent clock generator source Use this command if you wish to synchronize the outputs of two pulse channels to each other or to the sample clock generator from the arbitrary waveform generator Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Each of the pulse channels has a separate clock generator With this option each channel can have a unique repetition rate independent of the other channels in the 31 72 carrier ADJacent Discrete Disables the clock in channel 2 The clock generator from channel 1 is fed to channel 2 In this case the two pulse channels share a single clock and hence are synchronized to each other Response The 3172 returns INT EXT or CLK10 depending on the present 3172 reference clock source setting FREQuency lt freq gt MINimum MAXimum Description Astronics Test Systems 5 31 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This command modifies the frequency of the standard waveforms in units of hertz Hz
539. ugh for most applications However you may maximize the effective memory capacity by downloading specific waveforms only when they are required For example if one part of your ATE sequence requires a complex waveform that consumes nearly all of the waveform memory you may delete this waveform after that portion of your sequence is completed and then quickly download a new waveform for the next part of the sequence Depending upon your application you may be able to change waveform parameters even more quickly without downloading new data After you download a waveform you may change the sample clock frequency amplitude offset and run modes without disturbing the downloaded data The W2 can divide its memory into smaller segments and then use these segments to create complex sequences of waveforms The W2 can generate the following functions e Standard waveforms The W2 computes these automatically from its built in equations for sine square triangle and other common waveforms e Arbitrary waveforms Download these to the instrument whenever you need to change from one arbitrary waveform to another e Waveform sequences The W2 builds sequenced waveforms from memory segments that are loaded with the waveforms and are referenced in the sequence table in advance e Modulated signals A direct digital synthesis DDS circuit creates these signals without downloading a waveform e Half cycle waveforms Half cycle waveforms are
540. uilt in library as the active waveform Programs the ramp leading edge rise time in units of percent referenced to the ramp period Programs the ramp trailing edge fall time in units of percent referenced to the ramp period Sets the amplitude level to 1Vp p Sets the offset level to zero Similar sequences could select different standard waveforms and program their parameters See Chapter5 for a programming reference to the complete range of standard waveforms 3 15 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Generating Each standard waveform is built into the 3172 W2 in a lookup table or equation Ten standard function shapes are available Standard Em Waveforms Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Decaying Pulse Gaussian Pulse Noise DC Every time you select a standard function the 3172 W2 retrieves the data points from a lookup table or calculates them from equations and then places them into waveform memory Use the following commands to select one of the standard waveform shapes func shap sin Selects the sine waveform func shap tri Selects the triangle waveform func shap squ Selects the square waveform func shap puls Selects the pulse waveform func shap ramp Selects the ramp waveform func shap sinc Selects the sinc waveform func shap gaus Selects the Gaussian waveform func shap exp Selects the exponential waveform func shap nois Selects the noise waveform func shap dc Selects the DC wavefo
541. ulse Design Limitations ee ege Hick Sips Suen Mek Maa ed apn E 3 48 Pulse Setting TE 3 49 222 Data o tof range EE 3 50 500 Transitions Exceed Wd 3 50 501 PW Plus Transitions Exceed Wd 3 51 502 Transitions Outside of e EE 3 51 605 DOUDIG Delay EI le EE 3 52 504 Double Delay and Width Conflict AAA 3 52 505 Delay and Width Beeler 3 53 506 Duty Cycle notin Range teste eegene gege Eege 3 53 iv Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 507 Delay CONTI ENEE 3 53 Controlling AS et EE 3 54 Chaplet Aa a ra r a aae aae ara a aar a Ea a aAa A Aaa ara E ASEA e n EE n Edsa San Cin eines daanin Eii 4 1 AFDC ONNMGCHION E 4 1 NEE E SE SE 4 1 ele KEE 4 1 system Requirements science nine he a eke Sean dee i a el eee 4 1 HAStal Le Bn L ee e ere 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options EE 4 2 ArbConnection Feature EE 4 3 Main WIN EE 4 3 elei ME 4 4 The ele RTE 4 6 COTE IT eege ee eegene eg 4 6 R n MOU Gs deu SSES Ee EA Ee 4 9 EE Late KEE 4 11 Arbitrary Seguente E 4 12 Using the Memory Partition E EE 4 15 Using Wavelorin StUCIO EE 4 16 Man OVClG 6 nish 2 antec cp ee ee 4 20 The Modulation TEE 4 21 EK eegene ee Ee 4 22 AM esl ect ec Ee Schl ace Pea Sha eal nha Rear aa ee 4 24 EE EE PE ae ar ere Er fT DEE me I CPOE PETE ae PPT nee Pee 4 26 FSKIPSKASK geg teeters ee ceed areas ee GE 4 27 AmpiFreg ETO eene ee eene 4 30 Auxiliary Panels cies ca sescesdectn sities ste
542. ulse width and leading and trailing edges settings similar to the following example 1e6 5 0 10 10 10 10 APPLy RAMP lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt del gt lt lee gt lt tre gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard ramp and programs the frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate arbitrary waveforms the 3172 will stop generating arbitrary waveforms will revert to the standard ramp waveform and will update the pulse parameters as specified by this command Parameters Astronics Test Systems 5 61 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard ramp waveform 30e6 in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard ramp waveform 22 in units of volts lt offs gt 11to 11 Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard ramp waveform in units of volts lt del gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the delay time of the standard ramp waveform in units of percent lt lee gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the leading edge transition time of the standard ramp waveform in units of percent lt tre gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the trailing edge transition time of the standard ramp wavef
543. ults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 9 Modulated Waveforms Global Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Association SOURCe MODulation TYPE OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOPping OFF W2 AHOPping EXAM CARRier FREQuency 10 to 30e6 1e6 W2 BASeline CARRier DC CARR W2 MODulation TYPE OFF AM FM SWEeep FSK ASK PSK FHOPping AHOPping Description This command selects the modulation type All modulation types are internal thus external signals are not required for producing modulation Parameters Name OFF AM FM SW Eep FSK ASK PSK Type Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Astronics Test Systems Default OFF Description Modulation off is a special mode where the output generates continuous non modulated sinusoidal carrier waveform CW This turns on the AM function Program the AM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the FM function Program the FM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the sweep function Program the sweep parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the FSK function Program the FSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the ASK function Pro
544. up As required for the test 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode Triggered Run Mode Src As specified in Table 6 50 Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Configure the auxiliary 3172 as follows Frequency 100KHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Continuous Trigger Output As specified in Table 6 50 Output On Test Procedure 1 Set up the trigger output and trigger source as specified in Table 6 50 and verify that the P2 generates a pulses every 10 us with every matched output trigger and source settings Table 6 50 Trigger Source Tests Auxiliary 3172 P2 Trigger Oscilloscope Trigger Output Setting Source Setting Reading Pass Fail TTLTO OFF TTLT1 ON TTLT1 10 us trig intervals TTLT1 OFF TTLT2 ON TTLT2 10 us trig intervals TTLT2 OFF TTLT3 ON TTLT3 10 us trig intervals TTLT3 OFF TTLT4 ON TTLT4 10 us trig intervals TTLT4 OFF TTLT5 ON TTLT5 10 us trig intervals TTLT5 OFF TTLT6 ON TTLT6 10 us trig intervals TTLT6 OFF TTLT7 ON TTLT7 10 us trig intervals Astronics Test Systems 6 63 3172 User Manual Backplane Trigger Output Source Publication Number 980949 Rev H Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary 3172 in an adjacent slot Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50Q 20 dB feed through attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Configure the P2 as
545. uracy Internal Heterence ANEN 6 4 Frequency Accuracy External 10 MHz Heierence 6 4 PIMPS ACCURACY ee eet ee tit ed leech te tea aoe Bd 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy DAC Outputs inci cacesavackGsectarepancant caste ENEE eege 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy DDS e EE 6 6 OfSELACCUIAGCY cen ge See E e lattes 6 6 Offset Accuracy DAC O UpUt ee dE EE EEN 6 7 Offset Accuracy EEN ee eege eg 6 8 Square Wave GnaracteniStiCs EE 6 9 Square Wave Checks e geteeek e Eeegee AER ENRedEeENeEEA Ree EEA EE ENEE 6 9 ele E 6 10 sinewave Distortion DAC Ou puts cscs castsceesoiccenndetdandesh eeh d eege ege eae 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output ek 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DDS Output ENEE 6 11 Sinewave Flatness Ru TE 6 12 Sinewave Flatness DDS EHM site toncevateie peed clevacene geet ergeet leg efe enee inaeeaees 6 13 source Impedance Characteristics isccsieteiieisdaviaeeid teenie ea EENS EEN See NEEN 6 14 Source Impedance eos E eas Oe Ss ee Acre een ee oe gel eee aaa 6 14 Trigger Operation Characteristics zeesgteet ccd ceeeceadi ele sats boeken Ee Ee eaeg 6 15 Trigger Gate and Burst Charachertstcs AAA 6 15 Delayed Trigger Characteristics AEN 6 16 Re trigger Characheristice Ae 6 17 Heer ee 6 18 Trigger TEE 6 19 Backplane Trigger ZopuEER gege AEN 6 20 External SCLK Characieristice ANEN 6 21 External SCEK IN mre ge tee td Ee eta eas 6 21 SOS WEE E EE 6 22 Automatic EE 6 22 DOI ANS NAE La 1O ee lek eee a ene EE Oe eee er een eee eege 6 23 MOINS Ve EE 6 24
546. urce Detailed information on pulse parameters and control options is given in Chapter 3 The 3172 may operate in one of four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and Burst These modes are described below Note that the W2 behaves differently when it generates modulated waveforms The description below applies to standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The Modulation mode is described later The 3172 responds to a variety of trigger sources front panel triggers the TRIG IN connector VXlbus backplane trigger lines 1 23 3172 User Manual Continuous Mode Triggered Mode Gated Mode 1 24 Publication Number 980949 Rev H TTLTrg0 7 and software triggers from the computer There are also two built in trigger generators One repeats itself at pre programmed intervals from 100 ns to 20 seconds The other has a programmable delay The re trigger delay is measured from the end of a signal to the start of the next signal You may program the re trigger delay from 100 ns to 20 seconds in increments of 20 ns In Continuous mode the 3172 generates the selected waveform continuously at the selected frequency amplitude and offset The generator will begin waveform generation as soon as the waveform and its parameters have been programmed and will stop only when turned off or placed in one of the interrupted run modes In Triggered mode you may program the trigger circuit to respond to positive or negative transitions
547. ure 4 40 Using Equation Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Sidebands 4 60 Figure 4 41 Combining Waveforms into Equations eee eeeeeenieeeeeeeeeeteeea 4 61 Figure 4 42 Pulse Composer Screen 2 eiexgeu e dees SEENEN Ee eeh deed 4 63 ele UI Pulse e 4 65 Figure 4 44 Pulse Editor Options acccvinctocace Gu nteaccenties bees ttant iadeestieienait tent iatuettieter aarti 4 66 Figure 4 45 Pulse Composer LOol E 4 66 Figure 4 46 Complete Pulse Train Design ENEE 4 67 Figure 4 47 Section 5 of the Pulse Train DeSiQM ccesseecceeeesenceeeeeseeeeceeeenseeeeeeenseneeeeeees 4 68 Figure 4 48 Selecting Pulse Editor Opottons kee 4 69 Figure 4 49 Using the Pulse Editor lt ccs scsi acaveee cal Ai adeer ay cca eis ade cs eda ees edge tee ee eae 4 70 Figure 4 50 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Exvample ANNE 4 73 Figure 4 51 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Exvample ANNE 4 74 Figure 4 52 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Exvample ANNE 4 75 Figure 4 53 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Exvample 4 76 Figure 4 54 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Exvample 4 77 Figure 4 55 Pulse Editor Download Summary cceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeneee eee eeeeetteecaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeteeea 4 78 Figure 4 56 FM Composer Opening Screen ke 4 80 Figure 4 57 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer sssssssseessesssserrnnerssrrrrrrree 4 82 Figure 4 58 3D Composer Sereen NEE 4 84 Figure 4 59 Parameters EL EE 4 85 Figure 4 60 Expa
548. ure that the delays of the generated Adjustments pulses are within the specified limits Note that each channel has its own delay adjustments and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse delay is not within range Setup 07 100 us Delay Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function period A Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the P2 output to the counter input 3 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 7 for counter reading of 100 us 0 1 us 2 Note and record the value of setup 7 and calculate K1 using the following equation KO will be required the delay balance adjustments in Setups 08 09 and 10 K1 1 1 setup 7 reading 128 1000 Calculation example For a setup 7 reading 64 K1 1 1 644 128 1000 0 8389 Setups 08 Delay Balance Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 5 ns div Termination 50 Q Measure Time interval sync to output 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Program CAL SETup 8 and note and record the reading in units of ns Note as DLYA Setup 10 Zero Delay Compensation 7 46 Astr
549. urst cycles Use the following commands to place the instrument in Burst mode and to Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual program the burst counter init cont off Selects the interrupted run mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in triggered run mode trig burs 1 Turns the Burst mode on trig burs coun lt value gt Sets the burst counter After a legal trigger event the instrument will generate the counted number of waveforms and then resume idling at a DC level lt burst event gt This starts the burst generator You may select the source of the burst event from a number of inputs including software trigger front panel input or VXlbus backplane trigger line The counted burst sequence will continue as long as legal trigger events are present at the trigger input Use the following commands to restore Continuous mode trig burs 0 This turns off Burst mode The generator reverts to Triggered run mode init cont on This removes the 3172 W2 from an interrupted run mode and reverts to Continuous run mode Selecting the Interrupted run modes require trigger signals of which there are S three types Trigger Source Sg External trigger For synchronizing with external events connect the external trigger signal to one of the trigger inputs Internal trigger generator For applications not requiring s
550. ut On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 24 for a best vertical alignment about the vertical center line Setup 25 Vertical Balance Step 3 Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 2 ms div Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 25 for a best vertical alignment about the vertical center line Setup 26 Vertical Balance Step 4 Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 2 ms div Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Astronics Test Systems 7 53 3172 User Manual Baseline Offset Adjustments Setup 27 Setup 28 7 54 Publication Number 980949 Rev H Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 26 for a best vertical alignment about the vertical center line 2 Repeat setups 23 through 26 for best vertical alignments between the steups The baseline offset adjustments assure that the pulse signal is symmetrical about the amplitude mid range value for all amplitude ranges Use this procedure if you suspect that there is
551. ut Output Protection Power On Reset Defaults Turning the Output On Turning the SYNC Output On 3 2 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The 3172 provides protection for its internal circuitry at the input and output connectors Appendix A specifies the level of protection for each input or output connector At power up or as a result of a software reset the 3172 changes all settings to their default values Chapter 4 lists all settings and their default values as well as their maximum and minimum allowable values It is good practice to reset the instrument between sequence events to make sure that parameters that were programmed for previous tests will not accidently interfere with future tests Use the following common command to reset the instrument to its default state rst For safety the OUTPUT connector of the 3172 defaults to the Off state when the unit is first powered up or receives a software reset To avoid the production of random signals at the output connector keep the output in the Off state while setting up the instrument The output signal is connected to the OUTPUT connector through a mechanical relay When writing software to control the 3172 provide a 2 ms delay to make sure that the signal output is stable before you proceed with the next step of the test Use the following commands to turn the output on and off outp 1 Turns the output on outp 0 Turns the output off The
552. ut buffer but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cleared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed 5 127 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 5 128 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Chapter 6 Performance Checks What s in thi This chapter provides performance tests necessary to verify proper at s this operation of the Model 3172 The 3172 module can contain a Chapter combination of the following modules e W2 Single channel arbitrary waveform generator poor A e P2 Dual channel pulse generator RIM GP ELEC IAL SG UG NGI GIEN e A3 High voltage power amplifier The available combinations are listed in Chapter 1 Perform only the performance checks for the modules installed in your 3172 unit A A WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION Keen ALWAYS PERFORM PERFORMANCE TESTS AT A eae STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION Astronics Test Systems 6 1 3172 User Manual Performance Checks Environmental Conditions Warm up Period Initial Instrument Setting Reco
553. utomatically before it begins idling After execution of all of the programmed loops the sequencer steps to the next segment in the sequence upon receipt of the next valid trigger event This Stepped Advance mode specifies that the sequence advances to the next link only when a valid trigger event has been received In this mode the 3172 W2 generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next segment If repeats are Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H Generating Modulated Waveforms Astronics Test Systems seq adv mix 3172 User Manual specified in the sequence table they are ignored in Stepped Advance mode Note that this mode requires that the run mode be set to Continuous In this mode advancing to the next link is controlled by the Advance bit in the link definition 0 will cause the link to advance automatically to the next link 1 will cause the link to repeat itself continuously until a valid trigger event has been received and then the generator will begin executing the next link Note that this mode requires that the run mode be set to Continuous The modulation generator is a separate instrument within the 3172 W2 Based on DDS technology it has a wide dynamic range and high linearity throughout the modulation range The 3172 W2 can modulate in the frequency amplitude and phase domains When the modulation output is selected but
554. utput after a trigger is issued To select delayed pulse mode refer to the Selecting a Pulse Mode section above The parameters associated with the basic delayed pulse mode are Period Width High and Low Levels and Pulse Delay The pulse delay is measured from the trigger edge to the 50 amplitude point of the pulse leading edge as shown in Figure 3 4 High Level 0 Low Level Rise Time Fall Time H Delay p m 2 Trigger Figure 3 4 Delayed Pulse Mode Period The period defines the repetition rate of the pulse in continuous run Astronics Test Systems 3 39 3172 User Manual 3 40 Publication Number 980949 Rev H mode The period parameter has no meaning if the 3172 P2 is in triggered or counted burst run mode Use the following command to program the period puls per lt value gt The period is programmable from 20 ns to 5 seconds The default value is 1 ms Width The Width parameter defines the width of the pulse at the 50 point between its high and low level setting The pulse width interval is not affected by settings of other parameters such as rise and fall times Use the following command to program the pulse width puls wid lt value gt Pulse width is programmable from 7 ns to 5 seconds The default value is 100 ns High Level The high level parameter defines the top amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is larger than the lo
555. utput definition from a specific TTLTrg line and permits re definition of this line as an input The descriptions up to this point have been mostly common between the W2 and P2 Description from this point on pertains to the W2 module only Later in this chapter there will begin a section which describes the operation of the P2 module 3 13 3172 User Manual Selecting an Output Function Example Generating Standard Waveforms 3 14 Publication Number 980949 Rev H The W2 has six basic output functions these are Standard Waveforms Arbitrary Waveforms Sequenced Waveforms Modulated Waveforms and Half Cycle Waveforms Use the following commands to select the output function func mode fix The W2 outputs the standard waveform currently selected by the FUNC SHAP command Standard functions are re computed every time a new function or is selected or parameter is modified func mode user The W2 outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the TRAC SEL command func mode seq Selects the sequenced waveform function Waveform segments must be downloaded to the instrument before it can sequenced generate waveforms In addition the SEQ DEF command must be used to define the sequence func mode mod Selects the modulated waveform function Modulation schemes are generated internally by a special DDS circuit and are routed through a by pass leg to the output connector The MOD TYP command is used for selecting the
556. utput is LCOM where the output goes high at the beginning of the sequence and returns to low at the end of the sequence The following paragraphs describe the commands that create delete update and modify sequence tables x table _File name M apped A Mapped Ch Wav 1 6bit pulse way 1024 Mapped Ch MA al 6bit sinc way 1024 Free Download Waveform Shape lt segment 1 gt Figure 3 2 Sequence Table Created in ArbConnection Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Sequence Commands Astronics Test Systems The following is an overview of how to define and program a sequence of arbitrary waveforms A sequence is made of a series of links A link can stand on its own or link to another step It is possible to have only one link in a sequence but the output will be a continuous waveform H only one link is specified and the 3172 W2 is placed in Triggered advance mode then the output will behave as it would in Burst mode where the repeat number replaces the burst count parameter The easiest way to create a sequence table is with ArobConnection Using this application you can define create and download waveform segments to the waveform memory without using low level commands You may also use Waveform Studio to develop sequences Use the following commands to write sequence tables seq sel lt 1 10 gt The 3172 W2 c
557. v H 3172 User Manual Shared Horizontal Controls Astronics Test Systems The Shared Horizontal Control has two tabs View and Parameters View The View tab is useful if you are interested in programming 1 or two profiles only and do not care to see other screens Check the boxes for the profiles you wish to program only and these will be shown on the screen For example if you check the Amplitude and the Frequency options the Phase screens will not be visible Parameters The Parameters tab as shown in Figure 4 59 is used for setting up the duration of the signal the position of the marker if required and the amount of memory that is allocated for this purpose Setting up correctly the parameters in this group is the basic and the most important task before you start designing 3D waveforms The duration can be set in units of ns us ms and seconds and can be programmed within the range of 800 ns to 30 000 s The 3D profiler behaves just like an arbitrary waveform The shape of the profiler is generated using waveform points and a dedicated 3D sample clock So just as the basics for an arbitrary waveform design the duration is derived from the following relationship Duration SCLK of waveform points where SCLK is the 3D sample clock and the of waveform points can be programmed from 2 to 30 000 Shared Horizontal Controls View Parameters Duration fi ms v Marker fo 3D Memory Map 29e3 points free i
558. verride Loaded Segments makes sure that Pulse Composer does not overwrite waveforms already stored in memory Allow Pulse Design With No Limitations allows Pulse Composer to overwrite waveforms already stored in memory Pulse Transition management The pulse transition management parameter defines for the program how many waveform points will be used to step from one amplitude level to another amplitude level The longer the transition time the more steps the program will need to smooth the transition Allow System Control Lets the 3172 decide how to make the transitions efficient in terms of memory usage and slope smoothness Limit Increments Lets you manually control how many waveform points are used in transitions After you complete setting the Pulse Editor options click on OK The prime tool for building pulse patterns on the Pulse Composer screen is the Pulse Editor To invoke the Pulse Editor click on the Pulse Editor icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar and the editor shown in Figure 4 49 appears Refer to this figure for the following descriptions Ol x D Ge NM e ER US Ful Train D NA A om CH2 Section Structure Pulse Train Design Format Index Level te DC Intervals Time Level Points Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 0 ms 1 9 Apply Duration RI Ons Pulse currently not specified 4 70 Figure 4 49 Using t
559. w level setting does not exceed 20 V and exceeds the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting Use the following command to program the pulse high level volt hil lt value gt The high level is range independent therefore it can be programmed from 19 995 V to 20 V The default value is 2 5 V Low Level The low level parameter defines the lowest amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the high level setting does not exceed 20 V and exceeds the 5 mV minimum high to low level setting Use the following command to program the pulse high level volt lol lt value gt The high level is range independent it can be programmable from 20 V to 19 995 V The default value is 2 5 V Delay The delay parameter specifies the time between the SYNC output and the first pulse transition Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the period setting plus the pulse width setting For longer delays use the trigger delay function either alone or combined with the pulse delay function for maximum delay resolution Use the following command to program the delay value puls del lt value gt Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Double Pulse Mode High Level Pulse Width 50 Low Level Rise Time Astronics Test Systems Pulse delay is programmable from 0 to 5 s Double Pulse mode is a special mode that outputs a pair of puls
560. w Tools Help O oe lS BB u feas z Sz Z on op Vertical Scale 10y 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 35 2ms 3 52ms Div Figure 4 47 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design Now that we somewhat understand the Pulse Composer terminology we can start with an example of how to design a pulse train like the one shown in Figure 4 47 If you already have some pulses shown on your Pulse Composer graph click on New to start with a fresh page Another initial step is to set the design parameters in the options menu to determine the way that the pulse will be stored in the 3172 waveform memory Click on View gt Options and refer to Figure 4 48 throughout the following description Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setting the Pulse Editor Options File Edit view H As shown in Figure 4 48 the Pulse Editor option dialog box is divided into four functional groups Mode of operation Design Units Memory Management and Pulse Transition Management These groups are described below Mode of Operation There are three options in the mode of operation group Freely Select Mode of Operation use this mode of operation to let the generator decide for itself how to create pulses in 3172 waveform memory Force Pulse Train to Single Segment recommended if you are using one pulse section only In this case the pulse waveform will occupy one segment only and the generator will automatic
561. ware revision indication is shown in Figure 7 18 Astronics Test Systems 7 65 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H Figure 7 18 Firmware Revision Screen Before updating the firmware check with the factory to determine whether the new firmware supports the hardware revision you currently have To update the 3172 firmware simply install the latest version of the VXIplug amp play driver or the latest version of ArbConnection or just replace the RI3172 W2 dll in the C WINDOWS SYSTEMS32 folder with a newer version 7 66 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Updating Message based Firmware Astronics Test Systems Before you attempt to update the firmware check the revision level of the product Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware to address a specific problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem There are a number of ways to check the revision level of your firmware 1 Use a SCPI command from an external utility You can read the firmware version by sending the following query SYST INFO FIRM VERS The response is a string showing the firmware version e g 3 07 2 Using ArbConnection select the General Filters panel from the System tab and click on the Firmware Version button The General Filters panel with the firmw
562. waveform Program this parameter only if you fully understand the effect on the waveform otherwise let the instrument determine the number of steps as required to successfully complete the setting of the sweep Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt _steps gt 10 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the number of steps in a sweep This number 2000 integer only affects the swept triangle and square only Response The 3172 returns the present number of sweep steps value SWEep MARkKer lt frequency gt Description This function programs marker frequency position Sweep marker can be placed in between the start and the stop frequencies The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10 to 30e6 Numeric 505e3 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz Response The 3172 returns the present marker frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned 5 82 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual j Use the following commands for programming the FSK parameters FSK Modulation FSK control is internal The frequency will shift from carrier to shifted Programming frequency setting at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the FSK data table The commands for programming the f
563. would have looked as illustrated in Figure 3 13 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Increase the double delay value 2 Decrease the pulse width value 3 52 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual 505 Delay and Width Conflict 506 Duty Cycle not in Range 507 Delay Conflict Astronics Test Systems 3 Increase the pulse period value or 4 Decrease the leading edge value 5 Decrease the trailing edge value Error 505 Delay and Width Conflict occurs when attempting to program a delay to the pulse width value that is larger than the programmed pulse period This error may occur in delayed pulse mode and in continuous run mode under the following conditions DEL WID 0 625 LEE TRE 4 ns gt PER When such an error occurs the resultant output would have looked as illustrated in Figure 3 12 red line To correct the problem and to restore the pulse generator to normal operation use one or more of the corrective action options listed Corrective Actions 1 Decrease the delay value Decrease the pulse width value Increase the pulse period value or Decrease the leading edge value Decrease the trailing edge value E Es s Error 506 Duty Cycle not in Range occurs when attempting to program duty cycle value below the
564. y or modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt power gt 1 to 9 Numeric 1 Programs the power coefficient parameter for the sine waveform The coefficient will have an effect up to approximately 500 kHz depending on the number of waveform points that are used to create the sine shape Response The 3172 returns the present power value TRlangle PHASe lt phase gt Description This command programs the start phase for the standard triangular waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary or modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees Triangle phase resolution is 0 1 limited however at high frequencies above approximately 500 kHz depending on the number of waveform points that are used to create the shape Response The 3172 returns the present start phase value TRlangle POWer lt power gt Description This command programs power for the triangle waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary or modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt power gt 1to9 Numeric 1 Programs the power coefficient parameter for the triangular waveform The coefficient will have an effect up to approximately 500 kHz depending on the number of waveform points that are used to create the shape Response 5 46 Astronics Test Systems Publication Num
565. y product or part The warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from normal wear such as mechanical relay life or failure to follow instructions This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies For the specific terms of your standard warranty contact Customer Support Please have the following information available to facilitate service 1 Product serial number 2 Product model number 3 Your company and contact information You may contact Customer Support by E Mail atshelpdesk astronics com Telephone 1 800 722 3262 USA Fax 1 949 859 7139 USA RETURN OF PRODUCT Authorization is required from Astronics Test Systems before you send us your product or sub assembly for service or calibration Call or contact Customer Support at 1 800 722 3262 or 1 949 859 8999 or via fax at 1 949 859 7139 We can also be reached at atshelpdesk astronics com If the original packing material is unavailable ship the product or sub assembly in an ESD shielding bag and use appropriate packing materials to surround and protect the product PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the technical data herein disclosed are proprietary to Astronics Test Systems and shall not without expres
566. ycle sine waveform TRlangle Discrete Selects the half cycle triangular waveform SQUare Discrete Selects the half cycle square waveform Response The 3172 returns SIN TRI or SQU depending on the present 3172 setting 5 100 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Counter Control Use the following commands for programming the counter timer Commands measuring function and its associated parameters The counter timer function is created digitally however it closely simulates a stand W2 Module Only alone instrument so its functions are programmed just as they would be programmed on a dedicated instrument The specifications and limitations of the counter timer are specified in Appendix A The counter commands are summarized in Table 5 13 Table 5 13 Counter Command Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Association COUNter FUNCtion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe TOTalize FREQ W2 DISPlay MODE NORMal HOLD NORM W2 GATE TIME 100e 6 to 1 1 W2 RESet W2 READ W2 COUNter FUNCtion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe ITOTalize GTOTalize Description This command programs the measurement function for the counter timer Each measurement can be set up with its gate time where applicable and display mode Parameters Name Type Default FREQuency Discrete FREQ PERiod Discrete APERiod Discrete Astronics Test Systems
567. ynchronization to external signals the 3172 has an internal trigger generator with a free running clock This clock is asynchronous to the sample clock generator Software trigger Your software may generate an interrupt condition by executing a trigger command You may select arm only one trigger source at a time The 3172 responds only to the selected trigger source and ignores other sources Use one of the following commands to select a trigger source trig sour ext This selects the front panel TRIG IN connector as the active source for trigger events trig sour int This selects the internal trigger generator as the active source for trigger events Astronics Test Systems 3 11 3172 User Manual Selecting the Trigger Level Selecting the Trigger Slope Using Trigger Delay 3 12 Publication Number 980949 Rev H trig tim lt value gt This sets the period of the built in trigger generator Unlike the Re trigger run mode the internal trigger period defines actual trigger events Therefore the period of the internal trigger generator must be larger than the period of the waveform trig sour ttlt lt n gt This selects and activates one or more of the VXlbus backplane triggers TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 as the active source for trigger events If more than one input is activated the instrument will accept trigger events from all active trigger lines Note that if one of the lines is designated as an output it cannot
568. ynchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 22 for a rise time reading of 2 ms 50 us Pulse Vertical The pulse vertical balance adjustments assure that the pulses are A symmetrical about the 0 V center line Note that each channel has its Balance Adjustments own adjustments and therefore after you do the adjustments on channel 1 continue with the same adjustments on channel 2 Use this procedure if you suspect that the vertical balance is not within range Setup 23 Vertical Balance Step 1 Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 2 ms div Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Output On Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETup 23 for a best vertical alignment about the vertical center line 7 52 Astronics Test Systems Publication Number 980949 Rev H 3172 User Manual Setup 24 Vertical Balance Step 2 Equipment oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Vertical 1 V div Horizontal 0 2 ms div Termination 50 Q 2 Connect the P2 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect the P2 sync output to the oscilloscope Synchronize the oscilloscope on the sync output 4 Configure the P2 as follows Outp
569. you toggle between modern and legacy modes the instrument automatically resets all of its parameters and operating modes to the defaults that are associated with each mode Parameters Range Type Default Description MODern Discrete MOD This is the default selection for the 3172 3172R W2 and all of the commands that are described in this chapter apply to this format LEGacy Discrete This selects the legacy format If the instrument was ordered as a legacy replacement it will be shipped with this format as default and there are no other actions that are required to convert this instrument to perform legacy functions If the instrument was ordered without emulation of the 3171 this command transforms the 3172 modern instrument to behave and feel like the legacy 3171 When switching formats from modern to legacy and vice versa the output defaults automatically to the preset values that are associated with each format Response The 3172 returns MOD or LEG depending on the current instrument format setting Astronics Test Systems 5 23 3172 User Manual Publication Number 980949 Rev H OUTPut AMODulation OFF ON 0 1 Description This command toggles on and off the external amplitude modulation input When turned on any signal as specified and applicable for the modulation input will amplitude modulate the output Parameters Type Default Discrete 0 Response The 3172 returns 1 if the input is turned on or 0 if the input is

3172-W2 VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents